Sony PDW F800 Professional Disc Camcorder Maintenance Manual
The PDW F800 is a professional disc camcorder. The PDW F800 can record video in HD/SD -SDI format onto a professional disc (P-Disc). The PDW F800 supports various features that make it a versatile tool for professional video recording.
Advertisement
Advertisement
PROFESSIONAL DISC CAMCORDER
PDW-F800
HD/SD SDI INPUT BOARD
CBK-HD01
ANALOG COMPOSITE INPUT BOARD
CBK-SC02
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Volume 1 1st Edition
Serial No. 10001 and Higher
! WARNING
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel only.
To reduce the risk of electric shock, fire or injury, do not perform any servicing other than that contained in the operating instructions unless you are qualified to do so. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.
! WARNUNG
Die Anleitung ist nur für qualifiziertes Fachpersonal bestimmt.
Alle Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal ausgeführt werden. Um die
Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages, Feuergefahr und Verletzungen zu vermeiden, sind bei
Wartungsarbeiten strikt die Angaben in der Anleitung zu befolgen. Andere als die angegeben
Wartungsarbeiten dürfen nur von Personen ausgeführt werden, die eine spezielle Befähigung dazu besitzen.
! AVERTISSEMENT
Ce manual est destiné uniquement aux personnes compétentes en charge de l’entretien. Afin de réduire les risques de décharge électrique, d’incendie ou de blessure n’effectuer que les réparations indiquées dans le mode d’emploi à moins d’être qualifié pour en effectuer d’autres.
Pour toute réparation faire appel à une personne compétente uniquement.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Vorsicht!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom
Hersteller empfohlenen ähnlichen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des
Herstellers.
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri-Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
ADVARSEL
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosjonsfare.
Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri som anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukt batteri returneres apparatleverandøren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en likvärdig typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt gällande föreskrifter.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1 (P)
2 (P)
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
LASER KLASSE 1 PRODUKT
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye hazard.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
This Professional Disc Camcorder is classified as a CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
Laser Diode Properties
Wavelength: 400 to 410 nm
Emission duration: Continuous
Laser output power: 135 mW (max. of pulse peak),
65 mW (max. of CW)
Standard: IEC60825-1 (2001)
X-RAY RADIATION WARNING
Be sure that parts replacement in the high voltage block and adjustments made to the high voltage circuits are carried out precisely in accordance with the procedures given in this manual.
GEFAHR
Bei geöffnetem Laufwerk und beschädigter oder deaktivierter Verriegelung tritt ein unsichtbarer
Laserstrahl aus. Direkter Kontakt mit dem
Laserstrahl ist unbedingt zu vermeiden.
This label is located insidethe outside panel of the unit.
For safety, do not connect the connector for peripheral device wiring that might have excessive voltage to the following port(s).
: Network connector
Follow the instructions for the above port(s).
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Table of Contents
Manual Structure
Purpose of this manual ................................................................. 5
Related manuals ........................................................................... 5
1.
1-1.
Service Overview
Locations of Main Parts .................................................. 1-1
1-1-1.
1-1-2.
Locations of the Printed Wiring Boards ................ 1-1
Locations of Main Mechanical Parts ..................... 1-3
1-2.
Circuit Description .......................................................... 1-4
1-2-1.
Camera System ...................................................... 1-4
1-2-2.
CCD Block ............................................................ 1-5
1-2-3.
Video Signal System ............................................. 1-5
1-2-4.
System Control ...................................................... 1-6
1-2-5.
Digital Audio System .......................................... 1-12
1-2-6.
Audio System ...................................................... 1-12
1-2-7.
Audio DSP Operation Processing ....................... 1-14
1-2-8.
Optical Drive System .......................................... 1-16
1-2-9.
Power Supply Systems ........................................ 1-17
1-2-10.
LCD System ........................................................ 1-18
1-2-11.
Others .................................................................. 1-18
1-3.
Matching Connectors .................................................... 1-20
1-4.
Signal Inputs and Outputs ............................................. 1-20
1-5.
On-Board Switch and LED Function ........................... 1-24
1-6.
How to Take Out a Cartridge Manually ....................... 1-34
1-6-1.
Taking Out a Cartridge at Power-off ................... 1-34
1-6-2.
When You Cannot Take Out a Cartridge Even
If Pressing the EJECT Button at Power-on ......... 1-34
1-7.
Removing/Installing ..................................................... 1-35
1-7-1.
Removing Outside Panel ..................................... 1-35
1-7-2.
Reinstalling Outside Panel .................................. 1-35
1-7-3.
Inside Panel ......................................................... 1-35
1-7-4.
Handle Assembly ................................................ 1-36
1-7-5.
Front Panel .......................................................... 1-37
1-7-6.
SW Guard Assembly ........................................... 1-38
1-7-7.
Shoulder Pad, Connector Cover .......................... 1-38
1-7-8.
Connector Panel Assembly ................................. 1-39
1-7-9.
Rear Panel Assembly .......................................... 1-40
1-7-10.
Battery Connector ............................................... 1-40
1-8.
Removing/Installing LCD Block .................................. 1-41
1-8-1.
LCD Block .......................................................... 1-41
1-8-2.
LCD Hinge .......................................................... 1-43
1-8-3.
LCD Backlight and LCD Panel ........................... 1-44
1-9.
Replacing the Flat Cables, Flexible Card
Wires/Boards ................................................................ 1-45
1-10. Service Tools/Measuring Equipment List .................... 1-46
1-10-1.
Service Tools ....................................................... 1-46
1-10-2.
Measuring Equipment ......................................... 1-47
1-11. Firmware/Software ....................................................... 1-48
1-11-1.
EEPROM/FRAM List ......................................... 1-48
1-11-2.
Firmware Update Using the USB Memory ......... 1-49
1-12. Other Overview ............................................................ 1-51
1-12-1.
Notes on Handling Optical Block Assembly ...... 1-51
1-12-2.
Standard Torque for Screws ................................ 1-52
1-12-3.
Stop Washer ........................................................ 1-52
1-12-4.
Description of CCD Block Number .................... 1-53
1-12-5.
Memory Backup Battery ..................................... 1-53
1-12-6.
IC Link Replacement .......................................... 1-53
1-12-7.
Circuit Protection Element .................................. 1-53
1-12-8.
Precautions for Use of Condensation Sensor ...... 1-54
1-12-9.
Precautions for the Battery Connector ................ 1-54
1-12-10. Notes on Repair Parts .......................................... 1-54
1-12-11. Unleaded Solder .................................................. 1-54
2.
2-1.
XDCAM Web Site
XDCAM Web Site Overview ......................................... 2-1
2-2.
Status Menu .................................................................... 2-3
2-2-1.
Device Information ............................................... 2-3
2-2-2.
Hours Meter ........................................................... 2-4
2-2-3.
Software Version ................................................... 2-5
2-3.
Disc Menu ....................................................................... 2-7
2-3-1.
Disc Properties ...................................................... 2-7
2-3-2.
Thumbnails ............................................................ 2-7
2-4.
Maintenance Menu ......................................................... 2-8
2-4-1.
Software Update .................................................... 2-8
2-4-2.
Account ............................................................... 2-13
2-4-3.
Network ............................................................... 2-14
2-4-4.
License Registration ............................................ 2-15
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1
3.
Error Messages
3-1.
Error Messages Overview ............................................... 3-1
3-2.
Error Code List ............................................................... 3-2
3-2-1.
Main Code and Sub Code ...................................... 3-2
3-2-2.
Error 0X ................................................................. 3-3
3-2-3.
Error 20 ................................................................. 3-4
3-2-4.
Error 3X ................................................................. 3-5
3-2-5.
Error 5X ................................................................. 3-5
3-2-6.
Error 6X ................................................................. 3-5
3-2-7.
Error 91 ................................................................. 3-6
3-2-8.
Error 92 ................................................................. 3-7
3-2-9.
Error 95 ................................................................. 3-7
4-10-19. SKEW ................................................................ 4-101
4-10-20. SERVO_2 .......................................................... 4-101
4-10-21. ACCELERATION OFFSET ............................. 4-102
4-10-22. ERROR LOGGER ............................................ 4-103
4-10-23. VERSION .......................................................... 4-104
4-10-24. SERIAL NO ...................................................... 4-104
4-10-25. CLEAR MEDIA LOG ...................................... 4-104
4-10-26. UPLOAD TO EEPROM ................................... 4-104
4-11. AUDIO A/D Error Correction .................................... 4-105
4-12. AUDIO D/A Error Correction .................................... 4-106
4-13. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Compensation .................... 4-106
4-14. Adjusting Battery End Detection Voltage .................. 4-107
4-15. SERVICE SUPPORT Menu ....................................... 4-108
4-16. Setup Menu List .......................................................... 4-109
4.
Setup Menu
5.
File System
4-1.
Setup Menus ................................................................... 4-1
4-1-1.
Basic Operations of Setup Menus ......................... 4-1
4-1-2.
How to Display the SERVICE Menu .................... 4-1
4-2.
TOP Menu ...................................................................... 4-2
4-3.
USER Menu .................................................................... 4-3
4-4.
OPERATION Menu ....................................................... 4-4
4-5.
PAINT Menu ................................................................ 4-28
4-6.
MAINTENANCE Menu ............................................... 4-40
4-7.
FILE Menu .................................................................... 4-59
4-8.
DIAGNOSIS Menu ...................................................... 4-69
4-9.
SERVICE Menu ........................................................... 4-73
4-10. Drive Maintenance ........................................................ 4-89
4-10-1.
Basic Operation on Drive Maintenance
Menus .................................................................. 4-89
4-10-2.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR ............................... 4-89
4-10-3.
DEW SENSOR ................................................... 4-90
4-10-4.
FAN MOTOR ..................................................... 4-90
4-10-5.
ACCELERATION SENSOR .............................. 4-91
4-10-6.
LOADER ............................................................. 4-92
4-10-7.
SLIDER-AUTO TEST ........................................ 4-95
4-10-8.
IN-LIM TEST ..................................................... 4-95
4-10-9.
OUT-LIM TEST ................................................. 4-96
4-10-10. SPINDLE MOTOR-AUTO TEST ...................... 4-96
4-10-11. FOCUS ACTUATOR ......................................... 4-97
4-10-12. TRACKING ACTUATOR ................................. 4-98
4-10-13. SA ACTUATOR ................................................. 4-98
4-10-14. LASER ................................................................ 4-99
4-10-15. ND FILTER ......................................................... 4-99
4-10-16. SKEW ................................................................ 4-100
4-10-17. LENS CLEANING ........................................... 4-101
4-10-18. SERVO_1 .......................................................... 4-101
2
5-1.
Structure of File System ................................................. 5-1
5-2.
Data Structure ................................................................. 5-2
5-3.
Operating the Files and the Data Flow ........................... 5-3
5-3-1.
USER FILE ........................................................... 5-3
5-3-2.
ALL FILE .............................................................. 5-5
5-3-3.
REFERENCE FILE ............................................... 5-7
5-3-4.
Other FILE (SCENE FILE and LENS FILE) ....... 5-9
5-3-5.
SERVICE FILE ................................................... 5-10
5-3-6.
Other RESET ....................................................... 5-11
5-4.
Special Items to Save .................................................... 5-12
5-4-1.
White Gain .......................................................... 5-12
5-4-2.
Master Gain ......................................................... 5-13
5-4-3.
Shutter ................................................................. 5-13
6.
6-1.
6-3.
6-5.
6-6.
Periodic Maintenance and Inspection
Periodic Check/Replacement Parts List .......................... 6-1
6-2.
Cleaning .......................................................................... 6-2
6-2-1.
General Information for the Use of Cleaning
Cloth ...................................................................... 6-2
6-2-2.
Cleaning Loader Assembly ................................... 6-2
6-2-3.
Cleaning Spindle Motor ........................................ 6-3
6-2-4.
Cleaning Pickup Lens ............................................ 6-3
Cares after Using under Special Environment ................ 6-4
6-4.
Digital Hours Meter ........................................................ 6-5
6-4-1.
Display Method and Reset Methods ..................... 6-5
Recommended Replacement Parts ................................. 6-6
Precautions for the Battery Connector ............................ 6-8
6-7.
Precaution on Hanging Bracket of Handle ..................... 6-8
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7.
Replacement of Main Parts
7-1.
Optical Drive Assembly ................................................. 7-1
7-1-1.
Removing/Reinstalling Loader Assembly ............ 7-1
7-1-2.
Removing/Reinstalling Drive Sub Assembly ....... 7-5
7-1-3.
Replacing Cleaner Assembly ................................ 7-7
7-1-4.
Replacing Loading Motor Assembly .................... 7-8
7-1-5.
Replacing Optical Block Assembly ...................... 7-9
7-1-6.
Replacing No.2/No.3 Gear Assemblies ............... 7-12
7-1-7.
Replacing Seek Motor Assembly ........................ 7-14
7-1-8.
Replacing Spindle Motor .................................... 7-15
7-1-9.
Removing/Reinstalling Lock Release Assembly .... 7-16
7-1-10.
Removing/Reinstalling LD Motor ...................... 7-17
7-2.
Removing/Reinstalling Mounted Circuit Board of the
Optical Drive ................................................................ 7-18
7-2-1.
SE-709 Board ..................................................... 7-18
7-2-2.
SE-857 Board ..................................................... 7-19
7-2-3.
SE-858 Board ..................................................... 7-21
7-3.
Replacing Fan Motor (Drive) ....................................... 7-23
7-4.
Replacing Fan Motor (Rear) ......................................... 7-24
7-5.
Removing/Reinstalling CCD Unit ................................ 7-25
7-5-1.
Removing CCD Unit ........................................... 7-25
7-5-2.
Reinstalling CCD Unit ........................................ 7-26
7-6.
Service Action After Replacing the CCD Unit ............. 7-27
7-7.
Removing/Installing Boards ......................................... 7-28
7-7-1.
CN-2947 Board and TG-260 Board .................... 7-28
7-7-2.
AT-177 Board and DCP-49A Board ................... 7-28
7-7-3.
DVP-45 Board and SY-355 Board ...................... 7-29
7-7-4.
ENC-118 Board, HP-148 Board and
SW-1391 Board ................................................... 7-29
7-7-5.
FP-157 Board ...................................................... 7-30
7-7-6.
CN-2946 Board and CN-3026 Board .................. 7-31
7-7-7.
KY-623 Board ..................................................... 7-32
7-7-8.
CN-3025 Board and SW-1425 Board ................. 7-32
7-7-9.
CN-3001 Board ................................................... 7-33
7-7-10.
IO-235 Board ....................................................... 7-33
7-7-11.
CI-37 Board ......................................................... 7-33
7-7-12.
PS-731 Board ...................................................... 7-34
7-7-13.
AXM-38 Board, CN-2948 Board,
SW-1352 Board and RM-216 Board ................... 7-34
7-7-14.
MS-86 Board ....................................................... 7-34
7-7-15.
CNB-25 Board and PS-708 Board ...................... 7-35
7-7-16.
CN-3005 Board and SW-1426 Board ................. 7-35
7-7-17.
DR-606 Board ..................................................... 7-36
7-7-18.
RE-246 Board ...................................................... 7-37
7-7-19.
RX-101 Board ..................................................... 7-37
7-7-20.
MB-1111 Board ................................................... 7-38
7-8.
Service Action After Replacing or Repairing the Board ....................................................................... 7-39
7-8-1.
Optical Block Assembly ...................................... 7-39
7-8-2.
AT-177 Board ..................................................... 7-39
7-8-3.
CN-3005 Board ................................................... 7-39
7-8-4.
DCP-49A Board .................................................. 7-39
7-8-5.
SY-355 Board ...................................................... 7-40
7-8-6.
FP-157 Board ...................................................... 7-40
7-8-7.
DR-606 Board ..................................................... 7-40
7-8-8.
SE-857 Board ...................................................... 7-40
8.
8-1.
8-2.
Optical Drive Alignment
Optical Drive Alignment Overview ................................ 8-1
8-1-1.
8-1-2.
8-1-3.
Precautions ............................................................ 8-1
Fixtures .................................................................. 8-1
Preparations Before Adjustment ........................... 8-1
Procedures After Replacing the Optical Block
Assembly and the Board ................................................. 8-1
8-2-1.
Adjustment After Replacing the Optical
Block Assembly .................................................... 8-1
8-2-2.
Adjustment After Replacing the DR-606
Board ..................................................................... 8-1
8-2-3.
Adjustment After Replacing the SE-857 Board ...... 8-1
8-3.
Servo1 Automatic Adjustment ....................................... 8-2
8-4.
Skew Adjustment ............................................................ 8-3
8-4-1.
Tangential Skew Adjustment ................................ 8-3
8-4-2.
Radial Skew Adjustment ....................................... 8-5
8-5.
Servo2 Automatic Adjustment ....................................... 8-6
8-6.
Clearing Media Log ........................................................ 8-6
8-7.
After Adjustment ............................................................ 8-6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
3
9.
Electrical Alignment
9-1.
Preparation ...................................................................... 9-1
9-1-1.
Fixtures and Equipment ........................................ 9-1
9-1-2.
Connection ............................................................ 9-1
9-1-3.
Switch Setting before Adjustment ......................... 9-2
9-1-4.
Notes on Adjustment ............................................. 9-2
9-1-5.
Gray-Scale Chart and its Maintenance .................. 9-3
9-2.
Adjustment ...................................................................... 9-4
9-2-1.
Confirming VCO CONT Frequency ..................... 9-4
9-2-2.
Modulator Balance Adjustment ............................ 9-4
9-2-3.
VA Gain Adjustment ............................................. 9-5
9-2-4.
Black Shading Adjustment .................................... 9-6
9-2-5.
White Shading Adjustment ................................... 9-7
9-2-6.
Black Set Adjustment ............................................ 9-8
9-2-7.
Flare Adjustment ................................................... 9-9
9-2-8.
Auto Iris Adjustment ........................................... 9-10
9-2-9.
RPN Adjustment ................................................. 9-11
9-2-10.
S/H DC Adjustment ............................................ 9-12
9-2-11.
RPN Correction Procedure .................................. 9-13
4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Manual Structure
Purpose of this manual
There are volume 1 and volume 2 in the Maintenance manual of PDW-F800.
The maintenance manuals (volume 1, 2) are intended for use by trained system and service engineers, and provides the information of maintenance and detailed service.
Related manuals
The following manuals are available in this model.
If this manual is required, please contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service
Center.
..... Operation Manual (Supplied with the unit)
This manual is necessary for application and operation (and installation) of this unit.
..... Maintenance Manual
Volume 1: Describes about maintenance information, parts replacement, and guideline for adjustment.
Part number: 9-968-643-01
Volume 2: Describes about block diagrams, schematic diagrams, board layouts and detailed parts list required for parts-level service.
Part number: 9-968-644-01
..... “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM
This “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM allows you to search for semiconductors used in Broadcast and Professional equipment.
Part number: 9-968-546-06
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5
Section 1
Service Overview
1-1. Locations of Main Parts
1-1-1. Locations of the Printed Wiring Boards
Main unit
#[
$[
!\
@[
#;
8
#]
@\
@;
@=
@'
$]
!=
3
!'
#'
7
9
5
!;
$=
#,
$/
$\
![
4
#/
!/
1
!]
2
#\
#-
!.
6
#.
@.
@,
@/
!,
$-
@]
#=
!-
@-
1 AT-177
2 AXM-38
3 CI-37
4 CN-2946
5 CN-2947
6 CN-2948
7 CN-3001
8 CN-3005
9 CN-3025
0 CN-3026
!- CNB-25
!= DCP-49A
![ DET-45
!] DET-47
!\ DR-606
!; DR-617
!' DVP-45
!, ENC-118
!. FP-157
@/ HP-148
@- HP-149
@= IO-235
@[ KY-623
@] LED-444
@\ MA-162
@; MB-1111
@' MS-86
@, PA-342A
@. PA-343A
#/ PA-344
#- PD-118
#= PS-708
#[ PS-731
#] RE-246
#\ RM-216
#; RX-101
#' SE-803
#, SW-1249
#. SW-1352
$/ SW-1385
$- SW-1391
$= SW-1425
$[ SW-1426
$] SY-355
$\ TG-260
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-1
Optical drive
2
1
1 SE-709
2 SE-857
3 SE-858
4 SW-1125G
4
3
1-2
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-1-2. Locations of Main Mechanical Parts
3
2
1
!/
9
1 CCD unit
2 Filter knob (ND, CC)
3 LCD Hinge assembly
4 LCD back light
5 Fan motor (exhaust)
6 Fan motor (drive)
7 Loader assembly
8 Cleaner assembly
9 Loading motor assembly
!/ Drive sub assembly
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
![
!-
!=
8
6
!- Optical block assembly
!= Seek motor assembly
![ Spindle motor
7
4
5
1-3
1-2. Circuit Description
1-2-1. Camera System
AT-177 board
The AT-177 board is the microprocessor board that controls the camera block.
1.
Microprocessor peripherals
The CPU (IC209) uses SH2A (R5S7206), and the clock provides 32 MHz from an external source that is six multiplication in the CPU so that the clock runs on 192 MHz. The memory is composed of 64 MBit flash memory (IC302, IC303), 16
MBit SRAM (IC3056), and 1 MBit FRAM (IC308).
2.
A/D input of the CPU
The A/D port equipped to the CPU is connected to the following signal lines and monitored: CC position, ND position, temperature, IRIS position of a camera lens,
ZOOM position, and mic volume level.
3.
Internal communication
The serial communication includes intercommunication with the BleConSh IC on the DCP-49A board, the writing controls to the character generator IC, and intercommunication with the disc.
The parallel communication is equipped with the 8-bit data line, the total 11-bit address line (A0-A7, A14-A16), control line clock, XRD, XWR, OE, DIR, CS, and (QW-
ERTY, ZXCV, TG).
In addition, the intercommunication is performed with
EEPROM on the DCP-49A board, the DAC and I/O port
IC for the video signal, and the I/O port IC on the FP-157 board with the I2C line that is installed directly to the CPU.
4.
Memory stick circuit
The memory stick controller IC (IC610) is driven at 16
MHz, and the two-way communication and the clock signal are directly connected from the connector (CN602) to the memory stick connector of the MS-86 board via the coaxial harness. This is compatible with the Memory Stick
PRO/DUO.
5.
External communication
The 2 channel serial communication driver CXD9093R
(IC411) is equipped and performs external communication with the remote control unit RM-B150/B750.
6.
ROM jig connector (CN601)
The connector CN101 that can be connected to the jig for writing the boot program (MS-86 board) is included.
1-4
DCP-49A board
The DCP-49A board consists of the block for A/D conversion of the analog RGB signal from the PA-342A/PA-343A/
PA-344 board via the feedback clamp circuit, the camera
DSP block that performs the signal processing, the driver block that sends the analog signal that is D/A converted to the outputs, and the I/F block to the AT-177 board.
After passing through the prefilter (FL300 to FL302), the analog RGB signal input from the PA-342A/PA-343A/PA-
344 board is converted to 74 MHz rate 14-bit digital RGB signal by the A/D converter (IC107 to IC109), then input into the camera processor IC (IC600).
The camera signal processor IC (IC600) detects the average value and the peak value of the camera video signals that are required for the AUTO operations of the camera such as AUTO black balance, AUTO white balance, and AUTO iris control. The detected average value and peak value are sent to the AT-microprocessor on the AT-177 board. In addition to the above operations, the
25/30 PsF conversion function and the 1080 to 720 conversion function are realized by using the DDR
SDRAM (IC700 to 704).
After passing through white balance, white shading, and flare correction, the camera main video signal performs the
Digital GAIN UP, then performs the Digital Noise
Reduction. Then, the matrix signal and the detail signal are added to perform pedestal control, gamma correction, knee correction, and white clip processing. After passing through the selector circuit with which either the camera main video signal or the color bar signal can be selected, the selected signal is output from IC (IC600) to IC800.
The digital VBS signal and the digital Y signal for VF supplied from the camera signal processor IC (IC800) are converted into the analog VBS signal and analog VF signal by the D/A converter* (IC1513, IC1524, IC1525). After passing through the circuit with which either the camera analog VBS signal or the VF Y can be selected, the selected signal is output to the TEST OUT connector.
After passing through the circuit with which either the
GENLOCK IN connector input or the video signal can be selected, the selected signal is output to the VF connector.
In addition, the sync separation circuit and the PLL circuit to synchronize with the external input video of the
GENLOCK IN connector are included.
The detected average value of the video signal detected in the camera signal processor IC (IC600) and peak value are loaded to the AT-microprocessor on the AT-177 board through the 8-bit data bus.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
At the same time, various control signals are controlled by the AT-177 board via I/O Expander (IC3, IC4, IC67).
All volumes are controlled electronically, and the level adjustment is adjusted from the menu.
The main functions of IC800 are the down-conversion HD to SD, the conversion 720 to 1080 for VF output, and the
VF DETAIL generation processing digital ECN processing.
The camera main signal of the SD system is output to IC1000.
After performing the multiplex and parallel-serial conversion on the character signal, audio signal, and the ancillary signal in IC1000, the HD signal and SD signal output from IC800 pass through IC (IC1112, IC1113) and are output to SDI1 and SDI2 connectors as the HD-SDI and SD-SDI signals. After another system performs scaling in IC1000 through the SDRAM (IC1309), the HD signal output from IC800 passes through the D/A converter
(IC1518) and the video signal is sent to the LCD display.
The HD signal output from IC600 is sent to the recording system (DVP-45 board) through multiple character signals in IC1000. After the signal from the RX-105 board on the
SDI input option and the SDI signal from the 50-pin I/F are selected internally in IC1000, the signals are separated into the video signal, audio signal, and the ancillary signal, then sent to the recording system (DVP-45 board).
* :The main functions of IC800 are the down-conversion HD to SD, the conversion 720 to 1080 for VF output, and the VF DETAIL generation processing digital ECN processing. The camera main output of the SD system is output to IC1000.
1-2-2. CCD Block
PA-342A/PA-343A/PA-344 board
The CCD drive pulses that are supplied from the TG-260 board are amplified so that these pulses can drive the CCD imagers directly (IC2: H Driver). On the other hand, the
CCD output signals are amplified approximately two times and input to IC10. The video signal is drawn by the co-related dual sampling inside IC10 and GAIN UP of 0 to 12 dB is performed by the internal GAIN AMP. In addition, the differences in the CCD sensitivity are adjusted by adjusting GAIN. In addition to the above operations, the temperature that is detected by the temperature sensor
(IC4) is converted to the voltage data and is sent to the AT-
177 board via the DCP-49A board.
TG-260 board
The pulses that drive the CCD imagers and the pulses that are used for sample-and-hold of the CCD output signals
PDW-F800/V1 (E) are generated by IC8 and are sent to the DR-617 board.
These pulses are generated from the 74 MHz clock in synchronization with the HD VD signal input from the
DCP-49A board. In addition, the TG-260 board has an interface circuit with the optical filter.
DR-617 board
The CCD drive pulses input from the TG-260 board and the sample-and-hold pulse are latched and output to the
PA-342A/PA-343A/PA-344 boards. In addition, the DR-
617 board has the V driver of CCD.
The CCD V sub voltage and CCD sensitivity adjustment data are recorded in the EEPROM (IC20).
1-2-3. Video Signal System
DVP-45 board
1.
Baseband/Video signal processing system
<Recording system>
The component parallel digital video signal supplied from the video circuit of the DCP-49A board is input to LVIS
(IC400) of the DVP-45 board.
Signal pre-processing such as the filtering and scaling is performed in this system.
<Playback system>
The playback digital video data is loaded from LVIS
(IC400) and sent to the DCP-49A board via the MB board as the component parallel digital video signal.
The component parallel digital video signal sent to the
DCP-49A board is distributed to each path of HD/SD-SDI,
VF, COLOR-LCD, and down-conversion and encoding to the composite video signal are performed according to the setting.
2.
Video compression signal processing system
<Recording system>
The recording digital video signal that has undergone signal processing on the DVP-45 board is sent to MPEG2-
VIDEO Codec (TORINO: IC1000, 1200, 1400) and compressed to the MPEG-2 VIDEO format.
The compressed digital video data is sent to PIER G4
(IC1900) and written to PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904).
The recording digital video signal is encoded to MPEG4-
VIDEO format in LVIS (IC400) at the same time and generated as the Proxy video data.
The generated Proxy video data is sent to PIER G4
(IC1900) and written to PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904).
1-5
The recording digital data via i.LINK/network is sent to
PIER G4 (IC1900) via the PCI bus and written to
PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904).
While recording on a disc, the data in PIER_SDRAM
(IC1901 to IC1904) is sent to the DR-606 board via the
ATA interface.
<Playback system>
The playback video data and the Proxy video data are sent to PIER G4 (IC1900) via the ATA interface and written to
PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904).
The playback digital video data in PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904) is sent to the MPEG2-VIDEO Codec (TORI-
NO: IC1200, IC1400). Decode processing is performed and then the data is sent to LVIS (IC400).
The playback Proxy video data in PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904) is sent from PIER G4 (IC1900) to LVIS
(IC400) and decode processing is performed.
The Proxy video data is used as the video signal during the search.
The playback video data in PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to
IC1904) is provided to i.LINK/network via the PCI bus as the MXF file data.
3.
Sync signal system
Whether the status is on record or on playback, 74/27 MHz clock, HD-F, HD-V, HD-H, HD-PB-F, SD-F, SD-V, and
SD-H that are always input from the DCP-49A board are the reference signal.
Based on these reference clocks, the video sync timings and system timings are generated.
1-2-4. System Control
SY-355 board
1.
Disc record/playback system control
The following functions are realized using the RISC microprocessor (hereinafter refer to as CPU: IC 200) as the
CPU for the system control on the SY-355 board.
<PCI bus interface>
CPU is connected to PIER G4 (IC1900/DVP-45 board)/
FAM controller on the DVP-45 board and PCI-PCI Bridge
(IC900) via the PCI bus interface to receive and send data with one another and perform control.
The PCI bus interface communicates with the following devices by relaying through PIER G4 (IC1900/DVP-45 board).
. CAVA (IC200/DVP-45 board)
1-6
. MPEG2-VIDEO CODEC (IC1000, 1200, 1400/DVP-45 board)
. AUDIO REC/PB DSP (IC800, 801/DVP-45 board)/
AUDIO Low Resolution DSP (IC900/DVP-45 board)
. LVIS (IC400/DVP-45 board)
. Optical Drive (DR-606 board)
. AT microprocessor (AT-177 board)
. FP microprocessor (FP-157 board)
. Character generator (IC503/DCP-49A board)
. LTC generator/reader (PIER G4 (IC1900) built-in)
The PCI bus interface is connected to the Linux system on the SY-355 board via the PCI-PCI Bridge (IC900/SY-355 board) and receives and sends data to the controllers.
<Memory controller>
. SDRAM (SY-355 board: IC201 to 204) control (32 bit x
64M word)
. Flash memory (IC505, IC506/SY-355 board) control (32 bit x 16 M word)
<Serial interface>
. EEPROM control saving the setting data
<External control bus (CPU LOCAL bus)>
. IN port/OUT port control
RESET signal output on each device, loading the switch setting, and similar signals
. CAVA/PIER G4/FAM/BRIDGE each FPGA configuration
. FRAM (IC507/SY-355 board) control
2.
Application device control system (Linux)
This is the system that uses RISC microprocessor
(hereinafter refer to as CPU: IC1300) on the SY-355 board to control the device for the application. Linux is used as the OS.
CPU and peripheral circuit configuration is almost same as that of the system control.
<PCI bus interface>
The CPU exchanges data with the USB controller
(IC1500) via the PCI bus interface. In addition, the CPU exchanges the data with the CPU of the system control via the PCI-PCI Bridge (IC500/SY-355 board) on the same bus.
<PCI BRIDGE (IC900)>
The functions of PCI BRIDGE are data relay of the PCI bus and the I/F function to the OSD display controller on the LVIS (IC400/DVP-45 board).
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
<USB HOST Controller (IC1500)>
USB HOST Controller exchanged data with the USB devices such as the flash memory using the interface compatible with the USB 2.0.
<Ether interface>
Ether interface controls the Ether PHY (IC1/CN-2946 board) and connects to the network via it.
FP-157 board
The FP-157 board has the FP_CPU (IC921) as the submicroprocessor and the hardware consists of the synchronous and asynchronous serial communication, I2C communication bus, and the 8-bit bus. The main function is controlling the audio system.
Main functions
. Synchronous serial communication
The functions of synchronous serial communication are the color LCD monitor setting, monochrome LCD display, audio D/A setting, analog wireless communication, and the ITORON communication.
. Asynchronous serial communication
Digital wireless communication.
. I2C bus
The rear connector, detection such as PLAY/STOP key,
Info_BATTERY communication, Real Time Clock communication, Serial EEPROM (Memory) communication, and I/O control communication make up the 3channel I2C bus.
. 8-bit bus
The 8-bit bus controls the serial communication bus
(SDA,SCL) of the 3-channel I2C bus controller (Parallel bus to I2C_bus Controller).
. CPU I/O
The CPU I/O loads the A/D and controls the I/O port terminal.
Main blocks
1.
Audio mode control
2.
AUDIO level indication
3.
STOP/PLAY keys control
4.
CTL/TC/UBIT control
5.
Real Time Clock control
6.
WARNING_LED control and alarm tone control
7.
Wireless receiver (optional equipment) control
8.
Software download function
9.
Power supply voltage measuring circuit
10. Info-Battery communication circuit
11. POWER OFF soft control circuit
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
12. FP_CPU backup circuit
13. Backup lithium battery voltage measurement circuit
14. Independent operation of FP_CPU
15. REAR input control
16. REAR XLR automatic insertion detection circuit control (DET-47 board and sensor holder)
17. Color LCD monitor drive control and switching/ rotation detection circuit
18. Nonvolatile memory control
19. Monochrome LCD display circuit with back light
Description of each block
1.
Audio mode control
Audio control is performed by receiving the audio mode information and the menu setup information from the
ITORON (CPU) on the SY-355 board.
The switch information of the three positions is connected to the AD terminal of the CPU and processed as the AD signal of the three-valued data.
The audio is switched in the I2C bus PCA-9555 (I/O port:
IC923, 924).
2.
AUDIO level indication
The digital signal applied on the DSP is converted to 16 bits and set in the register in DSP.
ITRON (CPU) reads and displays it on the color LCD monitor. The peak hold time is approx. 1400 ms.
3.
STOP/PLAY keys control
Each switch on the KY-623 board is connected to PCA-
9555 for I2C bus to read the ON/OFF information of the switch and turn on the LED. The switch information is transferred to ITORON (CPU).
At POWER-ON, the LED of EJECT, F REV, PLAY, F
FWD are turned on, initialized, and turned off.
4.
CTL/TC/UBIT control
The switch information of the three positions is connected to the AD terminal of the CPU and processed as the AD signal of the three-valued data.
The ON/OFF information of the switches are transferred to the ITRON (CPU) and displayed on the color LCD monitor.
5.
Real Time Clock control
The Real Time Clock IC (IC908:RX-8025NB) uses nonadjustable clock for the I2C bus. The accuracy is
±15 seconds per month. When the power is turned on, the
FP_CPU reads data and send it to ITRON (CPU)
The ITRON (CPU) sends the time data to the Camera CPU
1-7
of the AT-177 board. The viewfinder uses the time data for displaying the time. The data for year, month, day, and time of the clock can be changed using the menu.
The settings for year, month, day, and time are sent to the
FP_CPU and the year, month, day, and time are written to the Real Time Clock IC.
With a built-in wireless receiver, when FP_CPU is in the
POWER-ON state, the receiver type is determined and information such as the transmission RF sensitivity is loaded. This data is transmitted to Camera CPU via ITRON
(CPU) and can be viewed on the viewfinder.
6.
WARNING_LED control and alarm tone control
The WARNING information is supplied from the ITRON
(CPU) that is used to turn on and off the WARNING LED on the FP-157 board.
The 1 KHz square wave generated from the PWM generator circuit inside the FP_CPU alarm tone is used as the alarm tone.
7.
Wireless Receiver Control (Optional function)
This communication circuit can control both analog and digital wireless receivers.
Analog wireless receivers use the conventional method of synchronous serial communication (200 Bps).
(Interval time: 80 ms)
Digital wireless receivers use 38 KBps asynchronous serial communication to handle large amounts of communication data.
8.
Software download function
FP_CPU has internal flash memory so the software can be overwritten. Load the software in the memory stick into the camera microcomputer and transmit the data through
ITRON (CPU) in the SY-335 board to the FP_CPU where it is written.
9.
Power voltage measurement circuit (batteries other than the info battery)
Power voltage measurement circuit (IC839) outputs two types of DC voltage from DA output of the FP_CPU and switches voltage in the IC839 6-pin to switch between a measurement range of +9 V to +14 V and +12 V to +17 V.
The voltage measurement is sent to ITRON (CPU) as the voltage value. ITRON calculates the remaining battery charge, creates voltage display data, and returns the data to
FP_CPU. FP_CPU displays the voltage display data on the monochrome LCD. The voltage display data can be checked at the same time in the status menu for the color LCD.
CH1&2 or
CH3&4
CH-1/3
CH-2/4
FP-CPU
(CH-1/3,
MIX,
CH-2/4)
CH-1/3
MIX
CH-2/4
IC750
MIX INV
IC705
TC74HC4052
IC706
NJM-2172
VCA
+InA
_InA
OutA
Cont
IC708
NJM386
Final AMP
+
_
Front_EARPHONE
L
R
CN701
CH-1/3
Streo
Mono
CH-2/4
Streo
Mono
IC704
TC74HC4052
FP-CPU(Head Phone Out:Streo/Mono)
SW
IC707
NJM-2172
+InB
_InB
OutB
VCA
+InA
_InA
OutA
Cont
IC706
VCA
+3 Vdc
RV700
+InA
_InA
OutB
Cont
IC709
NJM386
Final AMP
+
_
IC710
NJM386
Final AMP
+
_
+3 Vdc
MONITOR-VR
ALARM-VR
RV701
ALARM SIGNAL(FP_CPU)
FP_CPU (MIN ALARM VOL)
Q707
CN702
L
R
REAR_EARPHONE with SW
SW
R761
SW
FP_CPU
(SP ATT LEVEL:0dB)
Q712
Q715
FP_CPU
(SP ATT LEVEL: _3dB)
Q711
Q716
FP_CPU
(SP ATT LEVEL: _6dB)
Q713
Q717
FP_CPU
(SP ATT LEVEL: _9dB)
Q718
SW-1
SW-2
SW-3
SW-4
CN703
MONITOR
SP
When ALARM-VOL Position 0 %,
Alarm Level is about _38 dBu.
Audio Monitor Block
1-8
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
10. Info battery communication circuit.
This equipment supports batteries with SM Bus specifications. The serial communication bus (SDA, SCL) for IC916 (Parallel bus to I2C_bus Controller) connected to the FP_CPU bus passes through IC927 and IC928
(switching switch) and connects to the serial terminal of the info battery. The Serial Clock Rate is 88 KHz.
The battery type, remaining time, and other information is loaded onto FP_CPU and transmitted to ITRON (CPU).
ITRON (CPU) calculates the remaining battery charge and creates remaining charge display data, and transmits the data to Camera CPU and FP_CPU. FP_CPU displays the remaining charge display data on the monochrome LCD.
The remaining charge display data can be checked at the same time in the status menu for the color LCD.
13. Backup lithium battery voltage measurement circuit
FP_CPU performs voltage measurement on the backup lithium battery. When recharging is detected, the reducedvoltage information is send to ITRON (CPU).
(Measurement interval time: 60 s)
Current is prevented from running through FET-SW
(Q836) in order to prevent power from being lost during measurement. Furthermore, reverse current above +3 V is prevented with FET-SW (Q829), thus extending the life of the lithium battery. The battery life is guaranteed for about
5 years.
11. Power off software control circuit
FP_CPU detects the POWER-SW OFF information. When power can be turned on, the "Power OFF" command is sent from ITRON (CPU) and FP_CPU controls the power OFF circuit on the CNB-25 board.
14. FP_CPU independent operations
When the POWER-SW is set to power off, power is supplied from the UNSW +12 V power circuit to display the counter and other information on the monochrome
LCD. Power is supplied to each power regulator with
IC830 (hyposaturation regulator 8 V) and independent operations can be performed. The operations can be turned on or off from the menu.
12. FP_CPU backup circuit
Even when power is turned off for FP_CPU, the data is saved for the internal RAM and Real Time Clock (RX-
8025NB) through backup on a coin battery. By saving the system data, FP_CPU can be started up quickly when the power is turned on.
15. REAR input control
The serial communication bus (SDA, SCL) for IC917
(Parallel bus to I2C_bus Controller) connected to the
FP_CPU bus sends control for the AXM-38 board through the motherboard with IC202 (PCA-9555: I2C_I/O_PORT) on the CNB-25 board and acquires the following information: REAR_XLR automatic insertion detection
BATTERY
F
E
Battery
ID Register
+
Battery-in
DC-in
Front
Microphone
Volume
INFO_ BATT
_SDA
SW
A
IC927
IC928
I2C_BUS
IC916
PCA9564
SDA
INFO_BATT
_SCL
B
A
SCL
D7
:
D0
8 bit
CPU_BUS
B
IC914
Voltage measurement
AN11
Port
Vcc IC844
Q836
FET-SW
AN15
D15
:
D8
Port
IC921
HD64F2378
CPU
Port
(1 time/60 sec)
CLOCK 16 MHz
IC908
Real Time
Clock
RX-8025NB
+3 V
Battery
ID Data
+3 V
IC838
Voltage measurement
AN14
AN8
+3 V
Voltage measurement
+3 V
CH-1
RV1
FET-SW
(CNB-25 board)
UNREG +12 V
IC839
Voltage measurement
Voltage measurement
+3 V
AN13
AN9
CH-2
RV2
+5 V
IC7
Voltage measurement
AN10
AN0
AN1
AN2
AN3
AN4
AN5
AN6
AN7
FRONT,REA,WRR-SW1,2,3,4
CTL,TC,U_BIT-SW
FREE,SET,REC_RUN-SW
PRESET,REGENE,CLOCK-SW
Monitor-SW
(3 digitize level)
+3 V
(IC805)
Q829
FET-SW
Lithium
Coin
Battery
+3 V
SW-1425 to iTRON_CPU
Voltage Measurement Block Overview
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-9
circuit control, microphone amplifier gain control, operational amplifier power control, and digital/analog input switching switch information.
16. REAR XLR automatic insertion detection circuit control (DET-47 board and sensor holder)
Combine the DET-47 board on the sensor holder and connect with the harness to the AXM-38 board.
The infrared light emitter uses one LED that connects to the CH1 and CH2 receivers positioned in the middle of the sensor holder on the left and right sides. When “Detection
ON” is set from the menu and the XLR connector is inserted into the 3P-XLR connector, the infrared light is blocked, the output from the receivers changes from L to
H, and insertion is detected. At this time, CH1 and CH2 operate automatically and the XLR input on the REAR area is selected. (CH3 and CH4 are not switched automatically. ) Detection interval time is 200 ms.
17. Color LCD monitor drive control and opening/rotation detection circuit
The CN108 connector is connected to the power supply and the RGB signal for video, the passes through CN802 to connect directly into the LCD driver.
FP_CPU and LCD driver are connected with synchronous serial communication. During POWER_ON, parameters such as brightness and contrast can be set. This information is saved in the LCD (PD-118 board) nonvolatile memory and the FP-157 board IC913 (nonvolatile memory).
Rotation is detected by the rotation sensor switch in DET-
45 after passing through CN802.
Opening and closing is detected from the hole terminal
(H801) on the FP-157 board and the field intensity from the permanent magnet (neodymium: Ne-FeB).
18. Nonvolatile memory control
IC907 on the FP-157 board is nonvolatile memory that supports the I2C bus.
This memory stores system information such as the A/D and D/A error compensation values and color LCD settings. During POWER-ON, this information is sent to
ITRON (CPU) and the color LCD device.
19. Monochrome LCD display circuit with backlight
FP_CPU and IC806 (UPD7225GB) are connected by a 500
KHz serial communication port. IC806 is an LCD controller/driver that is programmable with software.
ND800 displays the BATTERY value, DISC capacity, time, and counter value on the monochrome LCD at three hour intervals.
H_AMP12CH_ON
L_A/D_PD12CH_ON
B1
DVP-45 board
Buffer
ATT ch1
PD
AK5383
AK4382
AMP ch1 ch1
FIL
TER
AMP
Buffer
ATT ch2
AMP ch2
AMP ch2
Buffer
ATT
AMP ch3
AK5383
Buffer
ATT ch4
AMP
PD
FP-157 board
B2
H_AMP34CH_ON
L_A/D_PD34CH_ON
MIX/CH1/CH2
MA-162 board
FrontMIC-1
Monitor-OUT
STEREO
AXM-34 board
MONO
REAR-1
(-3,0,4 dB standard ATT)
REAR-2
RX-101 board
FrontMIC-2
FP_H_AUOUT_ON FP_H_AUIN_ON
B3
CNB-25 board
B4
Audio Power Save Block
1-10
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
+5V) I2C-BUS(
+5V) I2C-BUS(
+3V) I2C-BUS(
+3V) I2C-BUS(
TxD1 RxD1 SCK1
TxD2 RxD2 SCK2
TxD4 RxD4 SCK4 TxD3 RxD3 SCK3
PORT
+3V
PCA-9555-5
I/O OUT
+5V) I2C-BUS(
1-11
1-2-5. Digital Audio System
DVP-45 board
1.
Audio signal processing system
<Recording system>
The analog audio signal input from the AUDIO IN connector is converted into a serial digital audio signal
(two channels) with the AUDIO A/D converter on the FP-
157 board. The digital audio signal enters CAVA (IC200) of the DVP-45 board through the MB-1111 board.
The serial digital audio signal (four channels) input from the AES/EBU INPUT connector undergoes level conversion in the AXM-38 board and is input into CAVA
(IC200) of the DVP-45 board. After the signal is decoded in CAVA (IC200), it is synchronized and converted to the same sampling rated as the recorded video signal with the sampling rate converter (IC700, IC703).
Digital audio signals (eight channels) that include input
HD-SDI signal (when the option is attached) are decoded with the DCP-49A board. Then, the signals are converted into serial digital audio signals and entered into CAVA
(IC200) of the DVP-45 board via the MB-1111 board.
CAVA (IC200) selects the above entered digital audio signal and sends it as the recorded audio data to AUDIO
REC DSP (IC800).
<Playback system>
The playback digital audio signal that underwent playback signal processing in AUDIO PB DSP (IC801) is entered into CAVA (IC200), then separated and converted into the serial digital audio signals for analog output systems and digital output systems.
The analog output system serial digital audio signal is sent to the AUDIO D/A converter in the FP-157 board via the
MB-1111 board. After it is converted into an analog audio signal, the signal is output to the AUDIO OUT connector, headphone, and monitor speaker.
The digital output system serial digital audio signal is sent to the DCP-49A board via the MB-1111 board. The signal is combined with the video signal in the DCP-49A board and output as the HD/SD-SDI audio signal.
2.
Digital signal processing system
<Recording system>
The recording audio data from CAVA (IC200) undergoes signal processing such as recording level control, muting process, and MIX/SWAP in AUDIO REC DSP (IC800), and then it is sent to PIER G4 (IC1900) as recording digital audio data.
1-12
The recording digital audio data is sent to AUDIO Low
Resolution DSP (IC900) through CAVA (IC200), Proxy audio data is generated in compressed A-Low format, and the data is sent to PIER G4 (IC1900).
The above recording digital audio data and recording compressed Proxy audio data are written PIER_SDRAM
(IC1901 to IC1904).
The recording digital data from the i.LINK/network is sent to PIER G4 (IC1900) via the PCI bus and written to the
PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904).
While recording to a disc, the data in PIER_SDRAM
(IC1901 to IC1904) is sent to the DR-606 board via the
ATA interface.
<Playback system>
The audio data and the Proxy audio data are sent to PIER
G4 (IC1900) via the ATA interface and written to the
PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904).
The playback digital audio data in PIER_SDRAM (IC1901 to IC1904) is sent from PIER G4 (IC1900) to AUDIO PB
DSP (IC801), After performing signal processing such as limiter, playback level control, and mute processing, the signal is input to CAVA (IC200).
The audio data and Proxy audio data in PIER_SDRAM
(IC1901 to IC1904) is provided to i.LINK/network via the
PCI bus as the MXF file data.
3.
Sync signal system
The reference signal is always the 24.576 MHz clock entered from the DCP-49A board, whether recording or playing back.
This reference clock is divided and timing signal for 256
FS, 64 FS and FS audio processing is generated.
1-2-6. Audio System
Block structure
Front microphone amp : MA-162 board
Input signal selector : FP-157 board
A/D circuit (CH1&2)
A/D circuit (CH3&4)
D/A circuit
Final amp
: FP-157 board
: FP-157 board
: FP-157 board
: CNB-25 board
Monitor amp
Rear input
: FP-157 board
: AXM-38 board
DPS operation processing : DVP-45 board
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1.
Front microphone amp
The front microphone amp on the MA-162 board comes with a gain switch. (30 dB/20 dB/10 dB)
Gain switching can be performed from the menu.
(
_60 dBu/_50 dBu/_40 dBu)
2.
Input signal selector
The audio signal can be selected with the analog switch
(IC1 to IC4) based on the side panel switch information.
3.
A/D circuit
A/D uses 24-bit AK-5383. The sampling frequency is 48
KHz.
The first has an ATT circuit for head room level adjustment.
4.
D/A circuit
D/A uses 24-bit AK-4382A. The sampling frequency is 48
KHz.
The latter has a differential LPF circuit and an output level amp circuit.
5.
Final amp
The final amp is located on the CNB-25 board and is connected to the AXM-38 board with the connector-toconnector. The CH1 and CH2 output signals are output from the 5-pin XLR connector.
The output level can be selected as _3 dBu, 0 dBu, or +4 dBu from the menu.
6.
Monitor amp
Composed of the monaural amp for the front earphone and stereo amp for the rear earphone, the volume control is performed with the operational amp with electronic volume (NJM2172).
7.
Rear input
The rear input is composed of the following: a switch for
Line In, AES/EBU, and MIC-IN; +48 V ON/OFF-SW; automatic detection circuit (DET-47 board) for the 3-pin input XLR connector; and the microphone amp (10 dB/20 dB/30 dB).
Gain switching can be performed from the menu.
( _60 dBu/_50 dBu/_40 dBu)
Line In input level setting can be switched to
+4 dBu,
0 dBu, or
_3 dBu with the slide switch on the AXM-38 board. (Open the inside panel.)
Operation description
After the power to the device is turned on, each port in the
FP-157 board CPU is initialized, the necessary resistor data is set, and MUTE is cancelled. (After approximately 3 seconds, the digital EE sound can be monitored.)
The front mic signal passes through the MA-162 board and
MB-1111 board before entering the input signal selector
(analog switch: IC1 to IC4) of the FP157 board.
The rear input signal passes through the AXM-38 board,
CNB-25 board, and MB-1111 board before entering the input signal selector (analog switch: IC1 to IC4) of the FP-
157 board.
The information from the FRONT/REAR/WIRELSS switch position can be obtained by loading the three
Fs
64Fs
A/D OUT CH3&4 (24bit)
A/D OUT CH1&2 (24bit)
(Left Justified,24bit Data)
MSB
23
MSB
23
D/A IN CH3&4 (24bit)
D/A IN CH1&2 (24bit)
(Left Justified,24bit Data)
MSB
23
MSB
23
0
CH3
MSB
23
0
CH1
MSB
23
0
CH4
0
CH2
0
CH3
MSB
23
0
CH1
MSB
23
32bit 32bit
A/D & D/A Signal Format Diagram
0
CH4
0
CH2
Fs
64Fs
AN34
AN12
DVP-45
DA34
DA12
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-13
signals from the switch connected to each A/D terminal in the FP_CPU (S1 to S4).
FP_CPU sends the switch position information to
ITORN_CPU of the SY-355 board, and then selects the audio signal by receiving the audio mode information from the ITORN_CPU.
The selected CH1 and CH2 system signals enter the differential amp (IC5: balance-to-unbalance converter) and pass through the head room level switching circuit and balance-to-unbalance conversion amp for A/D. Then, the signals are applied to the A/D converter IC (IC102: 24-bit).
The serial digital audio signal (2 channels) converted to digital is entered to VAX (IC200) of the DVP-45 board via the MB-1111 board
VAX (IC400) selects the entered digital audio signal and sends it as the recorded audio data to AUDIO REC DSP
(IC800).
DSP for audio performs high-speed processing for operations such as gain processing during manual operations, AUTO processing, LIMITER processing, 67
Hz notch filter while using the front mic, LPF (15 KHz)
ON/OFF, internal SG, and audio level detection.
On the other hand, the front volume and side volume are connected to the A/D terminal in the CPU and the volume voltage is converted into digital with the internal 10-bit A/
D. After being converted into a multiplication value for
DSP, the signal is sent to ITORN_CPU.
ITORN_CPU performs operation processing on the combined front and side volumes and sends the results to
DSP.
The D/A serial signal for playback passes through the
DVP-45 board and MB-1111 board and enters the digital switch (IC461) of the FP-157 board. In the monitor CH-
SW, CH1&2 or CH3&4 is selected and applied to the 24bit D/A converter (IC453).
The D/A converter output passes through the differential
LPF, ATT balance-to-unbalance conversion amp (IC514), and MB-1111 board. It is applied to the final amp (IC200,
IC201) of the CNB-25 board and output from the 5-pin
XLR connector (AXM-38 board).
The audio signal for the monitor passes from IC520/620 output through the monaural, mix, and stereo switching switch (IC703, IC704). Then, the signal is applied to the operation amp (NJM2172) with electronic volume.
The rear earphone can be switched between stereo and mono from the menu.
The monitor speaker output level can be lowered from the volume. Select one of the following for the ATT value: 0,
_3 dB, _6 dB, or _9 dB.
1-2-7. Audio DSP Operation Processing
Main functions
1.
AUTO-AMP: Two to four types of characteristics can be selected depending on each headroom.
InPut
24dBu
20dBu
10dBu
+4dBu
+0dBu
_3dBu
_10dBu
_20dBu
_30dBu
_40dBu
_50dBu
_60dBu
1-14
_
17dB
_
20dB
_
24dB
Digital_WRR;
Reference OUT : _40dBFS
(DSP setting the same MIC as specifications)
HeadRoom
12dB:ATT 0dB
16dB:ATT 4dB
18dB:ATT 6dB
20dB:ATT 8dB
_20dBu
Tp-1
_21dBu
WireLess
_40dBu
_30dBu
_31dBu
MIC
Max Input : 0dBu
_50dBu
Max Input : _10dBu
_60dBu
Max Input : _20dBu
I2S-Format
_40dBFS
Tp-101
_29dBu
_39dBu
DSP
(TMS320DA150GGU120)
AK5383
24bit
A/D
_30dBFS
_40dBFS
LINE-IN;
HeadRoom : Get 30dBu
AK-5383 input : _23dBu
(X, Y terminal : _29dBu)
MIC-IN;
HeadRoom : Get 40dBu
AK-5383 input : _33dBu
(X, Y terminal : _39dBu)
_20dBFS
AES/EBU;
Reference OUT :
_20dBFS
XLR-OUT
ALARM-TONE
CPU_OUT:2.7dBu
+5dBu
_4dBu
_8dBu
_10dBu
_12dBu
AK4382A
24bit
D/A
_3dB
_
17.5dB
Tp-500
_15dBu
HeadRoom
_12dB:ATT 8dB
_16dB:ATT 4dB
_18dB:ATT 2dB
_20dB:ATT 0dB
(Controled ATT of DAC)
_
33dB
_
15dB
_
+
9dB
12dB
_
9dB
+
VR_Max:
14dB
_30dBu
Tp-501
_10dBu
VR_Max: _48dBu
AK-4382A
Max Output;
±
2.75Vp-p
ALARM_VR(Min):Faint_On
+
+9dBu (IN : +24dBu, Limiter-ON)
+ 4dBu
+0dBu
(IN :
+4dBu, AGC-ON)
_ 3dBu
_4dBu
26dB
_22dBu
_13dBu
HeadPhone
(8 Z loded)
+
26dB
+
26dB
_31dBu
ALARM (Max)
_62dBu
ALARM (Min)
Faint : On
+
26dB
_90dBu
ALARM (Min)
Faint : Off
ALARM_VR(Min):Faint_Off
Audio Level Chart
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2.
LIMITER characteristics: Two to four types of characteristics can be selected depending on each headroom.
3.
OUT_PUT_LIMITER characteristics: Performs
LIMITER processing on the PB and EE_OUT. ON/
OFF.
4.
Turns on and off the HPF (67 Hz) and LPF (15 KHz;
_24 dB). (Runs automatically during front microphone selection)
5.
Performs gain control when CH1 and CH2 are on
MANUAL status. (VR-MAX: +12 dB)
6.
CH3 and CH4 turn on and off the AUTO operation.
7.
Internal SG: Four types of 1 KHz/
_12, _16, _18,
_20 dBFS.
8.
Recording error correction: +0 to _2 dB (started from the terminal)
9.
Playback error correction:
+0 to _2 dB (started from the terminal)
10. INPUT delay amount: Performs delay processing to match the VIDEO and AUDIO phases of each CH.
0
_10
_20
_30
_40
_50
_60
_70
_6dBFS
_9dBFS
_12dBFS
_15dBFS
_17dBFS
Output level at 0dBFS input.
: Features in common of the MIC/LINE input.
Features of the AGC/LIM OFF.
_5.4dBFS max
_8.4dBFS max
_11.4dBFS max
_14.4dBFS max
_16.4dBFS max
_4.8dBFS max
_7.8dBFS max
_10.8dBFS max
_13.8dBFS max
_15.8dBFS max
_70 _60 _50 _40 _30
INPUT [dBFS]
_20 _10 0 +10 +20
Max input level of the LINE input.
Max input level of the MIC input.
AGC/LIM SPECIFICATION
3.
DIGITAL Out Put LIMITER characteristics
Turn the LIMITER ON/OFF from the menu.
ON : Linear operation until approx. _12 dBFS, approx.
_11 dBFS (at Max.)
OFF : Turn off LIMITER at 0 dBFS.
Description of each part
1.
DIGITAL AUTO_AMP Processing
Selects the AUTO level from the menu.
AU AUTO SPEC :
_6 dB/_9 dB/_12 dB/_15 dB/_17 dB
_6 dB : Linear operation until approx. _9 dBFS. Approx.
_6 dBFS at Max.
_9 dB : Linear operation until approx. _12 dBFS.
Approx.
_9 dBFS at Max.
_12 dB : Linear operation until approx. _15 dBFS.
Approx. _12 dBFS at Max.
_15 dB : Linear operation until approx. _18 dBFS.
Approx.
_15 dBFS at Max.
_17 dB : Linear operation until approx. _20 dBFS.
Approx. _17 dBFS at Max.
4.
Gain control during MANUAL
The A/D converted VR value is converted into a DSP multiplication value at FP_CPU and synchronized with the
VIDEO1 frame, then handed over to the CPU to set in the register of the DSP. The maximum variable for volume is
+12 dB. (_∞ to +12 dB)
5.
Recording error correction
For error correction on the A/D converter for audio, the multiplication value is corrected in the range
+0 to _2 dB.
Starts from the terminal with the standard signal level applied. (fully automatic)
2.
DIGITAL In Put LIMITER characteristics (only during MANUAL)
Selects the LIMITER level from the menu.
AU AUTO SPEC :
_6 dB/_9 dB /_12 dB/_15 dB/_17 dB
_6 dB : Linear operation until approx. _9 dBFS. Approx.
_6 dBFS at Max.
_9 dB : Linear operation until approx. _12 dBFS.
Approx.
_9 dBFS at Max.
_12 dB : Linear operation until approx. _15 dBFS.
Approx. _12 dBFS at Max.
_15 dB : Linear operation until approx. _18 dBFS.
Approx.
_15 dBFS at Max.
_17 dB : Linear operation until approx. _20 dBFS.
Approx. _17 dBFS at Max.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
6.
Playback error correction
For error correction on the D/A converter for audio, the multiplication value is corrected in the range +0 to _2 dB.
The correction is performed after the playback error correction is completed. Starts from the terminal. (semiautomatic)
The internal SG is used as the standard signal, and the inside panel for each LEVEL_VR is turned and fine-tuned.
1-15
1-2-8. Optical Drive System
Recording System
Recording data sent from the DVP-45 board through the
ATA bus (Ultra ATA33) is sent to the Blu-ray Disc
Controller (BDC) IC300 on the DR-606 board.
The BDC performs signal processing to conform to recording format, such as ATA interface, ECC coding and
17PP (Parity Preserve/Prohibit RMTR) modulation.
The recording data is converted to multi-pulse in the BDC, and the multi-pulse data is sent through the flexible card wire to the optical block to be written into the disc.
Playback System
• Data Playback System
The RF signal played back from the disc is sent from the optical block to the Front End Processor (FEP) IC200 on the DR-606 board where equalizing and asymmetry correction are performed after the RF signal passes through the AGC. After A/D conversion by the read clock played back in the PLL, the signal is sent to the
BDC IC300.
In the BDC, the signal passes through the adaptive digital filter, and Viterbi demodulation, 17PP demodulation, and ECC decoding are applied to the signal. Then the signal is sent through the ATA bus to the DVP-45 board as played back data.
• Address restoration system
The address data restored from the disc is sent from the optical block to the FEP (IC200) on the DR-606 board.
The analog address data passes through the AGC and
BPF and is converted to digital data in the FEP. The digital data is then sent to the BDC (IC300) for address decoding.
The PLL in the FEP generates a wobble clock (WCK).
Servo System
• Tri-Axis Actuator and SA Actuator
The object lens of the optical block is controlled for focus direction, track direction, and tilt angle by the tri axis actuator.
The light reflected from the disc is converted to the electrical signal by the optical block. The electrical signal is input to the FEP IC200, and the focus error signal and the track error signal are detected. The SV
DSP IC400 outputs the control data based on the errors to the driver IC501 and controls the focus actuator and the track actuator through the driver.
The tilt actuator is controlled for its angle against the disc to be optimum based on the tilt adjustment result for the jitter of the playback signal to be minimum and the output of the angular velocity sensor.
The SA actuator position is controlled for the spherical aberration to be optimum at the start-up adjustment when the disc is inserted. The SA actuator for the double layer disc is controlled to the optimum position every time to jump the layer.
• Seek Motor
The seek motor controls the position of the optical block so that the track to be recorded or played back is kept within the object lens driving range.
• ND Filter
The transmission factor of the ND filter is selectable to reduce the laser noise that occurs when the read power light is emitted for the single layer disc.
• Spindle Motor
The FG generated by the spindle motor is amplified and shaped on the SE-857 board, and is then input into the
SV DSP IC400 on the DR-606 board.
The SV DSP compares the FG frequency with the target frequency, and then controls the spindle motor via the driver IC500.
System Control
The SY CPU IC600 on the DR-606 board performs system control. It controls ATA interface, Data Manager, RFrelated ICs, servo ICs, and loader. It also carries out interlocking control, maintenance and error log management of each device including the optical block.
Firmware programs of the SY CPU and DSP as well as sources of each PLD are stored in the flash memory IC602, and the CPU loads them to each device when the power is turned on.
The BDC IC300 and SV DSP IC400 are controlled by the parallel CPU bus, while RF-related ICs are controlled by the serial port through SYS PE IC700.
Adjustment values and hours meter data are stored in the
EEPROM IC4 on the SE-857 board.
1-16
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-2-9. Power Supply Systems
CNB-25 board
The board checks the input voltage
+12 V, and controls distribution of the input power to each circuit board.
• Power ON/OFF Control
The ON/OFF control is performed in IC1 and IC5. The
IC1 input signals include L PWR SW ON signal, H
POWERW HOLD signal, EXTDC detection signal, battery detection, excess voltage detection, and low voltage detection. During normal operation, when L
PWR SW ON signal is turned to “L”, Q4, 5, 6, and 7 or
Q11, 12, 15, and 16 are turned on, and the battery or
EXT DC IN +12 V is supplied to respective circuit. The
H POWERW HOLD signal is sent from the FP-157 board after the main power of this unit is turned on.
Therefore, the power is kept on even if the L PWR SW
ON (L) signal is set to OFF (H). In order to turn off the main power of this unit, the L PWR SW must be turned off (H) and the H POWERW HOLD signal must be opened and set to “L”. When the FP-157 board detects that the POWER switch is turned OFF, it sets the
POWERW HOLD signal to “L” to turn off the power after a disc operation is completed if the equipment is in the midst of operating a disc.
• Battery/EXT DC selector
The EXT DC voltage is detected and either battery or
EXT DC is selected with priority given to the EXT DC.
The IC5 performs the control and Q4, Q5, Q6, and Q7 are turned on when a battery is selected and Q11, Q12,
Q15, and Q16 are turned on when the EXT DC is selected.
In this IC5, a step-up circuit (Vcc +8.5 V) that drives the
N-CH MOS FET gate is employed.
• Protection from Excess Input Voltage
VOLTAGE DETECT (IC18) monitors the input +12 V.
If the voltage exceeds approximately +18 V, the output of the IC18-1 is set to “H”. This is input to IC1 to start the protection from the excess voltage and turn on the
+12 V output. (SHUT DOWN)
Since this function is a latch operation, the main power of the unit needs to be turned off once and back on after the input power is set to below 18 V.
• Excess current detection
The output circuit of the UNREG +12 V has excess current detection resistors R70, R71 and R72. A voltage drop at the resistors is detected by the IC5.
When the voltage drop at the resistors exceeds 200 mV, the +12 V output is turned off.(SHUT DOWN)
Another SHUT DOWN signal is the H SHUT DOWN signal that is supplied from the RE-246 board. If any one of the DC-DC converter outputs is shorted, the output 12
V enters the SHUT DOWN state except UN SW +12 V.
(SHUT DOWN)
Since this function is a latch operation, the main power of the unit needs to be turned off once and back on after the cause of the excess current is removed.
• Protection against input power connection of reverse polarity
If the input power is connected in reverse polarity, FET
(Q2) is turned off so that the GND lines of the control system circuits are disconnected. Thus the control circuits are protected and supply of +12 V power to the respective circuits is stopped.
• FAN voltage control
The Q13 and Q14 are controlled by the FAN CONT signal from the AT-177 board and the PWM wave is converted to the DC voltage according to the DUTY.
The voltage controls the FAN and reduces the temperature increase.
• Audio Circuit
This is the output circuit for the AUDIO OUT (rear connector). The signal is output by selecting the CH1/2 or CH3/4 in the MONITOR.
•
±4.8 V regulator circuit
This is the voltage regulator for AUDIO using on the
AXM-38 board.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-17
1-2-10. LCD System
PD-118 board
The PD-118 board consists of the color LCD panel drive circuit and the power supply circuit for LCD backlight.
IC1 is the color LCD panel drive IC that contains of the built-in video signal RGB driver, the timing generator, and the VCO.
IC1 also contains the serial interface circuit and electronic potentiometers that are used to establish the various setups in accordance with the commands from the microprocessor
(IC921) of the FP-157 board.
The RGB video signals that are input to IC1 pin-37 through pin-39 receive contrast adjustment and brightness adjustment. Then, they pass through the output signal polarity inversion circuit and are output from IC1 pin-20 through pin-22.
The factory adjustment data is stored in the IC3 EEPROM.
The respective timing signals for driving the LCD panel are generated from the sync signals that are input to IC1 pin-41 and pin-42.
The operations such as turning off the backlight and inverting the video signal left to right or up to down are performed in accordance with the control signals supplied from the microprocessor (IC921) of the FP-157 board.
1-2-11. Others
CN-3005 board
The VF power supply, light power supply, light switch signal, and the EEPROM circuit that stores the rely and system information of the handle switch signal are included.
Handle switch relay
Input and output the handle switch signal (CN2).
Light switch relay
Relays the light switch signal (CN3).
EEPROM
The system information is written to the EEPROM (IC2) by the I2C communication to control.
MS-86 board
The MS-86 board is the connector board for the memory stick connection.
When a memory stick is inserted, the INS signal is set to
LOW so that the camera microprocessor checks capacity and types of the memory stick inserted.
VCC is supplied to a memory stick only when a memory stick is inserted or only when accessing a file on a memory stick. When VCC is supplied, the INS_LED and
ACTIVE_LED (D1) is turned ON.
Access to the memory stick data is processed in the following order: VCC IN
→ SCLK ON → BS Pulse →
DATA IN/OUT
→ SCLK OFF → . . → SCLK ON →
BS ON
→ DATA IN/OUT → SCLK OFF → . . → VCC
OFF.
1-18
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
PB 4ch
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
RS-422 Receiver
-1111 MB
1-19
1-3. Matching Connectors
Use the following connectors at the ends of the cables when connecting the cables during installation and maintenance, or alternately use the following cables.
Panel indication Matching connectors/cables
GENLOCK IN
TC IN
TC OUT
TEST OUT
SDI IN
SDI OUT 1
SDI OUT 2
1-569-370-12
Plug, BNC
AUDIO IN CH1/CH2 1-508-084-00 XLR 3-pin, male
AUDIO OUT Audio cable
(XLR 5 pin-XLR 3-pin, 2 m)
CCXA-53 made by Sony or equivalent
DC IN
DC OUT 12 V
EARPHONE
LIGHT
1-508-362-00 XLR 4-pin, female
1-566-425-11 round type 4-pin, male
Mini jack (commercially available on market)
Power tap (OE)
Made by ANTONBAUER Inc.,
33710 or equivalent
MIC IN
NETWORK
REMOTE
VF i.LINK
WIRELESS
RECEIVER IN
1-508-370-11 XLR 5-pin, male
100 BASE-TX
1-766-848-11 round type 8-pin, male
Connector, 20-pin, male
Hirose HR 12-14PA-20PC or equivalent
DV cable (6-pin-4-pin) : CCFD-3L
DV cable (6-pin-6-pin) : CCF-3L
WRR-855A, DWR-S01D (by Sony) only connectable n
Do not connect with a connector/ cable other than above.
1-4. Signal Inputs and Outputs
Inputs
GENLOCK IN : BNC type 1.0 V p-p, 75
Z unbalanced
TC IN : BNC type 0.5 V to 18 V p-p, 10 k Z
SDI IN (Option) : BNC type
Outputs
TEST OUT :
SDI OUT :
TC OUT :
EARPHONE :
BNC type 1.0 V p-p, 75
Z unbalanced
BNC type SDI 0.8 V p-p, 75 Z,
270 Mbps, 1.5 Gbps
BNC type 1.0 V p-p, 75 Z
8 Z or more, _∞ to _18 dBu variable
DC IN : XLR, 4-pin (Male)
1
2 3
4
1
2
3
4
No.
Signal
GND
_
_
BATT OUT ( +)
I/O
_
IN
Specifications
GND for BATT OUT ( +)
No connection
No connection
+11 to 17 V dc
AUDIO IN CH-1, CH-2 : XLR, 3-pin (Female)
MIC/LINE INPUT
No.
Signal
1
2
3
MIC/LINE (G)
MIC/LINE (X)
MIC/LINE (Y)
AES/EBU INPUT
No. Signal
1
2
3
AES/EBU (G)
AES/EBU (X)
AES/EBU (Y)
2
3
1
(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)
I/O
_
IN
IN
Specifications
_60 dBu/+4 dBu, selectable
High impedance, Balanced
I/O Specifications
_ 1 Vp-p, 110 Z, Balanced
IN
IN
1-20
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
DC OUT 12 V : DIN, 4-pin (Female)
4 1
3 2
LENS : 12-pin (Female)
8
7
9 1
0
!= !-
2
3
6
5
4
3
4
1
2
No.
Signal
UNREG GND
_
_
UNREG +12 V
I/O
_
OUT
Specifications
GND for POWER
No connection
No connection
+11 to 17 V dc
AUDIO OUT : XLR, 5-pin (Male)
1
2
3
4
5
(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)
Specifications
4
5
1
2
3
No.
Signal I/O
ANALOG GND
_
AUDIO CH-1 (X) OUT
AUDIO CH-1 (Y) OUT
AUDIO CH-2 (X) OUT
AUDIO CH-2 (Y) OUT
0 dBm (600 Z terminated)
No.
Signal I/O Specifications
3
4
1
2
RET (SW)
VTR TRIG
LENS GND
AUTO +5 V
5
6
7
8
9
10
IRIS CONT
UNREG +12 V
IRIS PSTN
OUT +3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)
OUT
IN
+11 V to 17 V
+3.4 V (F16) to +6.2 V (F2.8)
REMOTE/LOCAL OUT AUTO IRIS : 0 V
EXTENDER IN
MANUAL IRIS :
+5 V
EX 2 ON : 0 V
ZOOM PSTN
11 LENS RX
IN
EX 0.8 ON : +1.8 V
OFF : +4.8 V
WIDE : 2 V, TELE : 7 V
12 LENS TX
IN
IN
ON : 0 V, OFF : OPEN
ON : 0 V, OFF : OPEN
_
OUT AUTO : +5 V,
MANU : 0 V or OPEN
LIGHT : 2-pin (Female)
2 1
BATT IN : 5-pin (Male)
1 2 3 4 5
1
2
No.
Signal
LIGHT +12 V OUT
GND
Specifications
50 W MAX
1
2
3
4
5
No.
Signal
BATT ( _)
BATT ID
BATT REM
LIGHT CONT
BATT ( +)
I/O
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
Specifications
+11 to 17 V dc
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-21
WIRELESS RECEIVER IN : D-sub, 15-pin (Female)
8
15
9
1
No.
Signal
1
2
GND
Audio CH1 IN
3 Audio CH2 IN
4
5
6
DC +7 V OUT
GND
7
8
SCLK
WRR855 DET
9
GND
WRR CLK
10 CS
11 WRR DI
12 WRR DO
13 LRCK
14 DATA 1/2
15 DATA 3/4
I/O Specifications
_
IN
IN
GND for AUDIO IN
WIRELESS RECEIVER
AUDIO CH1 IN
WIRELESS RECEIVER
AUDIO CH2 IN
OUT
_
OUT 64 FS
I/O
_
IN WRR SERIAL CLOCK
OUT WRR SELECT
OUT WRR SERIAL IN
IN WRR SERIAL OUT
OUT FS
IN
IN
AUDIO DATA 1/2 IN
AUDIO DATA 3/4 IN
i.LINK : 6-pin
2 4 6
No.
Signal
1
2
3
4
5
6
VP
VG
NTPB
TPB
NTPA
TPA
1 3 5
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
IN
_
I/O
Specifications
BUS POWER
GND
STROBE B ( _)
STROBE B ( +)
DATA A ( _)
DATA A ( +)
VF : 20-pin (Female)
No.
Signal I/O Specifications
3
4
1
2
SDA VF
_
_
SCL
I/O
OUT
TTL level
No connection
No connection
TTL level
5
6
7
8
_
_
_
G TALLY
No connection
No connection
No connection
OUT ON : 5 V, OFF : GND
9
_
10 _
No connection
No connection
11 _
12 VF VIDEO OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
13 VF VIDEO GND _
14 VF VIDEO (Pb)
GND for VIDEO
OUT
±0.35 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
15 VF VIDEO (Pr) OUT
±0.35 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
16 _
17 R TALLY (UP) OUT
No connection
No connection
ON : 5 V, OFF : GND
18 _
19 UNREG GND
20 UNREG
No connection
_ GND for UNREG
OUT
+11 V to 17 V
1-22
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
REMOTE : 8-pin (Female)
2
1
7
3
8
6
4 5
MAINTENANCE
1
4
No.
Signal
3
4
1
2
5
6
7
8
TX RCP DATA (X)
TX RCP DATA (Y)
RX RCP DATA (X)
RX RCP DATA (Y)
VIDEO (G)
UNREG +12 V
UNREG (GND)
VIDEO (X)
CHASSIS GND
I/O Specifications
OUT SERIAL DATA OUT
OUT SERIAL DATA OUT
IN
IN
SERIAL DATA IN
SERIAL DATA IN
_ GND for VIDEO
OUT +11 V to 17 V
_ GND for UNREG
OUT 1.0 V p-p, Zo = 75 Z
_
CHASSIS GND
No.
3
4
1
2
Signal
USB_VBUS
USB_D _
USB_D+
GND
(NETWORK)
No.
3
4
5
1
2
MIC IN : XLR, 5-pin (Female)
Signal
MIC IN (G)
MIC1 IN (X)
MIC1 IN (Y)
MIC2 IN (X)
MIC2 IN (Y)
5
4
3
2
1
(0 dBu = 0.775 V rms)
Specification
_50 dBu High impedance balance
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
No.
Signal
TX ( +)
TX ( _)
RX ( +)
_
_
_
_
RX ( _)
8 1
I/O
I/O
I/O
_
_
I/O
_
_
I/O
Specifications
Transmitted data ( +)
Transmitted data ( _)
Received data ( +)
No connection
No connection
Received data ( _)
No connection
No connection
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-23
1-5. On-Board Switch and LED Function
AT-177 board
Ref.No.
S400
Bit
_
Name
_
S501
S402
3
4
1
1
2
2
_
_
_
_
_
_
3
4
5
6
7
8
_
_
_
_
_
_
1
S400
S401 S402
2 3 4 5
Function
Turns ON/OFF the function to display the
TOP menu
ON : To display the TOP menu
OFF : Not to display the TOP menu
Factory-use
Factory-use
Factory-use
Factory-use
Service mode setting
ON : Service mode
(The SERVICE menu is displayed)
OFF : Normal mode
Disables displaying SERVICE menu by “Method 2” in “4-1-2. How to Display the SERVICE Menu”
ON : Disable
OFF : Enable
Factory-use
Factory-use
Factory-use
Factory-use
Factory-use
FRAM initialization
ON : Initializes the FRAM/AT-177 board
OFF : Normal mode
Factory setting
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
1-24
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
AXM-38 board
1
A
S101 S201
B
2
Ref.No.
S101
S201
S203
Name
AUDIO IN (CH1)
AUDIO IN (CH2)
INPUT REFERENCE
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
DET-45 board
S1
Function
LINE/AES/EBU/MIC/(CH1) select switch *
LINE/AES/EBU/MIC/(CH2) select switch
*
Sets the input reference level
+4 dB : Sets the input reference level to +4 dB
0 dB : Sets the input reference level to 0 dB
_3 dB : Sets the input reference level to _3 dB
Ref.No.
S1
Name
SW
DR-606 board
Function
Color LCD turn switch
S600
Factory setting
_
_
+4 dB
Factory setting
_
Ref.No.
S600
Name
System reset
Function
Factory-use
Factory setting
_
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-25
DVP-45 board
3
4
2
1
A
B
C
D
E
D1700
S1900
F
D2002 D2003 D2004 D2005
S1901
G
5
S900
6
• Each LED is used for adjustment and check in the manufacturing process.
• S900, S1900, and S1901 are used for adjustment and check in the manufacturing process.
They are all set to off when shipped from the factory.
1-26
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
CN-2946 board
A
D1
B
S1
1
2
Ref.No.
Name
D1 TALLY (Back tally) indicator
S1 TALLY switch
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
Function Factory setting
Lights during recording when the TALLY switch is turned on * _
Turns ON/OFF the TALLY indicator
*
ON
CNB-25 board
B
A
1
2
D7
D8 D6
Ref.No.
Name Function Factory setting
D6
D7
D8
Overvoltage protection indicator
Low voltage protection indicator
Shut Down signal from
RE-246
Lights when the overvoltage protection starts to operate when the input voltage of EXT DC or BATT reaches approx. 19.5 V or more.
This shuts down the unit
*
Lights when the operation of the low voltage protection circuit of
CNB-25 board is repeated several times due to some error.
This shuts down the unit
*
Lights when the Shut Down signal is sent from the RE-246 board due to a load error of the RE-246 board.
This shuts down the unit *
_
_
_
* : When the unit is shut down under the condition above this level, the overvoltage protection for the entire unit may start. In this case, the indicator does not light.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-27
FP-157 board
S700
S701
S702
S703
S830
S831
S832
1-28
Ref.No.
D842
D843
D844
D845
D846
S1
S2
S3
S4
S10
S20
S460
S501
_
_
3
4
1
2
Bit
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
S702
S700
S501
A
S703
S701
S460
B
S830
D845
S911
1
2
D842
D846
S834
S835
S837
S840
S831
3
D843
S832 S841
S843
D844
S842
S833
S845
E F
S846
S838
S10
S844
S836
S839 S1
S20
S3
S2
S4
G
H 4
C D
Name Function Factory setting
WARNING
THUMBNAIL
SUB CLIP
TEST
ACCESS
Warning light. Lights when FP-CPU is abnormal *
Displays thumbnails
*
Lights during the clip playback *
Lights during the FP-CPU initialization *
Lights when the disc drive is being accessed
*
FRONT/REAR/WRR CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
AUTO1 (ON:H/OFF:L) Selects the adjustment method of the audio level for audio
_ channel 1 *
AUTO2 (ON:H/OFF:L) Selects the adjustment method of the audio level for audio _ channel 2 *
MONITOR
(CH1/2, CH3/4)
Audio monitor select switch
*
_
NC
NC
OFF
OFF
NC
_
ASSIGN2
CCC-SW
ASSIGN1
MONITOR
(CH-L/MIX/CH-R)
CPU-RESET
BRIGHT*
THUMBNAIL/
ESSENCE MARK
_
_
_
Turns on when 5P XLR of the AUDIO output of the AXM-38 board is changed to 3P
*
Turns ON/OFF the assigned function
*
Changes the color temperature *
Allocates the switch functions
*
Audio monitor select switch
*
Resets the CPU
Brightness adjustment *
Thumbnail *
_
_
_
OFF
OFF
OFF
_
OFF
_
_
_
_
_
_
FRONT
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Ref.No.
Bit Name Function
S833
S834
S835
S836
_
_
_
_
_
SUB CLIP
HOLD/CHAPTER
RESET
SHIFT
Plays the clip list
Shift *
*
Displays the display hold/chapter function
Resets the time counter display
*
*
S837
S838 _
DISPLAY
(CTL/TC/U-BIT)
F _RUN/SET/R-RUN
Switches the counter display
*
COUNTER : Displays the counter for the elapsed record/playback time
TC
U-BIT
: Displays time-code
: Displays user-bit
F-RUN : Continuous time-code steps
*
SET : Sets the time-code and user-bit
R-RUN : Time-code steps while recording
S839
S840
S841
S842
S843
S844
_
_
_
_
_
_
RESET/REGEN/CLOCK Reset/regenerate/expand button
DISP
UP
LEFT
SEL/EXPAND
SET/S.SEL
RIGHT
S845
S846
_
_
1
DOWN
CLIP MENU
S891
2
3
_
_
_
4 _
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
Switches the display contents
UP
*
LEFT
SET *
*
RIGHT
DOWN
MENU
*
*
*
Factory-use
Factory-use
Factory-use
Factory-use
*
*
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Factory setting
_
_
_
_
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-29
KY-623 board
Ref.No.
Name
D1
D2
D3
D4
S1
S2
FF
PLAY
REW
EJECT
STOP
FF
S3
S4
S5
PLAY
REW
NEXT
S6
S7
PREV
EJECT
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
MB-1111 board
C
D4
S7
D3
S4
S6
D2
S3
S1
D1
S2
S5
Function
Lights during fast-forward playback *
Lights during playback of the disc
*
Lights during fast-rewind playback
*
Blinks during disc ejection
*
Stops playback *
Fast forward
*
Disc playback
*
Fast rewind *
Moves to the next clip *
Moves to the previous clip
*
Ejects the disc *
Factory setting
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
B
A
1
2 3
S1
4 5
Ref.No.
S1
Bit
0
1
Name
Normal boot
Recovery boot
Function
Starts iTRON-CPU mandatorily in normal mode
Starts iTRON-CPU mandatorily in recovery mode
6
Factory setting
OFF
OFF
1-30
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
MS-86 board
1
A
B
2
D1
Ref.No.
Name
D1 MEMORY STICK
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
SW-1125G board
S1
Ref.No.
S1
S2
Name
IN SENSE
STBY OFF
Function
Lights when being accessed
*
S2
Function
Cartridge presence
Cartridge chucking state
SW-1352 board
S1 S2
Ref.No.
Name
S1 CH1 (ON/OFF)
S2 CH2 (ON/OFF)
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
Function
Turns ON/OFF the +48 V
*
Turns ON/OFF the
+48 V *
Factory setting
_
Factory setting
OFF
OFF
Factory setting
OFF
OFF
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-31
SW-1391 board
S3 S4
S6
S2
S5
S1
Ref.No.
Name Function Factory setting
S1
S2
VDR (SAVE/STBY)
GAIN (L/M/H)
Switches the VDR operation state (SAVE/STBY) *
Switches gain (L/M/H)
*
SAVE
L=0 dB, M=6 dB, H=12 dB
S3 WHITE BAL
(B-A-PRESET/ATW)
Switches the white balance memory
PRST : Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value
A/B : Calls the saved white balance value
ATW : Switches the ATW operations
PRST=3200K
_
S4
S5
S6
OUTPUT Switches the output signal
*
(DCC : ON_OFF/BARS_CAM) Turns on/off the dynamic contrast control *
BARS : Outputs the color bar signal *
CAM : Turns on/off the DCC function
*
MENU (ON/OFF)
MENU (ON/OFF)
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
Turns on/off the MENU switch
Turns on/off the MENU switch
*
* OFF
OFF
SW-1425 board
S2
S3
S1
Ref.No.
S1
S2
Name
REC START
AUTO_W/B_BAL
S3 SHUTTER
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
Function
The button used to start/stop recording
*
The switch used to automatically adjust white balance/black balance.
Turns on/off the electronic shutter *
Turns on/off the electronic shutter *
Factory setting
_
_
_
1-32
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
SW-1426 board
S1
Ref.No.
S1
Name
AUTO/MANUAL
* : Refer to the “Operation Manual”.
Function
AUTO : Lights EXT LIGHT along with the REC operation
*
MANUAL : Turns ON/OFF EXT LIGHT manually
*
SY-355 board
F G
1
C
S200
D
S301
S1201
E
S1200
S1301
D1303 D1302
A
4
3
S300
B
2
D300
D301
D302
D303
5
Factory setting
_
_
6
• Each LED is used for adjustment and check in the manufacturing process.
• S200, S300, S1200, S1201, and S1301 are used for adjustment and check in the manufacturing process.
They are all set to off when shipped from the factory
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-33
1-6. How to Take Out a Cartridge
Manually
1-6-1. Taking Out a Cartridge at Power-off
1.
Open the cover in the direction of the arrow A.
2.
Push the lock lever in the direction of the arrow B with a screwdriver. The cartridge lid assembly is opened in the direction of the arrow C.
3.
Rotate the gear counterclockwise with a crosshead screwdriver to eject the cartridge.
If a cartridge cannot be taken out, turn the gear clockwise until it will go and then turn it counterclockwise again.
m
. Turn the gear slowly and gently. Be careful not to force the gear past their stopping points.
. Be sure not to touch or forcibly take out the cartridge until it is completely ejected.
. Even when the cartridge cannot be ejected with this procedure, do not rotate the gear with an excessive force. This error may be caused by a problem in the loader assembly.
In this case, refer to Section 1-6-2.
1-6-2. When You Cannot Take Out a
Cartridge Even If Pressing the EJECT
Button at Power-on
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the four screws and remove the laser caution sheet.
3.
Push the release pin in the direction arrow A, and pull out the cartridge from the unit in the direction of the arrow B.
n
Be careful not to touch the disc surface in the cartridge.
C
A
Cover
Flat-blade screwdriver
Lock lever
B
Cross head ( +) screwdriver
Cartridge lid assembly
Gear
B
Release pin
B2.6 x 5
Laser caution sheet
1-34
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-7. Removing/Installing
1-7-1. Removing Outside Panel
1.
Open the cover in the direction of the arrow A.
2.
Push the lock lever in the direction of the arrow B with a screwdriver. The cartridge lid assembly is opened in the direction of the arrow C.
3.
Open the BNC cover in the direction of the arrow D.
4.
Fully loosen the five screws (with drop-safe) of the outside panel, and remove the outside panel in the direction of the arrow E.
n
Close the cover securely after use.
1-7-2. Reinstalling Outside Panel
1.
Reinstall the outside panel to the unit with its cartridge lid assembly opened, by tightening the five screws.
n
Do not tighten the screws with the cartridge inside. Be sure to take out the cartridge before installing the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-6.)
2.
Close the cartridge lid assembly.
3.
Close the BNC cover.
Flat-blade screwdriver
Cartridge lid assembly
Screws
(with drop-safe)
A
Cover
B
Lock lever
C
E
D
BNC cover
Screws
(with drop-safe)
1-7-3. Inside Panel
1.
Fully loosen the four screws (with drop-safe) of the inside panel, and open the inside panel.
2.
Disconnect the flexible card wires from the four connectors (CN105, CN106, CN107, CN801) on the
FP-157 board.
3.
Remove the five screws of the FP cover, and remove the inside panel.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
FP cover
PSW2 x 5
CN801
CN107
CN106
CN105
Screws
(with drop-safe)
FP-157 board
Inside panel
Screws
(with drop-safe)
1-35
1-7-4. Handle Assembly
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the screw (B2.6 x 5) , and remove the connector retainer.
3.
Disconnect the CN-2947 board from the connector
(CN2) on the DCP-49A board.
4.
Remove the two screws (B2.6 x 5) .
5.
Disconnect the coaxial cables from the five coaxial connectors (CN10, CN11, CN12, CN13, CN14) on the
DCP-49A board.
6.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN3) on the DCP-49A board.
7.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN602) on the AT-177 board.
8.
Disconnect the DCP-49A board (The AT-177 board is included.) from the connector on the MB-1111 board.
9.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN1300) on the SY-355 board.
10. Disconnect the harness form the connector (CN1500) on the SY-355 board.
Flexible card wire Harness
CN1300
SY-355 board
Harness
CN1500
Yellow : CN10
Green : CN11
Blue : CN12
White : CN13
Red : CN14
CN2
CN101
(MB-1111 board)
CN3
CN-2947 board
CN602
B2.6 x 5
Coaxial cable
DCP-49A board
CN13
CN10
B2.6 x 5
CN11
CN12
CN14
AT-177 board
Connector retainer
B2.6 x 5
11. Open the connector cover.
12. Remove the three screws (B2 x 5) , and remove the tally cover.
13. Remove the two screws (B3 x 8) , and remove the
CN-2946/CN-3026 boards block assembly.
n
Be careful not to lose drop protection on the CN-2946 board, since it is not fixed.
Tally cover
CN-2946 board
Protection rubber
B2 x 5
B3 x 8
B2 x 5
Connector cover
CN-2946/CN-3026 board block assembly
1-36
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
14. Remove the six screws (B3 x 8) .
15. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN2) on the CN-3005 board while slightly lifting up the handle assembly, and remove the handle assembly.
Harness
CN2
(CN-3005 board)
B3 x 8
B3 x 8
B3 x 8
Handle assembly
1-7-5. Front Panel
1 Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the screw, and remove the connector retainer.
4.
Disconnect the CN-2947 board from the connector
(CN3) on the TG-260 board.
n
The CN-2947 board is fragile and can be easily broken. Handle it with care.
5.
Disconnect the harnesses from the three connectors
(CN2, CN4, CN6) of the TG-260 board.
6.
Remove the four screws (B2.6 x 5) , and remove the
TG-260 board.
7.
Remove the two screws, and remove the stay (OUT).
8.
Remove the tape, and peel the GND sheet (OUT) from the main frame.
n
The GND sheet can be broken during removal. Handle it with care.
9.
Remove the four screws (B3 x 8) .
10. Take off the front panel, disconnect the harness from the two connectors (CN2, CN3) on the MS-86 board, and remove the front panel.
Tapes
B2.6 x 5
Stay (OUT)
B2.6 x 5
GND sheet (OUT)
Connector retainer
B2.6
x 5
CN-2947 board
B3
Front panel
Harness x 8
B3 x 8
CN6
B2.6 x 5
CN4
CN3
CN2
Harnesses
CN3
CN2
MS-86 board
TG-260 board
B2.6 x 5
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-37
1-7-6. SW Guard Assembly
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the two screws to remove the SW guard assembly.
n
If the loader has already been moved to the up position, the SW guard assembly may be difficult to remove in some cases. Move down the loader by rotating the gear in clockwise direction with crosshead screwdriver.
Installation
Install the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 2 of removal.
SW guard assembly
PSW2 x 5
Cross head ( +) screwdriver
Cover
Gear
A
1-7-7. Shoulder Pad, Connector Cover
1.
Loosen the two pad screws, and remove the shoulder pad.
2.
Remove the four screws, and remove the connector cover.
Note on installation:
After the shoulder pad is reinstalled, check the slide operation. Check that it slides smoothly with the screws fastened.
B3 x 8
B3 x 8
Connector cover
B3 x 8
LW3
Pad screws
Shoulder pad
1-38
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-7-8. Connector Panel Assembly
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Disconnect the coaxial cables from the two coaxial connectors (CN11, CN12) on the DCP-49A board, and detach the cables from the three hooks and the notch on the MB-1111 board.
CN12
CN11
5.
Remove the special screw (M2), and remove the drop protection (XLR).
6.
Disconnect the harnesses from the four connectors
(CN2, CN3, CN4, CN5) on the CNB-25 board.
7.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN7) on the CNB-25 board.
DCP-49A board
Coaxial cables
Hooks
Notch
(MB-1111 board)
Special screw
(M2)
Drop protection
(XLR)
Harness
CN4
Flexible card wire
Harness
CN5
Harnesses
CN2
CN3 CN7
CNB-25
board
8.
Remove the three screws (B2.6 x 5) , and disconnect the CNB-25 board from the connector (CN1) on the
MB-1111 board.
9.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN116) on the MB-1111 board.
10. Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) on the CN-2948 board.
11. Remove the two screws (B3 x 8) , and remove the connector panel assembly.
B3 x 8
CN1
B2.6
( CN-2948 board ) x 5
Connector panel
B2.6 x
5
CNB-25 board
Harness
Harness
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
CN116
(MB-1111 board )
CN1
(MB-1111 board )
1-39
1-7-9. Rear Panel Assembly
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Remove the connector panel assembly. (Refer to
Section 1-7-8.)
5.
Disconnect the coaxial cables from the two coaxial connectors (CN10, CN13) on the DCP-49A board, and detach the cables from the three hooks and the notch on the MB-1111 board.
CN13
CN10
DCP-49A board
Coaxial cables
6.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN3) on the CI-37 board.
7.
Remove the six screws (B3 x 8) , and remove the rear panel assembly.
Hooks
Notch
(MB-1111 board)
Rear panel assembly
B3 x 8
CN3 (CI-37 board)
1-7-10. Battery Connector
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Remove the connector panel assembly. (Refer to
Section 1-7-8.)
5.
Remove the rear panel assembly. (Refer to Section 1-
7-9.)
6.
Remove the four precision screws (B2.6 x 5), and remove the battery harness assembly.
n
Be careful that the harness should not be caught or damaged by any other part.
1-40
Flexible card wire
B3 x 8
Battery harness assembly
Precision screws
(P2.6 x 5, TYPE1)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-8. Removing/Installing LCD Block
1-8-1. LCD Block
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the two knobs (A).
3.
Open the SW door (R) , and remove the two knobs (B) .
4.
Remove the LCD harness holder.
5.
Disconnect the harness from the six connectors
(CN700, CN701, CN702, CN703, CN802, CN850) on the FP-157 board.
6.
Remove the nine screws (PSW2 x 5) , and remove the
FP-157 board.
n
After removing the FP-157 board, be careful not to drop the unfixed parts.
7.
Remove the unfixed parts.
Knobs (B)
SW door (R)
Knobs (A)
Harness
CN702
FP-157 board
Harnesses
CN802
CN850
CN700 CN701
Harnesses
CN703
PSW2 x 5
PSW
2 x 5
FP-157 board
Unfixed parts
LCD harness holder
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Inside panel
1-41
8.
Remove the four screws (PSW2 x 5) , remove the
LCD harness cover.
9.
Remove the LCD harness through the hole of the harness cover.
10. Remove the hinge blind plate and helical torsion spring.
11. Remove the four screws (P2.6 x 6) , remove the inside pad (L).
LCD harness cover
LCD harness
PSW2 x 5
LCD harness cover
P2.6 x 6
PSW2 x 5
Helical torsion spring
Hinge blind plate
12. Remove the three screws (PSW2
LCD block.
x 5) , remove the
Inside pad (L)
LCD block
PSW2 x 5
PSW2 x 5
1-42
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-8-2. LCD Hinge
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the LCD block. (Refer to Section 1-8-1.)
3.
Remove the four screws of a (M2 x 4) , and remove the LCD cover.
4.
Remove the two screws of b (M2 x 4) .
5.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) on the PD-118 board, and remove the LCD hinge.
CN1
PD-118 board a a
LCD cover
LCD hinge
Harness b a
6.
Remove the screw of c (M1.7 x 2.5) of the back hinge cover, and remove the back hinge cover.
7.
Turn the hinge and remove the two screws of d
(M1.7 x 2.5) , then remove the front hinge cover.
8.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) on the DET-45 board.
9.
Remove the screw of a (M1.7 x 2.5) , and remove the DET-45 board.
Back hinge cover c
DET-45 board
CN1 e
Harness
Hinge d
Front hinge cover
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-43
1-8-3. LCD Backlight and LCD Panel
1.
Remove the LCD block. (Refer to Section 1-8-1.)
2.
Remove the four screws a (M2 x 3) , and remove the
LCD cover.
3.
Remove the two screws b (M2 x 3) .
4.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) on the PD-118 board, and remove the LCD hinge.
5.
Disconnect the flexible card wire of the LCD panel from the connector on the PD-118 board.
6.
Release the six claws on the LCD bezel to remove the
LCD frame.
7.
Remove the LCD panel from the LCD bezel.
a
LCD hinge
PD-118 board
LCD frame
LCD panel
LCD bezel a b
Harness
CN1
CN2 a
Claws
Claws
8.
Disconnect the flexible card wire of the LCD backlight from the connector (CN3) on the PD-118 board.
9.
Remove the two screws c (M2 x 3) .
10. Release the hooks on the PD-118 board from the LCD backlight to remove the PD-118 board.
11. Remove the three screws d (M1.7 x 2.5) .
12. Release the claws on the LCD backlight from the LCD frame to remove the LCD backlight.
Hooks
PD-118 board
CN3 c
LCD frame d
Claws
LCD frame
LCD backlight
LCD backlight
1-44
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-9. Replacing the Flat Cables, Flexible
Card Wires/Boards
n
The flat cables, flexible card wires and boards are used to connect between the following boards. Life of flexible card wire will be significantly shortened if it is folded. Be very careful not to fold the flat cables, flexible card wires and boards.
The six types of different shape connectors are used in this unit.
Because the direction of the flat cables, flexible card wires and boards are different depending on the shape of the connector, be careful when connecting the flat cables, flexible card wires and boards.
Disconnecting
1.
Turn off the power.
2.
Slide or lift up the portion A in the direction of the arrow to unlock and pull out the flexible card wire.
Connecting
m
. Do not insert the flexible card wire sideways.
. Confirm that there is no stain or dust on the contact surface of the flexible card wire.
1.
Slide or lift up the portion A in the direction of the arrow and securely insert the flexible card wire into the deep end of the connector.
2.
Return the portion A to its original position and lock the connector.
n
When connecting the flexible card wire, check the connector shape, and great care should be taken for the direction of the contact surface or isolation surface (blue).
A
A
Isolation surface
Contact surface
A
A
A
Isolation surface
A
A
Isolation surface
A
A
Isolation surface
A
Isolation surface
A
Contact surface
A
Contact surface
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-45
1-10. Service Tools/Measuring Equipment List
1-10-1. Service Tools
The tools and fixtures used in this unit are as follows.
!-
!=
![
8
9
!/
3
4
5
6
Part No.
1
2
J-6026-110-A
Commercially available
J-6026-130-B
J-6394-080-A
J-6029-140-B
J-6323-530-A
J-6570-130-A
J-6325-110-A
7
_
_
J-6325-380-A
J-6323-430-A
J-6325-400-A
J-6252-510-A
J-6252-520-A
3-184-527-01
3-703-358-08
7-432-114-11
7-600-000-48
9-919-573-01
Commercially available on market
Commercially available on market
Commercially available on market
Name
Multiburst chart
Grayscale chart
Pattern box PTB-500
Stop washer fastening tool
Alignment disc (PFD23A-RS)
Bit for torque driver (M1.4)
Bit for torque driver (M2)
Bit for torque driver (M3)
Torque driver (3 kg .cm)(0.3N.m)
Torque driver (6 kg .cm)(0.6N.m)
Torque driver (10 kg .cm)(1.0N.m)
Cleaning cloth
Parallel pin (2 x 20)
Locking compound
Sony bond (SC608LVZ-180ML)
Cleaning liquid
Memory Stick
Flat-blade screwdriver (2.3 mm)
Weight (50 to 100 g)
Usage/Note
Camera adjustment
Reflective type (4 : 3, 16 : 9), Camera adjustment on market
Transparent type (4 : 3), Camera adjustment
Transparent type (16 : 9), Camera adjustment
Camera adjustment
Stop washer installation
Servo adjustment and Skew adjustment
For tightening screw
For tightening screw
For tightening screw
For tightening screw
For tightening screw
For tightening screw
For cleaning
For gear replacement, two pins required
For preventing screw from being loosened
For bonding
For cleaning
Saving data (Up to 4.0 GB)
Skew adjustment
Servo adjustment and Skew adjustment
1-46
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1 2
6
0.5
1 2 3 4 6 5 7 8 9 10 0.5
7
!!=
3
8
![
4
9
5
0
1-10-2. Measuring Equipment
Use the calibrated equipment or equivalent as listed below for the adjustments.
Equipment
AC adaptor
Viewfinder
Disc
Oscilloscope
HD waveform monitor
SD waveform monitor
Frequency counter
Digital voltmeter
Color monitor
Signal generator
Luminance meter
Luxmeter
Regulated power supply
Audio level-meter
Model name
Sony AC-DN10
Sony HDVF-20A
Sony professional disc PFD23A-RS
Tektronix TDS3054 or equivalent (150 MHz or more)
LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP.LV5152DA or equivalent
Tektronix 1755A or equivalent
Advantest TR5821AK or equivalent
Advantest TR6845 or equivalent
Sony HDM-20E1U/14E1U/14E5U or equivalent
Tektronix SG-5010/TG-2000 or equivalent
Konica Minolta LS-110 or equivalent
Konica Minolta T-10 or equivalent
(Output current: More than 10 A)
Tektronix AM700 or Audio Precision System Two Cascade Plus 2722 or equivalent
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-47
1-11. Firmware/Software
1-11-1. EEPROM/FRAM List
Board Ref. No. Type name
Saving data Action to be taken when replacing
AT-177 IC308 FRAM
CN-3005 IC2 EEPROM
All setting values of the menu, ABB/AWB adjustment data
Model name, Serial No., Model code, MAC address
Replacement not required
Required
Refer to “7-8-3. CN-3005 Board”.
DCP-49A IC8 EEPROM Backup data of the CN-3005 board, DCP board adjustment Replacement not required value in the production factory
SY-355 IC300 EEPROM *1
IC507 FRAM *2
Not required
Not required
FP-157 IC913 EEPROM Audio A/D adjustment DSP multiplication value, Audio D/A Required adjustment DSP multiplication value, Power voltage Refer to “7-8-6. FP-157 Board”.
calibration value, SIDE VOLUME adjustment value
SE-857 IC4 EEPROM Adjustment data, digital hours meter data Required
Refer to “8-2-3. Adjustment After
Replacing the SE-857 Board”.
DR-617 IC20 EEPROM Backup data for the CN-2947 board, PA board adjustment Replacement not required value in the production factory, CCD block specific data
EEPROM PD-118 board adjustment value in the production factory Required PD-118 IC3
*1 : Hours Meter, Operation Hours (Back Up)
Serial No. Model ID (same as the data saved in EEPROM on the CN-3005 board)
Network setting (same as the data saved in FRAM on the AT-177 board)
*2 : Hours Meter, Operation Hours, System Information (same as the data saved in FRAM on the AT-177 board)
GUI relevant data, NRT Metadata relevant data, Error Log, Salvage information
1-48
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-11-2. Firmware Update Using the USB
Memory
When the firmware update is performed, all types of firmware are updated.
There are two methods of upgrading the firmware. One is the method by using the USB memory and the other is the method by accessing the XDCAM website. This section describes the method by using the USB memory.
For the method of accessing the XDCAM website, refer to
“2-4-1. Software Update”.
For the method of upgrading by using the USB memory, the USB memory* 1 in which the firmware package file of the latest version is saved is required.
For the firmware package file, please contact your local
Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
m
• *1: A general USB memory used for PCs can be used.
But when the USB memory is connected to the USB connector, if the screen shows “Unknown USB”, or the message screen shows “NO USB MEMORY” during the update, the connected USB memory may have a problem or it may be misrecognized as an unsupported device. In such a case, connect another USB memory and try again.
• It takes about 20 minutes to complete the update.
• When the USB memory* 1 is removed during the update, the USB memory*
1
may be damaged. Make sure not to remove the USB memory* 1 during the update.
• Do not turn off the power during the update.
• When a disc is inserted, eject it.
• Set the VDR SW in the inside panel to “STBY”.
• If the update fails while the LABY update is in progress, picture and character may not be displayed in some cases. In such case, repeat update by following the procedure described below.
1. If a memory stick is inserted, remove it and insert a
USB memory* 1 that contains the package file (extension: pkg) in its root directory.
2. While pressing the REC START button and the
MENU knob at the same time, turn ON the power.
3. Wait approximately 30 seconds after power-on. Then, the tally changes from the flashing at 4 Hz to the flashing at 1 Hz. (Flashing indicates that update is in progress.)
It takes approximately 20 minutes until the update is complete.
4. The tally changes from flashing to lighting.
(It indicates that update is complete.)
5. Turn OFF the power and reboot the Camcorder. It boots up with new version.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1.
Copy the firmware package file (extension: pkg) to the
USB memory* 1 of the root and plug it into the USB connector of the unit.
2.
Move the arrow to the DIAGNOSIS category page named “ROM VERSION 1”, and press and hold the
MENU knob.
“SEARCHING PACKAGE FILE” blinks about 10 seconds.
D03 ROM VERSION 1 TOP
SEARCHING PACKAGE FILE
PACKAGE: 1.00
SY1 : 1.00
SY2K : 1.00
SY2U : 1.00
DRV : 1.00
AT : 1.00
FP : 1.00
3.
When the firmware package file exists in the root, the following display appears.
D03 ROM VERSION 1 TOP
PACKAGE: 1.00 1.10
SY1 : 1.00
SY2K : 1.00
SY2U : 1.00
DRV : 1.00
AT : 1.00
FP : 1.00
4.
Press the MENU knob while the arrow is pointing at
“PACKAGE”.
5.
The YES/NO confirmation menu appears.
PACKAGE UPDATE
VERSION UP OK? YES NO
CURRENT NEW
VERSION VERSION
1.00 1.10
UPDATING : ----
Total time : --:--
6.
When YES is selected, the firmware update starts.
During the firmware update, the tally blinks at 1 Hz.
“UPDATING” indicates the firmware being updated, and “Total time” indicates the elapsed time.
PACKAGE UPDATE
CURRENT NEW
VERSION VERSION
1.00 1.10
UPDATING : SY1
Total time : 00:00
1-49
7.
When the update is completed normally, the following message that prompts you to turn on/off the power appears. Tally changes from blinking to light on.
PACKAGE UPDATE
Valid after power off.
CURRENT NEW
VERSION VERSION
1.00 1.10
COMPLETED.
Total time : 20:00
8.
When the power is turned off and the unit is restarted, the firmware version is updated.
n
If the firmware could not be updated to new version or if an error is displayed upon completion of version update, it indicates that the firmware version update has failed. Repeat the version update by following step
2 through step 8 again.
1-50
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-12. Other Overview
1-12-1. Notes on Handling Optical Block
Assembly
To prevent the damage due to the electrostatic charge, be sure to put the following grounding while handling the optical block assembly (KES-330A).
Grounding for the human body
Be sure to put on an antistatic band for grounding (with impedance lower than 10
8 Z) whose other end is grounded.
n
Because static electricity charged on clothes is not drained away, be careful not to touch your clothes to the optical block assembly.
Grounding for the work table
Be sure to place the optical block assembly on an antistatic mat (with impedance lower than 10
9 Z recommended) or a copper sheet for grounding.
Antistatic band
Precautions
. The optical block assembly is a precise unit. Be careful not to subject it to shocks by dropping or rough handling.
. Do not touch the objective lens.
. Hold the slide base (die casting part) when handling the optical block assembly.
Do not touch the circuit on the print board with your hand or a substance directly; otherwise, the circuit may be damaged.
. The performance of the actuator may be affected if a magnetic material is located nearby, since the actuator has a strong magnetic field.
Keep magnetic substance away from the actuator. if the magnetic force makes a metallic material such as a screwdriver, reflection block and so on hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged.
. Do not allow foreign materials to enter through gap in the cover of the actuator.
Objective lens
Keep away a screwdriver
Actuator
Optical block assembly
Antistatic mat
Hold the shaded portions. ( )
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-51
1-12-2. Standard Torque for Screws
When tightening a screw, be sure to use the specified torque driver and tightening torque.
When a tightening torque is specified in each removal, reinstallation, replacement, or adjustment procedure in this manual, be sure to use it. When no tightening torque is specified, use the following standard tightening torques.
Fixtures
. Bit for torque driver (for M1.4 / M1.7)
. Bit for torque driver (for M2)
. Bit for torque driver (for M3)
. Torque driver (for 3 kg)
. Torque driver (for 6 kg)
. Torque driver (for 10 kg)
M1.7 ( +) screw : 19 x 10
_2
±0.01 N.m (1.9 ±0.1 kgf.cm)
M2 (
M2.6 (
M3 (
+) screw : 20 x 10
+) screw : 80 x 10
_2
±0.01 N.m (2.0 ±0.1 kgf.cm)
+) screw : 53 x 10
_2
_2
±0.01 N.m (5.3 ±0.1 kgf.cm)
±0.01 N.m (8.0 ±0.1 kgf.cm)
1-12-3. Stop Washer
Never re-use the pre-used stop washers.
When attaching the part, be sure to use the new stop washer.
. Stop washer (Sony part number : 3-559-408-11)
How to remove stop washer
1.
Remove the stop washer using a pair of small nippers or tweezers.
m
. Be careful not to drop the stop washer in the unit.
. Be careful not to bring the tool into contact with the other parts, especially the drum.
How to install stop washer
When attaching, it is recommended to use the following tool.(Refer to “1-10-1. Service Tools”. for details)
Stop washer fastening tool
Stop washer fastening tool
1.
Put the stop washer to the top thin part of the stop washer fastening tool.
2.
Stand the thin top of the tool on the top of the shaft in an upright position.
3.
Press thick part of the tool downward and attach the stop washer to the shaft.
Stop washer fastening tool
Stop washer
Stop washer
1-52
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-12-4. Description of CCD Block Number
All of the CCD units have their unique ID numbers.
This number is called the CCD block number indicating the type of the CCD block and serial number.
The label indicating the CCD block number is attached inside of each CCD unit.
Example) ABC xxxxx
Serial number of the CCD unit
Type of the CCD block
Applicable Model Serial No.
PDW-F800 10001 and Higher
Type of the CCD
Block
MYA
1-12-5. Memory Backup Battery
w
The lithium battery is critical part to safe operation.
Replace the component with Sony part whose part number appears in the manual published by Sony. If the component is replaced by any part other than the specified ones, this may cause a fire or electric shock.
c
When replacing the lithium battery, ensure that the battery is installed with “
+” and “_” poles connected to the correct terminals.
An improper connection may cause an explosion or leakage of fluid result in physical damage in the surrounding materials.
The FP-157 board is equipped with the data backup battery.
When replacing it, be sure to use the specified part.
Replacement part : BT1 (on the FP-157 board)
Part name : CR-2032 (lithium battery)
Part No. : ! 1-528-174-31
Recommended replacement period : Every five years
The memory IC stores the data such as date and time. If the backup memory battery is dead or replaced, these data are all cleared.
For re-setting the data, refer to “Setting the Date / Time of the Internal Clock” in Section 2 of the Operating Instructions.
1-12-6. IC Link Replacement
w
The IC link are critical parts to safe operation.
Replace the components with Sony parts whose part number appear in the manual published by Sony. If the components are replaced by any parts other than the specified ones, this may cause a fire or electric shock.
c
If a IC link is replaced while the main power is kept on, this may cause electric shock.
Before replacing IC link, not only turn off the POWER switch but also remove the power cable that is connected to the DC IN connector.
The RE-246 board and SW-1385 board are equipped with
IC link.
Any an excessive current flow due to abnormality inside the equipment, the IC link blow. If a IC link blows, turn off the main power of the equipment once and inspect inside of the equipment and remove the cause of excessive current. After that, replace the IC link.
Board
RE-246
SW-1385
Ref. No.
PS100
PS1
Description
IC link 4 A
IC link 4 A
Part No.
!1-576-677-21
!1-576-677-21
1-12-7. Circuit Protection Element
The AT-177 and CNB-25 boards of this unit are equipped with the positive characteristics thermistor (power thermistor) as the circuit protection element. The positive characteristics thermistor limits the electric current flowing through the circuit as the internal resistance increases when an excessive current flows or when the ambient temperature increases. If the positive characteristics thermistor works, turn off the main power of the unit and inspect the internal circuit of this unit. After the cause of the trouble is removed, turn on the main power back again. The unit works normally. It takes about one minute to cool down the positive characteristics thermistor after the main power is turned off.
Board Ref. No. Address Part Number Hold Current
AT-177 THP600 B5 (A side) ! 1-803-353-21 0.14 A/20dC
CNB-25 THP1 B1 (B side) ! 1-802-063-21 1.10 A/20dC
THP2 A1 (A side) ! 1-802-063-21 1.10 A/20dC
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
1-53
1-12-8. Precautions for Use of Condensation
Sensor
Due to the foreign substances adhering to the condensation sensor chip (see figure below), the sensor fails to measure the correct value of residence to humidity. This prevents the unit from functioning properly. If any foreign substance gets adhered to the chip, replace the condensation sensor with a new one.
m
. Do not touch the chip with bare hands.
. Do not clean the chip with alcohol or other similar agents.
Solders
1 pin
Bracket
Condensation sensor chip
Leads Connector
1-12-10. Notes on Repair Parts
1. Safety Related Components Warning
w
Components marked
! are critical to safe operation.
Therefore, specified parts should be used in the case of replacement.
2. Standardization of Parts
Some repair parts supplied by Sony differ from those used for the unit. These are because of parts commonality and improvement.
Parts list has the present standardized repair parts.
3. Stock of Parts
Parts marked with “o” at SP (Supply Code) column of the spare parts list may not be stocked. Therefore, the delivery date will be delayed.
4. Harness
Harnesses with no part number are not registered as spare parts.
1-12-9. Precautions for the Battery Connector
The battery connector in this unit is consumable parts.
Replace every about 5 years.
If the terminal of connector is deformed or bends due to vibrations or shock, or if the surface of the terminal corrodes due to long-term outside use or other similar use, the unit may malfunction.
Replace the battery connector immediately if the terminal is deformed or bends, or if the surface color changes.
(Refer to Section 1-7-10.)
1-12-11. Unleaded Solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with a lead free mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
: LEAD FREE MARK m
. Be sure to use the unleaded solder for the printed circuit board printed with the lead free mark.
. The unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40 dC higher than the ordinary solder, therefore, it is recommended to use the soldering iron having a temperature regulator.
. The ordinary soldering iron can be used but the iron tip has to be applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time. The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful.
1-54
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Section 2
XDCAM Web Site
2-1. XDCAM Web Site Overview
Operations such as confirming the settings of the camcorder and upgrading the firmware can be performed via the network connector.
The XDCAM website consists of the following menus.
Status menu
. Device Information
. Hours Meter
. Software Version
Disc menu
. Disc Properties
. Thumbnails
Maintenance menu
. Network
. Account
. Software Update
. License Registration
Connecting to XDCAM Website
Tools/Equipment Required
. Personal computer (referred to as PC hereafter)
. Network cable (crossover or straight-through)
Setting the Camcorder
. Change the ETHERNET/USB of power save item in OPERATION menu to ENABL (refer to Operation manual)
. Set the network item in MAINTENANCE menu (refer to Operation manual)
Procedure
1.
Connect the camcorder to the host PC using one of the following ways. (Refer to Connection Diagram.)
. Directly connect the camcorder to the host PC.
. Connect the camcorder to the host PC through a network device (such as a hub).
2.
Start the web browser of the host PC. Enter “http://192.168.1.10” in the Address bar. (The underlined part is the IP address of the unit.) n
Use Internet Explorer for the web browser of the host PC.
Other web browsers may not function correctly.
3.
Enter “admin” for User name and “pdw-f800” for Password, and then click “OK”.
n
User name and User password can be changed on the Account page.
4.
The XDCAM top page appears. Click a menu you want to browse on the left frame.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-1
Connection Diagram
Direct connection of a camcorder (single) to the host PC
1 : Network Cable
(Network) connector
1
To Network connector
Connection of the camcorder to the host PC through the other Network device
(Network) connector
1
1 : Network Cable
(Network) connector
1
Network,
Hub, etc
To Network connector
1
(Network) connector
1
2-2
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-2. Status Menu
2-2-1. Device Information
The settings of the camcorder can be checked in the Device Information page of the Status menu.
Item
Product Information
System Information
Other Information
Model Name
Serial No.
System Line
System Frequency
Video Format
Audio Format
Option
Setting
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Function
Displays the model name
Displays the serial No.
Displays the signal standard
Displays the signal standard
Displays the video recording format
Displays the audio recording format
Displays the installed option
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-3
2-2-2. Hours Meter
The hours meter of the camcorder can be displayed on the Hours Meter page of the Status menu.
n
The function is the same as that of the HOURS METER of the DIAGNOSIS menu on the camcorder.
For “How to reset the hours meter”, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
Item Setting Function
Operation Hours
Laser-0
*1
Operation Hours (r)
Seek Hours-0 (r)
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Displays the total operation hours
Displays the output count of laser on optical block assembly
*2
Displays the total operation hours (Unit: hour, Resettable)
Displays the total running hours of seek on optical block assembly
(Unit: hour, Resettable)
Spindle Hours (r) Display only Displays the total running hours of spindle motor
(Unit: hour, Resettable)
Loading Count (r) Display only Displays the total loading counts of disc (Resettable)
*1 : Not resettable for this unit.
*2 : Increment of the counter depends on recording/playback ratio and operating temperature.
2-4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-2-3. Software Version
The version of the software can be checked in the Software Version page of the Status menu.
n
The function is the same as that of the ROM VERSION menu of the DIAGNOSIS menu on the camcorder.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-5
Item Setting Function
Product Information
Software Version
Model Name
Serial No.
PACKAGE
SY1
SY2K
SY2U
DRV
PIER
BRDG
CAVA
LVIS
DSP0
DSP2
PRXA
TSYS
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Displays the model name
Displays the serial No.
Displays the firmware package version
*1
Displays the IC200 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board *1
Displays the IC1300 version stored in the ROM (IC1405, IC1406) on the
SY-355 board
*1
Displays the IC1300 version stored in the ROM (IC1405, IC1406) on the
SY-355 board
*1
Displays the IC600 version stored in the ROM (IC602) on the DR-606 board *1
Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC1900 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board *1
Displays the SY-355 board’s IC900 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board
*1
Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC200 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board *1
Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC400 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board
*1
Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC800 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board
*1
Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC801 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board *1
Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC900 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board
*1
Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC1000, IC1200, IC1400 version stored in the
ROM (IC505, IC506) on the SY-355 board *1
TMBP
AT
FP
LABY
FAM
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC1000, IC1200, IC1400 version stored in the
ROM (IC505, IC506) on the SY-355 board
*1
Displays the IC209 version stored in the ROM (IC302, IC303) on the
AT-177 board *1
Displays the ROM version of the IC921 on the FP-157 board *1
Displays the ROM version of the IC1000 on the DCP-49A board
*1
Displays the SY-355 board’s IC600 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board *1 *2
FTBL Display only Displays the ROM version of the IC505, IC506 on the SY-355 board
*1
*1 : Using the firmware package file, the version can be upgraded.
*2 : Displayed only when OPERATION MENU - POWER SAVE - i.LINK(FAM) is set to ENABL.
2-6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-3. Disc Menu
2-3-1. Disc Properties
The information on the disc inserted in the camcorder can be checked on the Disc Properties page of the
Disc menu.
For details, refer to Operation manual.
2-3-2. Thumbnails
The thumbnails and properties of the clips on the disc inserted in the camcorder can be checked on the
Thumbnails page of the Disc menu.
For details, refer to Operation manual.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-7
2-4. Maintenance Menu
2-4-1. Software Update
In the Software Update page of the Maintenance menu, the batched update using the firmware package file can be performed.
In this section, the update method using the Web browser (Internet Explorer) is explained.
n
The figures shown in this page are the sample of display. Due to the specification change, the actual screen display may differ from the sample figures.
Tools/Equipment Required
. Personal computer (referred to as PC hereafter)
. Firmware package file
. Network cable (crossover or straight-through)
For obtaining the firmware package, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
Preparation
1.
Eject the disc.
2.
Remove the i.LINK cable, the headphones and the audio cable.
3.
Set the VDR switch in inside panel to STBY.
4.
Connect the camcorder in either method mentioned below. (Refer to Connection Diagram.)
. Connect the camcorder and the host PC via other network device (such as a hub).
. Connect the camcorder and the PC directly (using network crossover cable).
5.
Copy the obtained firmware package to an arbitrary directory on the host PC.
6.
Start up the Internet Explorer of host PC.
n
Use the Internet Explorer for updating.
If other browser is used, the update may not be properly done.
7.
Select “Tool” - “Internet Options”.
8.
Click “Delete Files” on the “General” page to delete the Temporary Internet files.
2-8
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9.
The confirmation message appears. Click “OK”.
10. Click “LAN Settings” on the “Connections” page.
11. Confirm that the checkbox of “Use a proxy server for your LAN” is not checked.
If checked, uncheck the checkbox.
12. Click “OK”.
13. Click “OK” on the Internet Options window.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-9
Update Procedure
1.
Start up the Internet Explorer, and enter “http://192.168.1.10” in the Address bar. (Where the underlined part is the IP address of the camcorder.)
2.
Enter “admin” for User name and “pdw-f800” for Password. Then click “OK”.
The XDCAM top page appears.
3.
Click “Software Update” on the Maintenance menu in the left frame.
4.
Click “Browse” and select the firmware package file copied in step 5 of “Preparation”.
5.
Click “To Step-2”.
2-10
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
6.
The current version firmware and new version firmware appears.
When the firmware update is click “To Step-3”.
7.
The update starts, and it changes the following display.
8.
When the status turns to “Finished”, check that each firmware program is properly updated or not.
(OK or NG) n
If no change is observed on the download menu for 20 minutes or any firmware program is marked
“NG”, the update is failed. In this case, return to step 2 in “Preparation”. If the update is failed again, contact your local Sony Sales Office/Service Center.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-11
9.
When “OK” appears for all of the firmware programs, click “To Step-4”.
10. Click “Completed”.
11. Turn off the POWER switch and turn on again, then the update is completed.
2-12
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-4-2. Account
The user password for the XDCAM website can be changed on the Account page of the Maintenance menu.
Item Setting Function
User Registration User Name
Password
31-byte alphanumeric User name and hyphen
*
31-byte alphanumeric New password and hyphen *
Verify Password 31-byte alphanumeric New password (Re-enter the new password for and hyphen * verification)
Status Display only Success: Displayed when the user password is changed
Error: Displayed when an unusable character is used in the password, or the verify password is conflict
* : Uppercase and lowercase characters are distinguished.
Procedure
1.
Enter the new password in the Password box and Verify Password box.
(Pressing “Reset” clears the Input window.)
2.
Press “Execute” to change the password.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-13
2-4-3. Network
The network-related settings can be changed on the Network page of the Maintenance menu.
n
The function is the same as that of the NETWORK page of the MAINTENANCE menu on the camcorder.
Item
Hostname
Domain
Setting
Character string
Character string
IP Address
Subnet Mask xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Default Gateway xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
DNS1 xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
DNS2
DHCP xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Enable/Disable
MAC Address
Link Speed
Duplex
Display only
AUTO/10Mbps/100Mbps
AUTO/Full Duplex/
Half Duplex
UPnP Enable/Disable
Default Function
Serial No. of PDW-F800 Sets a host name
_
192.168.1.10
255.255.255.0
Sets a domain name
Sets an IP address (See below)
Sets a subnet mask (See below)
0.0.0.0
_
_
Disable
_
Auto
Auto
Sets a default gateway (See below)
Sets a DNS server 1
Sets a DNS server 2
Sets whether to automatically acquire an IP address on the DHCP server
Enable: Enables automatic acquisition. If the server does not respond in 30 seconds, the IP address is set by Auto IP
Disable: Disables automatic acquisition
Displays a MAC address
Sets a communication speed
Disable
Sets a communication mode
Auto
Full Duplex: Full-duplex communication
Half Duplex: Half-duplex communication
Sets whether to use a UPnP
Enable: Use
Disable: Not use
Procedure
1.
Enter the IP address (or the subnet mask or the default gateway).
(Pressing “Reset” clears the Input window.)
2.
Press “Execute” to change the setting.
2-14
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-4-4. License Registration
License registration of software option using the Install key can be made from the
License Registration page of the Maintenance menu.
Procedure
1.
Enter the Install key character string in the Install-key field or alternately click the “Browse” button in the Install-key list file field to select the Install key list file.
2.
Click “Send”.
3.
The software option that is enabled by sending the Install key is displayed. To register the software option being displayed, click the “Execute” button.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
2-15
4.
The page that tells completion of registration appears.
5.
Turn the POWER switch OFF once and back ON. Functions of the registered software option are enabled.
6.
Confirm that the software option can be operated from the Device Information page of the Status menu.
2-16
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Section 3
Error Messages
3-1. Error Messages Overview
This PDW-F800 has a self diagnosis function to check internal errors. When the PDW-F800 detects an error, its error code and description are displayed on the following display units.
. Viewfinder display (error code only)
. Color LCD display
When an error occurs, its error code information is recorded in the error logger (maintenance logger) of the main unit and also in the error logger (drive logger) of the drive unit.
For details of the error logger, refer to “4-15. SERVICE SUPPORT Menu” for the error logger of the main unit, and to “4-10-22. ERROR LOGGER” for the error logger of the drive unit.
Refer to respective error tables for display contents on the viewfinder display and for recording/nonrecording in the error loggers.
HD422 50
DISP SEL: When CHAR is selected.
DISP SEL: When STATUS is selected.
HD422 50
TCG
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
3-1
3-2. Error Code List
3-2-1. Main Code and Sub Code
Main Code
An error code is provided in combination of 2-digit main code and 3-digit sub code.
XX-XXX
20
3X
5X
6X
91
92
95
Main code
Main code
0X
Sub code :
For details of sub codes, refer to respective error tables.
Main error description
Optical drive control errors, device errors
. 02: Optical devices (LD, LCD)
. 03: Optical drive two-axis (FCS, TRK)
. 04: Optical drive seeking
. 06: Optical drive SA actuator
. 08: Optical drive spindle
Loader assembly errors
Optical drive sensor system errors
Read data errors
Startup errors
Interface errors between CPU and peripheral devices
Synchronization system errors
Video/audio signal processing device errors
If multiple errors occur simultaneously
The highest-priority error is displayed.
When a higher-priority error is cleared, the following-priority error code is displayed.
Protection Mode
When this unit detects an error, it enters a protection mode to prevent the cartridge disc, optical drive, and other components from damage or failure.
The protection mode depends on error status. When a cartridge is inserted, press the EJECT button and remove the cartridge.
The cartridge may not be ejected even after the EJECT command has been received depending on error status. In this case, turn the unit power OFF and ON.
3-2
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
3-2-2. Error 0X
When errors related to optical drive control or to devices are detected, the following error codes are displayed.
Main Sub Time data Maintenance Drive code code display logger logger
Description
02 020
←
O O
Optical block assembly is recording at maximum laser output.
Perform the pickup lens cleaning. (Refer to Section 4-10-17.)
F2E
←
O O Laser of optical block assembly is determined to be deteriorated in the laser deterioration assessment for optical block assembly.
F37
←
O O No movement is detected in the ND filter initial operation check of optical block assembly.
X25
X26
←
←
←
O
O
O
O
The laser output of the optical block assembly is abnormal.
The laser output coefficient of the optical block assembly cannot be adjusted.
X27 O O The laser current of the optical block assembly is abnormal (zero or excessive).
X28
←
O O The optical block assembly laser output is stopped due to the judgment that no cartridge is inserted.
03
X37
060
←
←
←
O
X
O
O
The ND filter setting of the optical block assembly cannot be changed.
Tracking servo of optical block assembly is frequently down.
X54 O O No signal can be detected from the disc required for the focus servo of the optical block assembly.
X57
←
O O No control current is detected in the focus servo of the optical block assembly.
X58
←
O O
Excessive control current is detected in the focus servo of the optical block assembly.
X67
←
O O No control current is detected in the tracking servo of the optical block assembly.
X68
←
O O Excessive control current is detected in the tracking servo of the optical block assembly.
04
06
X7C
X7D
049
←
←
←
←
O
O
O
O
O
O
Optical block assembly cannot move to disc’s innermost circumference.
Optical block assembly cannot move to disc’s outermost circumference.
SA actuator of optical block assembly cannot move to the target position.
E41 O O The SA actuator reference position cannot be detected during the startup adjustment of the optical block assembly.
F41
←
O O
The SA actuator reference position cannot be detected during the power-on initialization of the optical block assembly.
08 091
←
O O Spindle motor does not rotate after the predetermined time has passed (or no
FG signal is detected).
095
292
992
←
←
←
O
O
O
O
O
O
Spindle motor cannot be stopped (or abnormal FG signal is detected).
Spindle motor rotation is detected during vertical move of loading.
*
Spindle motor rotation is detected during vertical move of unloading.
* : The vertical move of loading/unloading is also carried out by STBY ON/OFF.
*
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
3-3
Sub Code
n
Any number of the following is applicable for “X” in the sub codes below, showing an operation status where the error is detected.
Example) Error 0X (X27)
X27
→827: Laser current of optical block assembly is abnormal (zero or excessive) “during horizontal move of unloading”.
Example) Error 5X (X0B)
X0B
→80B: Address cannot be read from the disc in optical block assembly “during horizontal move of unloading”.
4:
5:
6:
7:
0:
1:
2:
3:
Operation cannot be identified or no need to be identified.
During loading
During vertical move of loading
Disc is not rotating
Seeking
Reading
Writing
Standby state
8:
9:
During horizontal move of unloading
During vertical move of unloading
A: During disc removal
B: During lens cleaning or device checking
C, D: (Not used)
E: During startup adjustment of optical block assembly
F: During power-on initialization of optical block assembly SA actuator
3-2-3. Error 20
When errors related to loader assembly are detected, the following error codes are displayed.
Description Main Sub Time data Maintenance Drive code code display logger logger
20 018
111
117
←
←
←
O
O
O
O
O
O
3-4
118
211
213
217
218
811
818
911
918
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected.
Horizontal move of loading did not end within the predetermined time.
Displacement of cartridge is detected in the loader during horizontal move of loading.
An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected during horizontal move of loading.
Vertical move of loading did not end within the predetermined time.
Cartridge cannot be detected after loading.
Displacement of cartridge is detected in the loader during vertical move of loading.
An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected during vertical move of loading.
Ejection operation did not end within the predetermined time.
An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected during the ejection operation.
Unchucking operation did not end within the predetermined time.
An abnormal current of the loading motor is detected during the unchucking operation.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
3-2-4. Error 3X
When errors related to the optical drive sensor system are detected, the following error codes are displayed.
Description Main Sub Time data code code display
34
35
37
3C
500
509
500
500
500
Maintenance Drive logger logger
←
←
ACC Sensor!
X
High TEMP!
HUMID!
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Loader position sensor (SE-709 board) is detects abnormal code.
Sensor hole (SE-857,858 board) is detects abnormal code.
Abnormality of acceleration sensor is detected.
The temperature sensor of the optical block assembly is abnormal.
Dew condensation is detected.
3-2-5. Error 5X
When read data errors are detected, the following error codes are displayed.
Description Main Sub Time data code code display
50
51
52
010
011
020
021
X0B
Maintenance logger
(Not displayed) X
(Not displayed) X
DI read err
DI read err
Read err
X
X
X
Drive logger
O
O
O
O
O
BCA area data cannot be read.
BCA area data is abnormal.
PIC area data cannot be read.
PIC area data is abnormal.
Address cannot be read from disc in optical block assembly.
3-2-6. Error 6X
When errors related to startup operation are detected, the following error codes are displayed.
Description Main Sub Time data code code display
60
6F
E00
E00
Maintenance Drive logger logger
(Not displayed) X
DRV ADJ err X
O
O
Optical block assembly cannot seek to target position during startup.
Optical block assembly startup adjustment cannot be completed.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
3-5
3-2-7. Error 91
When interface errors between CPU and peripheral devices are detected, the following error codes are displayed.
n
System control CPU: IC200 on the SY-355 board
Description Main Sub Time data code code display
91 125
←
Maintenance Drive logger logger
O X
130
13B
13C
13D
155
165
185
1C1
215
239
23E
275
285
2B5
430
551
595
596
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
System control CPU (FP: IC921/FP-157 board) detects interruption in communication with key control CPU (System control CPU detects).
System control CPU detects flash memory (IC505, IC506/SY-355 board) error.
System control CPU detects an error in hours meter area (EEPROM:
IC200/SY-355 board).
System control CPU detects an error in adjustment data area (EEPROM:
IC300/SY-355 board).
System control CPU detects an error in hours meter area (FROM: IC507/
SY-355 board).
System control CPU detects interruption in communication with optical drive (DR-606 board).
System control CPU detects interruption in communication with camera control CPU (IC209/AT-177 board) (System control CPU detects).
System control CPU detects interruption in communication with IC for driving color LCD (IC1/PD-118 board) (System control CPU detects).
System control CPU detects software option’s installation key error.
Key control CPU (FP: IC721/FP-157 board) detects interruption in communication with system control CPU (Key control CPU detects).
Key control CPU (FP: IC921/FP-157 board) detects EEPROM (IC913/FP-
157 board) error.
Key control CPU (FP: IC921/FP-157 board) detects color LCD EEPROM
(IC3/PD-118 board) error.
Key control CPU (FP: IC921/FP-157 board) detects I
2
C I/O (IC202/CNB-
25 board) error.
Key control CPU (FP: IC921/FP-157 board) detects interruption in communication with color LCD EEPROM (IC1/PD-118 board) error (Key control detects).
Key control CPU (FP: IC921/FP-157 board) detects Real time Clock
(IC908/FP-157 board) error.
System control CPU2 (IC1300/SY-355 board) detects flash memory
(IC1405, IC1406/SY-355 board) error.
Optical drive’s system control CPU (DRV: IC600/DR-606 board) detects firmware error.
Perform the firmware update. (Refer to Section 1-11-2.)
Optical drive’s system control CPU (DRV: IC600/DR-606 board) detects interruption in communication with SV DSP (IC400/DR-606 board).
Optical drive’s system control CPU (DRV: IC600/DR-606 board) detects no reply from SV DSP (DRV: IC400/DR-606 board) during communication with SV DSP.
3-6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
3-2-8. Error 92
When synchronization system errors are detected, the following error codes are displayed.
n
System control CPU: IC200 on the SY-355 board
Description Main Sub Time data code code display
92 101
102
←
←
Maintenance Drive logger logger
O
O
X
X
System control CPU detects REF error.
System control CPU detects frame error in input system.
3-2-9. Error 95
107 during recording
←
109 during playback
←
108 during recording
←
10A during playback
←
10C
←
10F during recording
←
110 during playback
←
111
PB DSP
←
113
←
REC DSP
116
←
When interface errors between device ICs are detected, the following error codes are displayed.
n
System control CPU: IC200 on the SY-355 board
Optical drive’s system control CPU (DRV): IC600 on the DR-606 board
Description Main Sub Time data code code display
95 101
←
Maintenance Drive logger logger
O X
102
103
104
←
←
←
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
Communication error between system control CPU and PCI bridge
(IC900/SY-355 board) is detected.
Communication error between system control CPU and FAM (IC600/SY-
355 board) is detected.
Communication error between system control CPU and composite decoder (IC100/IV-59 board) is detected.
Communication error between system control CPU and MPEG IMX encoder (IC1600/DVP-45 board) is detected.
Communication error between system control CPU and MPEG HD codec
(TORINO: IC1000, IC1200, IC1400/DVP-45 board) is detected during recording.
Communication error between system control CPU and MPEG HD codec
(TORINO: IC1000, IC1200, IC1400/DVP-45 board) is detected during playback.
MPEG HD codec (TORINO: IC1000, IC1200, IC1400 / DVP-45 board) has become abnormal during recording.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MPEG HD codec (TORINO: IC1000, IC1200, IC1400 / DVP-45 board) has become abnormal during playback.
System control CPU detects an error in LVIS (IC400 / DVP-45 board).
System control CPU detects PROXY VIDEO block in LVIS (IC400 /
DVP-45 board) error during recording.
System control CPU detects PROXY VIDEO block in LVIS (IC400 /
DVP-45 board) error during playback.
Communication error between system control CPU and PB DSP (IC801/
DVP-45 board) is detected.
Communication error between system control CPU and REC DSP (IC800/
DVP-45 board) is detected.
Communication error between system control CPU and PROXY AUDIO
DSP (IC900/DVP-45 board) is detected.
(Continue)
3-7
(Continued)
Main Sub Time data code code display
95 503
←
507
508
509
50A
50C
50F
513
51C
52C
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
←
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
Maintenance Drive logger logger
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Description
Optical drive’s BDC (IC300/DR-606 board) error is detected during initial check.
Adjustment data cannot be read from EEPROM in optical block assembly.
Hours meter data cannot be read from EEPROM in optical block assembly.
Adjustment data cannot be read from optical drive’s EEPROM (IC4/
SE-857 board).
Hours meter data cannot be read from optical drive’s EEPROM (IC4/
SE-857 board).
Optical drive’s SYS PE (IC700/DR-606 board) configuration error is detected.
Cannot access SDRAM (IC301/DR-606 board) for Optical driver’s BDC
(IC300/DR-606 board).
Optical drive’s BDC (IC300/DR-606 board) cannot set the SDRAM mode.
Optical drive’s BDC (IC300/DR-606 board) cannot reset free-run by SYS PE
(IC700/DR-606 board).
Auto setting by SYS PE (IC700/DR-606 board) is disabled with power control of optical drive’s BDC (IC300/DR-606 board).
3-8
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Section 4
Setup Menu
4-1. Setup Menus
The PDW-F800 has setup menus for making various settings and adjustments. The setup menus of this unit include the USER menu, USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, ALL menu, OPERATION menu, PAINT menu,
MAINTENANCE menu, FILE menu, DIAGNOSIS menu and SERVICE menu.
The setup menus are displayed on the viewfinder of this unit.
4-1-1. Basic Operations of Setup Menus
Switch description
STATUS
ON/
SEL
OFF
OFF
ON ESCAPE
STATUS ON/
SEL/OFF switch
MENU ON/OFF switch
MENU CANCEL/
PRST/ESCAPE switch
MENU knob
When rotated : Moves to the other pages or items, or changes the setup value.
When pressed : Enters the page set mode or the setup value modification mode.
Operating procedure
1.
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON.
2.
To move to another page, rotate the MENU knob.
(Press the MENU knob to set it.)
3.
To move to another item, rotate the MENU knob.
n
Pressing the MENU knob enters the setup value modification mode.
4.
To modify a setup value, rotate the MENU knob.
5.
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to OFF to exit the setup menu.
4-1-2. How to Display the SERVICE Menu
Method 1
Set the switch S402-1/AT-177 board to the ON position.
MENU knob
MENU ON/OFF switch
Use this switch to display the setup menu. When the lid is closed, the switch is set to the OFF position.
ON : Displays the setup menu.
OFF : Exits the setup menu.
MENU CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch
Use this switch to cancel the setup of the items that are selected by the setup menu, or return to the initial setup when the MENU ON/OFF switch is in the ON position.
CANCEL/PRST : Cancels the executed setup or returns to the initial (PRST) setup.
ESCAPE : Returns to the menu hierarchy one level higher.
STATUS ON/SEL/OFF switch
Use this switch to show or to clear the setup displays in order to confirm various settings and statuses when the
MENU ON/OFF switch is in the OFF position.
ON/SEL : Shows the various settings and status check displays for about 10 seconds. Each press of this switch turns over the display page.
OFF : Clears the display that is selected by ON/SEL.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
SERVICE
6
7
4
5
8
1
2
3
O
N
S402
AT-177 board
Method 2
. Select the DIAGNOSIS menu D00 CONTENTS page.
. While pressing the MENU knob and the ASSIGN1 switch simultaneously, set the MENU ON/OFF switch from OFF to ON. (However, if the switch S402-2/AT-
177 board is set to ON, or if the switch S400/AT-177 board is OFF, this method is disabled).
4-1
4-2. TOP Menu
While pressing the MENU knob, set the MENU ON/OFF switch to ON. Then the TOP menu appears.
However, the TOP menu is not displayed when the switch S400 (TOP MENU selection)/AT-177 board is in the OFF position.
TOP MENU Display
S <TOP MENU>
USER
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
SERVICE
Menu Function
USER Use the USER menu to set the functions that are used for daily routine operations such as MONITOR OUT setting
(This menu appears when the MENU ON/OFF switch is set to ON normally)
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE Use this menu to add or delete the pages that are required for the USER menu to suit operators’ needs depending on applications
(For more details, refer to “Editing the USER Menu” of Operation Manual)
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
The ALL menu contains all pages of each category of the “USER 1” to “USER 19” pages edited by “USER MENU CUSTOMIZE”, “ASSIGN ITEM SEL” page, OPERA-
TION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE and DIAGNOSIS. It means that you can move to any page from the ALL menu without returning to the TOP menu
Usually, the camera operator is expected to use the OPERATION menu to set or change the preference setups to suit the shooting conditions of each object
Use this menu to implement fine adjustment of pictures by monitoring the camera output waveform on a waveform monitor etc
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
SERVICE
This is the camera maintenance menu. Use this menu to set the PAINT items of lower operating frequency or to alter the system configuration
This is the file operation menu. Use this menu to save data in the REFERENCE file etc
Use this menu to check the optical drive status or to diagnose the circuit boards that are suspected to have an error
Use this menu for service and maintenance
(This menu is enabled when the switch S402-1/AT-177 board is set to ON)
4-2
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-3. USER Menu
The USER menu enables the user to use the selected menu items that are frequently used in daily operation. The USER menu contains the following menu items as the default when the unit was shipped from the factory.
Add or delete the menu items as desired with the use of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.
Name of page
OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
SUPERIMPOSE
LCD
REC FUNCTION
ASSIGNABLE SW
VF DISP1
VF DISP2
‘!’ LED
MARKER 1
GAIN SW
VF SETTING
AUTO IRIS
SHOT ID
SHOT DISP
SET STATUS
LENS FILE
USER FILE
Name of category
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
OPERATION
FILE
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-3
4-4. OPERATION Menu
n
When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is the relative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
OUTPUT 1 Display (Setting the Output Signal)
O01 OUTPUT1 TOP
SDI OUT1 SELECT : OFF
SDI OUT2 SELECT : OFF
SDI OUT2 SUPER : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
TEST OUT SUPER : OFF
Item
SDI OUT 1 SELECT
SDI OUT 2 SELECT
SDI OUT 2 SUPER
TEST OUT SELECT
TEST OUT SUPER
Setting
OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI
OFF/HDSDI/SDSDI
OFF/ON
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
OFF/ON
Function
Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 1 connector
OFF : No output signal
HDSDI : HD SDI signal
SDSDI : SD SDI signal
Selects the output signal from the SDI OUT 2 connector
OFF : No output signal
HDSDI : HD SDI signal
SDSDI : SD SDI signal
Turns ON/OFF the superimposed information output from the SDI OUT 2 connector
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
(When R/G/B is selected, turning the power ON/OFF changes the setting to Y)
Turns ON/OFF the superimposed information output from the TEST OUT connector m
• When R/G/B is selected, turning the power of the unit off and on changes the setting to Y.
• When TEST OUT SELECT is set to Y/R/G/B, the character information is displayed regardless of the setting. The character information can be hidden by switching this item from ON to OFF while the character information is displayed. (The view finder is also hidden.)
• When TEST OUT SELECT is set to LCD, the character information is displayed or hidden according to the display mode selected with the DISPSEL/EXPAND button.
4-4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
OUTPUT 2 Display (Setting the Output signal)
O02 OUTPUT2 TOP
LIVE & PLAY : OFF
DOWN CON MODE : CROP
WIDE ID : THROU
Item
LIVE & PLAY
DOWN CON MODE
*
Setting
OFF/ON
CROP/LETTR/SQEZE
Function
Enables to view camera video in the viewfinder during playback from the disc
OFF : Do not display camera video in the viewfinder during disc playback
ON : Output camera video to the viewfinder, even during disc playback
Selects the aspect ratio for down-conversion
SQEZE : Squeeze
Converting the 16:9 HD video signal to the SD signal while maintaining the aspect ratio (16 : 9)
LETTR : LETTER BOX
Converting the 16 : 9 HD video signal to the 4 : 3 SD video signal while maintaining the original aspect ratio of 16 : 9 (Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom of the screen)
LETTR can be selected only when the LETTER BOX is set to
ENABLE on the SELECT FUNCTION page
CROP : Edge crop
Converting the HD video signal to the SD signal by extracting the
4 : 3 image portion from the HD video signal (4 : 3)
WIDE ID THROU/AUTO The setting whether or not to add the wide screen information recorded on the disc to the output signal
THROU : Outputs the video signal played back from the disc without adding the wide screen information
AUTO :Outputs the video signal by adding the wide screen information when the wide information is detected from the disc during playback
* : When the SYSTEM LINE is 1080, and the SYSTEM FREQUENCY is 23.9P, the menu does not appear and the mode is fixed to SQEZE.
SUPERIMPOSE Display (Setting the information output)
O03 SUPERIMPOSE TOP
<SDI OUT 2 & TEST(VBS)>
SUPER(VFDISP) : ON
SUPER(MENU) : ON
SUPER(TC) : OFF
<SDI2(HDSDI)&TEST(VBS)>
SUPER(MARKER) : OFF
<SDI OUT 2(HDSDI)>
SUPER(ZEBRA) : OFF
Item
SUPER(VFDISP)
SUPER(MENU)
SUPER(TC)
SUPER(MARKER)
SUPER(ZEBRA)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF the output from SDI OUT 2 connector and the output of text
(superimposed) information to the VBS output from the TEST OUT connector
Turns ON/OFF the HD-SDI output from SDI OUT 2 connector and the marker display output to the VBS output from the TEST OUT connector
Turns ON/OFF the zebra display to the HD-SDI output from the SDI OUT 2 connector
4-5
LCD Display (Setting the LCD monitor)
O04 LCD TOP
LCD COLOR : 0
LCD MARKER&ZEBRA: ON
Item
LCD COLOR
LCD MARKER & ZEBRA
Setting
( _99 to 99)
OFF/ON
Function
Adjusts the LCD color
Turns ON/OFF the marker and zebra display in the
LCD monitor
REC FUNCTION Display (Setting the Picture cache function)
O05 REC FUNCTION TOP
SLOW & QUICK : OFF
FRAME RATE : ---
CACHE/INTVAL REC: OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
Item
SLOW & QUICK
FRAME RATE
CACHE/INTVAL REC
DISC EXCHG CACHE
CLIP CONT REC
Setting
OFF/ON
1 to 48 (1080/23.9P)
1 to 50 (1080/25P)
1 to 60 (1080/29.9P)
OFF/CACHE/A.INT/M.INT
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF the slow & quick motion function
Adjusts the recording frame rate when the slow & quick function is set to ON
Sets the CACHE REC function
OFF : Not used
CACHE : CACHE REC
A.INT : Auto interval REC
M.INT : Manual interval REC
Turns ON/OFF the function that even if you run out of free disc capacity while recording, you can continue recording n
The unit’s internal memory is not unlimited, so the video and audio may be interrupted if it takes too long to exchange the disc.
Turns ON/OFF the clip continuous rec function
4-6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
When CACHE is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC
CACHE/INTVAL REC: CACHE
CACHE REC TIME : 0-2S
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
Item
CACHE REC TIME
Setting
0-2S/2-4S/4-6S/6-8S/8-10S/
18-20S/28-30S
When A.INT is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC
CACHE/INTVAL REC: A.INT
TAKE TOTAL TIME : 5MIN
REC TIME : 5SEC
PRE-LIGHTING : OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
Function
Sets the recording time of CACHE REC
(SEC : second)
Item
TAKE TOTAL TIME
REC TIME
PRE-LIGHTING
Setting Function
See the right column Sets the total recording time of Auto Interval REC
(MIN : minute, H : hour)
Setting value : 5MIN/10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/1H/
2H/3H/4H/5H/7H/10H/15H/20H/30H/40H/50H/70H/100H
See the right column Sets the actual recording time of Auto Interval REC (SEC : second)
Setting value : 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50SEC, 1 to 85MIN
OFF/2SEC/5SEC/
10SEC
Sets the automatic lighting-on when Auto Interval REC is operating
The lighting time (in second) before the start of recording is specified
When M.INT is selected in CACHE/INTVAL REC
CACHE/INTVAL REC: M.INT
NUMBER OF FRAME : 1
TRIGGER INTERVAL: 1SEC
PRE-LIGHTING : OFF
DISC EXCHG CACHE: OFF
CLIP CONT REC : OFF
Item Setting Function
NUMBER OF FRAME
TRIGGER INTERVAL
1/3/6 *1 Sets the number of frames to be recorded by one REC operation of Manual Interval REC
See the right column Sets the interval time
When “M” is selected, by pressing the REC SW, a specified number of frames will be recorded
When a time value is set, being triggered by REC SW, recording of a specified number of frames will be made after every elapse of that time
Setting value : M/1SEC to 10SEC/15SEC/20SEC/30SEC/
40SEC/50SEC/1MIN to 10MIN/15MIN/20MIN/
30MIN/40MIN/50MIN/1H to 6H/12H/24H
PRE-LIGHTING
*2
OFF/2SE/5SEC/
10SEC
Sets the automatic lighting-on when Manual Interval REC is operating
The lighting time (in second) before the start of recording is specified
*1 : When SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and REC FORMAT is set to HD422/HD420, setting value is 2/6/12, and default setting value is 2.
*2 : This does not appear when TRIGGER INTERVAL is set to M.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-7
ASSIGNABLE SW Display (Setting the ASSIGN SW)
O06 ASSIGNABLE SW TOP
ASSIGN SW <1> : OFF
ASSIGN SW <2> : OFF
ASSIGN SW <3> : OFF
ASSIGN SW <4> : OFF
ASSIGN SW <5> : OFF
ASSIGN SW <RET> : RET
ZOOM SPEED : 20
RETURN VIDEO : OFF
Item Setting Function
ASSIGN SW 1/3/4/5/RET OFF Assigns no function
FRONT MIC MONO/STEREO Assigns the function to switch stereo and monaural when the stereo microphone is connected
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF Assigns the function to execute picture cache recording
SUPER (VFDISP&MENU) Assigns the function to switch whether or not to combine the character information of the view finder and that of menu with the video signal that is output from the SDI OUT 2 connector or the TEST OUT connector when
SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER is set to ON in the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu
MARKER
RE-TAKE *2
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display all markers
Assigns the function to delete the last recorded clip
*1
ATW
RETURN VIDEO
Assigns the ON/OFF function of auto-tracing white balance
Assigns the function that displays in the viewfinder the HD-Y (1080i) signal input to the GENLOCK IN connector *3
LENS RET
REC SWITCH
TURBO SWITCH
ZEBRA
FREEZE MIX
COLOR TEMP SW 3200K
COLOR TEMP SW 4300K
COLOR TEMP SW 5600K
COLOR TEMP SW 6300K
ELECTRICAL CC
CC 5600K
ZOOM TELE/WIDE
ZOOM WIDE/TELE
*4
*4
Assigns the same function as that of the RET switch on the lens to the switch
Assigns the REC START (recording start) function to the switch
Assigns the turbo gain function to the switch
Assigns the zebra pattern display function to the switch
Assigns the function that mixes a still picture (monochrome) and camera video (color) (effective for framing shots)
Assigns the function to switch the White-balance to 3200K
Assigns the function to switch the White-balance to 4300K
Assigns the function to switch the White-balance to 5600K
Assigns the function to switch the White-balance to 6300K
Assigns the function that switches between electrical CC filters (3200K/
4300K/5600K/6300K) whenever pushing the switch
The color temperatures of the electrical filter can be changed by the setting
ELECTRICAL CC <A> to <D> of the WHITE FILTER page (The positions to which the dash marks ----- are set are skipped)
Alternately, color temperatures can be switched in accordance with the settings A/B/C/D from RM/MSU/RCP when a remote control unit is connected
Applies an electrical 5600K filter
When using a serial lens, assign the ZOOM TELE setting to ASSIGN 3, and the WIDE setting to ASSIGN 4
When using a serial lens, assign the ZOOM WIDE setting to ASSIGN 3, and the TELE setting to ASSIGN 4
SHOT MARK1
SHOT MARK2
CLIP FLAG OK
CLIP FLAG NG
Assigns the function to record a SHOT MARK 1 essence mark
Assigns the function to record a SHOT MARK 2 essence mark
Assign the functions that set or clear OK/NG/KEEP flags during recording or playback
CLIP FLAG KEEP
*1 : Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu, the ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers.
*2 : Cannot be assigned to the RET button of the lens.
*3 : Even if the RETURN VIDEO item is set to OFF on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, you can use this switch to display the image of the return video signal on the viewfinder.
*4 : Only the Assign 3 SEL and Assign 4 SEL screens appear.
4-8
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Item Setting Function
ASSIGN SW 1/3/4/5/RET
ASSIGN SW 2
FOCUS MAG
DIGITAL EXTENDER
CLIP CONT REC
UA01 to UA10 *1
*4
Assigns the function that magnifies the central part of the viewfinder picture, for easier focus adjustment
(This function does not affect recorded video or other signal output)
Assigns the function that electronically magnifies the central part of the picture (All video output is magnified, including recorded video)
Clip continuous rec function ON/OFF
Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu
OFF Assigns no function
FRONT MIC MONO/STEREO Assigns the function to switch stereo and monaural when the stereo microphone is connected
PICTURE CACHE ON/OFF Assigns the function to execute picture cache recording
SUPER (VFDISP&MENU)
MARKER
Assigns the function of a switch to select mixing or no mixing of superimposed viewfinder and menu text data into the video signals output from the SDI OUT
2 or TEST OUT connector, when SDI OUT 2 SUPER or TEST OUT SUPER on the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu are set to ON
Assigns the ON/OFF function to display all markers
*2
REC VIDEO SOURCE
ZEBRA
FREEZE MIX
Switches the recording target video between the video shot by the camera and the video input from an external device (VBS or SD-SDI/HD-SDI) *3
Assigns the zebra pattern display function to the switch
DIGITAL EXTENDER
*4
Assigns the function that mixes a still picture (monochrome) and camera video (color) (effective for framing shots)
Assigns the function that electronically magnifies the central part of the picture (All video output is magnified, including recorded video)
CLIP CONT REC
UA01 to UA10
*1
0 to 99
Clip continuous rec function ON/OFF
Assigns the items assigned in the ASSIGN SEL menu
ZOOM SPEED function ON/OFF ZOOM SPEED
RETURN VIDEO OFF/ON RETURN VIDEO function ON/OFF
*1 : This does not appear if nothing is assigned in the Assign menu.
*2 : Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER page of the USER menu, the ASSIGN 1/3/4/5 switch allows you to display or not to display all markers.
*3 : The optional CBK-SC02 Analog Composite Input Board is required for VBS signal input. The optional CBK-HD01 HD/SD SDI Input Board is required for
SD-SDI/HD-SDI signal input.
*4 : Video momentarily becomes black and audio is momentarily muted when the DIGITAL EXTENDER is switched ON/OFF.
POWER SAVE Display (Setting the POWER SAVE function)
O07 POWER SAVE TOP
ETHERNET/USB : DSABL i.LINK(FAM) : DSABL
REC AUDIO OUT : EE
TEST OUT SAVE : ON
Item
ETHERNET/USB i.LINK(FAM) *
REC AUDIO OUT
TEST OUT SAVE
Setting
DSABL/ENABL
DSABL/ENABL
EE/SAVE
OFF/ON
* : The unit must be restarted to enable changes to this setting.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Function
Enables or disables the network connector and USB connector
Enables or disables the i.LINK connector (FAM function)
Puts the AUDIO OUT connector in EE or SAVE mode
Switches the TEST OUT connector power saving function on and off
ON : No signals are output if a cable is not connected
OFF : Signals are always output, regardless of whether a cable is connected
4-9
VF DISP 1 Display (Setting the Viewfinder screen displays)
O08 VF DISP1 TOP
VF DISP : ON
VF DISP MODE : 3
DISP EXTENDER : ON
DISP FILTER : ON
DISP WHITE : ON
DISP GAIN : ON
DISP SHUTTER : ON
DISP AUDIO : ON
DISP DISC : ON
DISP IRIS : ON
Item Setting Function
VF DISP
VF DISP MODE
DISP EXTENDER
DISP FILTER
DISP WHITE
DISP GAIN
DISP SHUTTER
DISP AUDIO
OFF/ON
1/2/3
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Turns ON/OFF the Viewfinder display
Sets the display mode
Displays the extender
ND filter type
*2
Displays the white balance memory
Displays the gain setup value
Displays the shutter speed and ECS mode indicator
Displays the audio level
*1
DISP DISC
DISP IRIS
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Displays the remaining amount of disc
Displays the lens iris value
*1 : The viewfinder display can be also turned on or off by using the DISPLAY of the DISPLAY/ASPECT switch on the viewfinder.
*2 : Regarding the messages that indicate the contents of setup change and the messages that indicate progress/result of adjustments, only a part of the display items can be selected or no display at all can also be selected by setting the display mode.
Correspondence between the conditions of the unit when the message is displayed and the display modes are shown as follows.
O : Message is displayed.
X : Message is not displayed.
The conditions that necessitate showing of the message
Message Display mode setting
1 2
X
X
3
O
O
When FILTER selection is changed
When GAIN setting is changed
When the WHITE BAL switch setting is changed
FILTER : n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4) X
GAIN : n (n = _3 dB, 0 dB, 3 dB, 6 dB, 9 dB, X
12 dB, 18 dB, 24 dB, 30 dB, 36 dB, 42 dB)
X
WHITE : n (n = A CH, B CH, PRESET) or ATW (Auto Tracking White-balance)
: RUN
DCC : ON (or OFF) X When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to DCC ON or DCC OFF
When the shutter speed/shutter mode setting is changed *3
: SS : 1/100 (or 1/125, 1/250, 1/500,
1/1000, 1/2000, ECS, EVS)
When BLACK balance/WHITE balance example : WHITE : OK adjustment is in progress
*3 : It is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER switch is set to ON.
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4-10
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
VF DISP 2 Display (Setting the VF displays)
O09 VF DISP2 TOP
DISP ZOOM : ON
DISP COLOR TEMP : OFF
DISP BATT REMAIN: INT
DISP DC IN : OFF
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID: OFF
DISP WRR RF LVL : OFF
DISP REC FORMAT : OFF
DISP CLIP NO(PB): ON
DISP TIME CODE : OFF
DISP ALAC : OFF
Item
DISP ZOOM
DISP COLOR TEMP
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF the zoom position display
Turns ON/OFF the color temperature display
DISP BATT REMAIN
DISP DC IN
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID
DISP WRR RF LVL
DISP REC FORMAT
DISP CLIP NO (PB)
DISP TIME CODE
DISP ALAC
* INT/VOLT/AUTO Selects the mode for the remaining battery (or DC IN) voltage display
OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the display when the power is supplied from the external connector (the battery connected to DC IN)
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Displays the video aspect ratio (16:9/4:3)
Turns ON/OFF the wireless receiver RF level display
Turns ON/OFF the recording format
Turns ON/OFF the clip name
Turns ON/OFF the time-code display
Turns ON/OFF the operating status display of ALAC
* : When an Anton Bauer battery system or a BP-GL65/GL95 battery pack is installed, the remaining battery power is shown as a percentage value (%) according to the setting of this item.
INT : When one of the above batteries is installed, the remaining power is shown as a percentage value (%) when there is a change in the value or when the power is low.
AUTO : The remaining power is shown as a percentage value (%) when one of the above batteries is installed. Otherwise the voltage (VOLT) is displayed continuously.
VOLT : The voltage (VOLT) is displayed continuously.
VF DISP 3 Display (Setting the VF displays)
O10 VF DISP3 TOP
LOW LIGHT : OFF
LOW LIGHT LEVEL : 0
VF BATT WARNING : 10%
ABSOLUTE VALUE : OFF
Item Setting Function
LOW LIGHT
LOW LIGHT LEVEL
VF BATT WARNING
(
OFF/ON
_99 to 99)
10%/20%
Turns ON/OFF the on-screen warning that the average level of the video has dropped beneath a set level
Sets the LOW LIGHT threshold value
Specifies the remaining battery capacity level that starts the flashing warning in the viewfinder
ABSOLUTE VALUE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the mode that displays numeric menu settings as absolute values
*
* : This makes it possible to display settings that include reference settings, stored with STORE ALL PRESET or other functions, as absolute values.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-11
‘!’ LED Display (Selecting the conditions to turn on the ‘!’ indicator on VF)
O11 '!' LED TOP
GAIN <!> : ON
SHUTTER <!> : ON
WHITE BAL <!> : ON
CC 5600K <!> : ON
ATW RUN <!> : ON
EXTENDER <!> : ON
FILTER ND <!> : OFF
FILTER CC <!> : OFF
OVERRIDE <!> : ON
Item
GAIN <!>
SHUTTER <!>
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
WHITE BAL <!> OFF/ON
CC 5600K <!> OFF/ON
ATW RUN <!> OFF/ON
EXTENDER <!> OFF/ON
FILTER ND <!> OFF/ON
FILTER CC <!> OFF/ON
OVERRIDE <!> OFF/ON
Function
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the GAIN value is other than the GAIN<!> setting in
'!'LED STD
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the SHUTTER setting is other than the SHUTTER<!> setting in '!'LED STD
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the WHITE BAL setting is other than the WHITE
BAL<!> setting in '!'LED STD
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the CC 5600K setting is other than the CC5600K<!> setting in '!'LED STD
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the ATW setting is other than the ATW RUN<!> setting in '!'LED STD
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the EXTENDER setting is other than the
EXTENDER<!> setting in '!'LED STD
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the ND FILTER setting is other than the FILTER
ND<!> settings in '!'LED STD
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the CC FILTER setting is other than the FILTER
CC<!> settings in '!'LED STD
OFF : Does not turn on
ON : Turns on when the AUTO IRIS OVERRIDE setting is other than the
OVERRIDE<!> setting in '!'LED STD
4-12
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
‘!’ LED STD Display (Setting the judgment criteria of the conditions for turning ON the ‘!’
LED on VF)
O12 '!' LED STD TOP
GAIN <!> : 0dB
SHUTTER <!> : OFF
WHITE BAL <!> : AB
CC 5600K <!> : OFF
ATW RUN <!> : OFF
EXTENDER <!> : OFF
FILTER ND <!> : 1
FILTER CC <!> : B
OVERRIDE <!> : OFF
Item Setting Function
GAIN <!> 0dB/LOW/MID/HIGH
SHUTTER <!> OFF/ECS each FORMAT SHUTTER
SPEED
*
WHITE BAL <!> P/A/B/PA/PB/AB
Sets the reference value of GAIN<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
Sets the reference value of SHUTTER<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
CC 5600K <!>
ATW RUN <!>
EXTENDER <!>
OFF/5600K
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Sets the reference value of WHITE BAL<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
Sets the reference value of CC 5600K<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
Sets the reference value of ATW RUN<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
Sets the reference value of EXTENDER<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
FILTER ND <!>
FILTER CC <!>
1/2/3/4
A/B/C/D
Sets the reference value of FILTER ND<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
Sets the reference value of FILTER CC<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
OVERRIDE <!> OFF/ON Sets the reference value of OVERRIDE<!>
(Value with which the '!' lamp does not light when the '!' LED is on)
* : The selectable shutter speeds are different for each format. (Refer to description of SHT ENABLE for detail).
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-13
MARKER 1 Display (Setting the MARKER)
O13 MARKER 1 TOP
MARKER : OFF
CENTER : OFF
CENTER MARK : 3
SAFETY ZONE : OFF
SAFETY AREA : 90%
ASPECT : ON
ASPECT SELECT : 4:3
ASPECT MASK : ON
ASPECT MASK LVL : 12
100%MARKER : OFF
Item
MARKER
CENTER
CENTER MARK
SAFETY ZONE
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
1/2/3/4
OFF/ON
SAFETY AREA 80/90/92.5/95%
ASPECT
*2
ASPECT SELECT *2
ASPECT MASK
(4 : 3) *2 *3
ASPECT MASK LVL
*2
OFF/ON
15 : 9/14 : 9/13 : 9/4 : 3/1.85/2.35
OFF/ON
0 to 15
100% MARKER OFF/ON
*1 : The CENTER MARKER is displayed as shown below.
Setting 1 2
VF screen
Function
Turns ON/OFF all the MARKER display functions
Turns ON/OFF the CENTER MARKER display
Selects the types of CENTER MARKER when the above CENTER MARKER display is ON *1
Turns ON/OFF the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display
Selects the ranges of the SAFETY ZONE
MARKER display (80%/90%/92.5%/95%)
Turns ON/OFF the ASPECT MARKER display
Selects the aspect ratio
Turns ON/OFF the function to darken the outside of the specified aspect
Selects the darkness level of the outside of the specified aspect when ASPECT MASK is ON
Selects the MARKER display function to display the 100% (effective picture elements) area
3 4
*2 : This item is ignored when the recording format is IMX50/40/30 or DVCAM and the aspect ratio is 4:3.
*3 : The ASPECT MASK item is for processing the signal to be output to the viewfinder. When R, G, or B is selected for the TEST OUT
SELECT item in the menu, the masked video signal is output to the TEST OUT connector.
4-14
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
MARKER 2 Display (Setting the MARKER-related items)
O14 MARKER 2 TOP
USER BOX : OFF
USER BOX WIDTH : 240
USER BOX HEIGHT : 135
USER BOX H POS : 0
USER BOX V POS : 0
CENTER H POS : 0
CENTER V POS : 0
ASPECT SAFE ZONE: OFF
ASPECT SAFE AREA: 90%
Item Setting Function
USER BOX
USER BOX WIDTH
USER BOX HEIGHT
USER BOX H POS
USER BOX V POS
CENTER H POS
CENTER V POS
ASPECT SAFE ZONE
OFF/ON
3 to 479
3 to 269
_477 to 476 *
_267 to 266
*
_480 to 479
_270 to 269
OFF/ON
Turns ON/OFF the BOX cursor display
Sets the horizontal width of the BOX cursor
Sets the vertical width of the BOX cursor
Sets the BOX cursor center position (horizontal position)
Sets the BOX cursor center position (vertical position)
Sets the CENTER MARKER position (horizontal position)
Sets the CENTER MARKER position (vertical position)
Turns ON/OFF the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display with respect to the ASPECT MARKER
ASPECT SAFE AREA 80%/90%/92.5%/95% Selects the ranges of the SAFETY ZONE MARKER display with respect to the ASPECT MARKER
* : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above USER BOX WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.
FOCUS ASSIST Display (Setting the FOCUS ASSIST function)
O15 FOCUS ASSIST TOP
FOCUS ASSIST IND: OFF
FOCUS IND POS : BOTTM
FOCUS AREA MARK : OFF
Item Setting
FOCUS ASSIST IND OFF/ON
FOCUS IND POS BOTTM/LEFT/TOP/RIGHT
FOCUS AREA MARK OFF/ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF the FOCUS ASSIST indicator
Sets the FOCUS ASSIST indicator position
Turns ON/OFF the FOCUS AREA detection frame
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-15
GAIN SW Display (Setting GAIN)
O16 GAIN SW TOP
GAIN LOW : 0dB
GAIN MID : 6dB
GAIN HIGH : 12dB
GAIN TURBO : 42dB
TURBO SW IND : OFF
SHOCKLESS GAIN : OFF
Item
GAIN LOW
GAIN MID
GAIN HIGH
GAIN TURBO
TURBO SW IND
SHOCKLESS GAIN
Setting Function
_6/_3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set to the “L” position
_6/_3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set to the “M” position
_6/_3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value when the GAIN switch is set to the “H” position
_6/_3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/30/36/42 dB Sets the gain value of the TURBO GAIN switch
OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that disables L/M/H of the GAIN switch while the TURBO GAIN is being selected
OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the shockless gain
VF SETTING display (Setting VF)
O17 VF SETTING TOP
ZEBRA : OFF
ZEBRA SELECT : 1
ZEBRA1 DET LVL : 70%
ZEBRA1 APT LVL : 10%
ZEBRA2 DET LVL : 100%
VF DETAIL LEVEL : 0
VF ASPECT (SD) : AUTO
Item Setting Function
ZEBRA
ZEBRA SELECT
ZEBRA1 DET LVL
ZEBRA1 APT LVL
ZEBRA2 DET LVL
OFF/ON
1/2/BOTH
20% to 107%
1% to 20%
52% to 109%
Turns ON/OFF all the zebra display
Selects the zebra pattern type
*1
Sets the ZEBRA1 display level (center value)
Sets the ZEBRA1 aperture level (center value)
Sets the ZEBRA2 display level (lower limit value)
VF DETAIL LEVEL
VF ASPECT (SD) *2
( _99 to 99)
AUTO/16:9
Sets the amount of details of the VF picture
(Details of the main line video output remain unchanged)
Specifies whether to set the viewfinder screen and LCD monitor aspect ratio automatically or to set it to 16:9
When “16:9” is selected, then the screen is always displayed as a 16:9 screen (before being cut out to 4:3), even when
ASPECT RATIO (SD) is set to “4:3”
*1 : When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the ZEBRA switch, turns the display on or off using this item. When you use the viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch, the most recent operation of the ZEBRA switch and this menu operation is effective.
*2 : Displayed only when REC FORMAT is set to IMX50/40/30 or DAVCAM.
4-16
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
AUTO IRIS Display (Setting AUTO IRIS)
O18 AUTO IRIS TOP
IRIS OVERRIDE : OFF
IRIS SPEED : 0
CLIP HIGH LIGHT : OFF
IRIS WINDOW : 1
IRIS WINDOW IND : OFF
IRIS VAR WIDTH : 240
IRIS VAR HEIGHT : 135
IRIS VAR H POS : 0
IRIS VAR V POS : 0
Item
IRIS OVERRIDE
IRIS SPEED
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
IRIS WINDOW
(
Setting
OFF/ON
_99 to 99)
OFF/ON
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR
IRIS WINDOW IND
IRIS VAR WIDTH
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
OFF/ON
20 to 479
20 to 269
IRIS VAR H POS
IRIS VAR V POS
_460 to 459 *2
_250 to 249
*2
*1 : The IRIS WINDOW is set as shown below.
Setting 1 2
VF screen
Function
Turns ON/OFF the AUTO IRIS OVERRIDE function
When set to ON, the reference value of the AUTO IRIS can be changed by the MENU knob
(9 steps: _1, _0.75, _0.5, _0.25, 0, +0.25, +0.5, +0.75, +1)
Sets the AUTO IRIS response speed. _99 (Slow) ↔ 99 (Fast)
Turns ON/OFF the function that limits the AUTO IRIS detection level to 100% when the video signal of higher than
100% is input
Selects the IRIS WINDOW (detection range) *1
When VAR is selected, the iris window can be set by the
IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT/H POS/V POS as described below
Turns ON/OFF the function that checks the iris window with the box cursor
Sets width of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW
Sets height of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW
Sets the center in the horizontal direction of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW
Sets the center in the vertical direction of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW
3 4
Shaded ( ) area : IRIS WINDOW frame
*2 : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.
5 6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-17
SHOT ID Display (Setting SHOT ID)
O19 SHOT ID TOP
ID-1 :
ID-2 :
ID-3 :
ID-4 :
Item
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
ID-4
Setting
12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces)
12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces)
12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces)
12 characters (alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces)
Function
Setting SHOT ID-1
Setting SHOT ID-2
Setting SHOT ID-3
Setting SHOT ID-4
SHOT DISP Display (Selecting the shot data to be superimposed on color bar)
O20 SHOT DISP TOP
SHOT DATE : OFF
SHOT TIME : OFF
SHOT MODEL NAME : OFF
SHOT SERIAL NO : OFF
SHOT ID SEL : OFF
SHOT 16:9 CHARA : OFF
SHOT BLINK CHARA: OFF
Item
SHOT DATE
SHOT TIME
SHOT MODEL NAME
SHOT SERIAL NO
SHOT ID SEL
SHOT 16 : 9 CHARA
SHOT BLINK CHARA
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ID-1/ID-2/ID-3/ID-4
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF whether to superimpose and record the date
Turns ON/OFF whether to superimpose and record the time
Turns ON/OFF whether to superimpose and record the model name of the unit
Turns ON/OFF whether to superimpose and record the serial number of the unit
Displays the shot ID number selected in the SHOT ID page
Turns ON/OFF whether to superimpose and record
16:9 when the aspect ratio “16:9” is selected
Turns ON/OFF whether to superimpose and record the blinking “ *”
4-18
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
SET STATUS Display (Selecting the status check screen display)
O21 SET STATUS TOP
STATUS ABNORMAL : ON
STATUS SYSTEM : ON
STATUS FUNCTION : ON
STATUS AUDIO : ON
Item
STATUS ABNORMAL
STATUS SYSTEM
STATUS FUNCTION
STATUS AUDIO
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF the ABNORMAL <!> screen display
Turns ON/OFF the SYSTEM screen display
Turns ON/OFF the FUNCTION screen display
Turns ON/OFF the AUDIO STATUS screen display
WHITE SETTING Display (Indicating the setup status of the various function that are set by the FUNCTION display)
O22 WHITE SETTING TOP
WHITE SWITCH <B>: MEM
SHOCKLESS WHITE : 1
ATW HOLD MEMORY : OFF
ATW SPEED : 4
AWB FIXED AREA : OFF
FILTER WHT MEM : ON
Item
WHITE SWITCH <B>
SHOCKLESS WHITE
ATW HOLD MEMORY
ATW SPEED
AWB FIXED AREA
FILTER WHT MEM
Setting
MEM/ATW
OFF/1/2/3
OFF/ON
1/2/3/4/5
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Sets the operating mode when the WHITE BAL switch is set to the
B side
MEM : Auto white balance
ATW : Auto tracking white balance
Sets the transition time when the WHITE BAL switch is changed to a new setting (1 is fastest)
Sets whether or not to save the white balance adjustment value in the memory (A/B/C) that corresponds to the WHITE BAL switch position during ATW
(The value cannot be saved in the PRESET layer)
Switches the transition speed of auto tracking white balance (ATW)
(1 is slowest)
Executes the AWB (auto white balance) at the center of the screen
Sets the memory area for white balance for each position number of the FILTER knob
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-19
OFFSET WHT Display (Setting on the offset white function)
O23 OFFSET WHT TOP
OFFSET WHITE <A>: OFF
WARM-COOL <A> : 3200
WARM-COOL BAL<A>: 0
OFFSET WHITE <B>: OFF
WARM-COOL <B> : 3200
WARM-COOL BAL<B>: 0
Item
OFFSET WHITE <A>
WARM-COOL <A>
WARM-COOL BAL <A>
OFFSET WHITE <B>
WARM-COOL <B>
WARM-COOL BAL <B>
Setting
OFF/ON
Displays reference color temperature
(
_99 to 99)
OFF/ON
Displays reference color temperature
( _99 to 99)
Function
Turns ON/OFF the setting to be added to the white balance of
A-channel
Sets the offset for the white balance of channel A, using the color temperature
Used for the above WARM-COOL fine adjustment (A-CH)
Turns ON/OFF the setting to be added to the white balance of
B-channel
Sets the offset for the white balance of channel B, using the color temperature
Used for the above WARM-COOL fine adjustment (B-CH)
SHT ENABLE Display (Setting the shutter mode/speed that can be selected by the
SHUTTER switch etc)
O24 SHT ENABLE TOP
SHUTTER ECS : ON
SHUTTER SLS : OFF
SHUTTER 1/60 : ON
SHUTTER 1/125 : ON
SHUTTER 1/250 : ON
SHUTTER 1/500 : ON
SHUTTER 1/1000 : ON
SHUTTER 1/2000 : ON
O24 SHT ENABLE TOP
SHUTTER ECS : ON
SHUTTER SLS : OFF
SHUTTER 1/100 : ON
SHUTTER 1/125 : ON
SHUTTER 1/250 : ON
SHUTTER 1/500 : ON
SHUTTER 1/1000 : ON
SHUTTER 1/2000 : ON
FORMAT : 50i/50P
O24 SHT ENABLE TOP
SHUTTER ECS : ON
SHUTTER SLS : OFF
SHUTTER 1/33 : ON
SHUTTER 1/50 : ON
SHUTTER 1/100 : ON
SHUTTER 1/125 : ON
SHUTTER 1/250 : ON
SHUTTER 1/500 : ON
SHUTTER 1/1000 : ON
SHUTTER 1/2000 : ON
FORMAT : 25P
FORMAT : 59.9i/59.9P (SCAN MODE 59.9P)
O24 SHT ENABLE TOP
SHUTTER ECS : ON
SHUTTER SLS : OFF
SHUTTER 1/40 : ON
SHUTTER 1/60 : ON
SHUTTER 1/120 : ON
SHUTTER 1/125 : ON
SHUTTER 1/250 : ON
SHUTTER 1/500 : ON
SHUTTER 1/1000 : ON
SHUTTER 1/2000 : ON
FORMAT : 29.97P
(Continue to next page)
4-20
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
(Continued from previous page)
O24 SHT ENABLE TOP
SHUTTER ECS : ON
SHUTTER SLS : OFF
SHUTTER 1/33 : ON
SHUTTER 1/48 : ON
SHUTTER 1/50 : ON
SHUTTER 1/60 : ON
SHUTTER 1/96 : ON
SHUTTER 1/125 : ON
SHUTTER 1/250 : ON
SHUTTER 1/500 : ON
FORMAT : 23.9P
O24 SHT ENABLE 2 TOP
SHUTTER 1/1000 : ON
SHUTTER 1/2000 : ON
O24 SHT ENABLE TOP
SHUTTER ECS : ON
SHUTTER 1/32 : ON
SHUTTER 1/48 : ON
SHUTTER 1/50 : ON
SHUTTER 1/60 : ON
SHUTTER 1/96 : ON
SHUTTER 1/125 : ON
SHUTTER 1/250 : ON
SHUTTER 1/500 : ON
FORMAT : 59.9P (SCAN MODE 23.9P)
FORMAT : 23.9P/59.9P (SCAN MODE 23.9P)
Item Setting Function
SHUTTER ECS
SHUTTER SLS
*1
SHUTTER 1/32 *2
SHUTTER 1/33
*2
SHUTTER 1/40
*2
SHUTTER 1/48 *2
SHUTTER 1/500
*2
SHUTTER 1/1000 *2
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/50
*2
SHUTTER 1/60 *2
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/96
*2
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/100
*2
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/120 *2 OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/125
*2
OFF/ON
SHUTTER 1/250 *2 OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
SHUTTER 1/2000 *2 OFF/ON When set to ON, this item can be selected with the SHUTTER SW on the unit
*1 : This does not appear when FORMAT is set to 59.9P and SCAN MODE is set to 23.9P.
*2 : Displayed items are different by setting in FORMAT display.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-21
LENS FILE Display (Operating the LENS file)
O25 LENS FILE TOP
LENS FILE SELECT: 1
F.ID :
<LENS INFORMATION>
S.No :
L.ID :
L.MF :
Item
LENS FILE SELECT
F.ID
S.No
L.ID
L.MF
Setting
1 to 32
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Function
Selects the LENS file
Displays the file ID of the LENS file that is selected by the above LENS FILE SELECT
Displays the serial number of the LENS
Displays the LENS-specific ID
Displays the name of the LENS manufacturer
FORMAT Display (Setting the video format)
When 1080 is selected in SYSTEM LINE
O26 FORMAT TOP
SYSTEM LINE : 1080
SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 59.9i
REC FORMAT : HD422 50
COUNTRY : NTSC(J)AREA
Item Setting Function
SYSTEM LINE
COUNTRY
*
*
SYSTEM FREQUENCY
REC FORMAT
*
1080/720 Sets the format when the power is turned on next time
59.9i/29.9P/23.9P (NTSC AREA) Sets the format when the power is turned on next
50i/25P (PAL AREA) time
See the right column Sets the recording format
Setting value :
HD422 50/HD420 HQ/HD420 SP/IMX 50/IMX 40/
IMX 30/DVCAM
NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC AREA/
PAL AREA
NTSC(J)AREA : NTSC area (Japan)
NTSC AREA : NTSC area
PAL AREA :
(for areas other than Japan)
PAL area
* : The unit must be restarted to enable changes to this setting.
4-22
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
When IMX50/40/30/DVCAM is selected in REC FORMAT
REC FORMAT : IMX 50
ASPECT RATIO(SD): 16:9
AU DATA LEN(IMX): 16bit
COUNTRY : NTSC(J)AREA
Function
Sets the aspect ratio
Sets the record format of audio
Item Setting
ASPECT RATIO(SD)
AU DATA LEN (IMX) *
16:9/4:3
16bit/24bit
* : Displayed only when REC FORMAT is set to IMX50/40/30.
When 720 is selected in SYSTEM LINE
O26 FORMAT TOP
SYSTEM LINE : 720
SYSTEM FREQUENCY: 59.9P
SCAN MODE : 59.9P
REC FORMAT : HD422 50
COUNTRY : NTSC(J)AREA
Item
SYSTEM FREQUENCY
SCAN MODE *2
REC FORMAT
*1
Setting
59.9P (NTSC AREA)
50P (PAL AREA)
59.9P/23.9P
See the right column
Function
Sets the format when the power is turned on next time
Sets the camera shooting frequency
When SCAN MODE is set to 23.9P, the video output signals and video recording signals of this unit are
59.9 Hz signals after 2-3 pulldown
Sets the recording format
Setting value :
HD422 50/HD420 HQ/HD420 SP/IMX 50/IMX 40/
IMX 30/DVCAM
COUNTRY
*1
NTSC(J)AREA/NTSC AREA NTSC(J)AREA : NTSC area (Japan)
/PAL AREA NTSC AREA : NTSC area (for areas other than Japan)
PAL AREA : PAL area
*1 : The unit must be restarted to enable changes to this setting.
*2 : Displayed only when SYSTEM LINE is set to 720 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59.9P.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-23
SOURCE SEL Display (Setting to make the front microphone monaural or stereo)
O27 SOURCE SEL TOP
FRONT MIC SELECT: STREO
REC VIDEO SOURCE: CAM
EXT VIDEO SOURCE: HDSDI
WIDE MODE(EXT) : AUTO
SETUP REMOVE : 7.5%
Item Setting Function
FRONT MIC SELECT MONO/STREO Selects MONO/STEREO when stereo microphone is connected
REC VIDEO SOURCE
EXT VIDEO SOURCE
WIDE MODE(EXT) *1
*1
*1
CAM/EXT
VBS/HDSDI/SDSDI Selects input signal to be recorded by this equipment, among the input signals supplied from external equipment when EXT is selected by REC VIDEO SOURCE
AUTO/16:9
Switches the recording target video between the video shot by the camera and the video input from an external device (VBS or
SD-SDI/HD-SDI)
When the input signal is SD, select the method that determines whether the signal is treated as a wide signal
AUTO : When wide picture information is detected in the input signal, treat the signal as a wide signal and set the up-converter operating mode to squeeze mode. Record wide picture information when recording SD. When wide picture information is not detected, set the upconverter operating mode to edge crop mode and do not record wide picture information
16:9 : Always treat the signal as a wide signal and set the upconverter operating mode to squeeze mode. Record wide picture information when recording SD
SETUP REMOVE
*2
0.0%/7.5% Selects whether to modify the setup level of input video signals
7.5% : Remove the setup (Select when signals with 7.5% setup are input)
0.0% : Do not remove the setup (Select when signals without setup are input)
*1 : Displayed only when the CBK-HD01 or CBK-SC02 option board is installed.
*2 : Displayed only when COUNTRY is set to “NTSC(J)AREA” or “NTSC AREA” and the CBK-SC02 option board is installed.
UMID SET Display (Setting the UMID)
O28 UMID SET TOP
COUNTRY CODE :
ORGANIZATION :
USER CODE :
TIME ZONE :00 :+00:00
Item
COUNTRY CODE
ORGANIZATION
USER CODE
TIME ZONE
4-24
Setting
4 characters (alphanumeric characters)
4 characters (alphanumeric characters)
4 characters (alphanumeric characters)
00 to 3F
Function
Setting the country code
Setting the organization code
Setting the user code
Setting TIME ZONE (time difference)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
CLIP TITLE Display (Setting whether to create the clip title)
O29 CLIP TITLE TOP
TITLE : DSABL
Item
TITLE
Setting
DSABL/ENABL
When ENABL is selected in TITLE
O29 CLIP TITLE TOP
TITLE : ENABL
SELECT PREFIX : EXEC
CLEAR NUMERIC : EXEC
LOAD PREFIX DATA: EXEC
PREFIX : TITLE
NUMERIC : 00001
Function
DSABL : Not automatically created
ENABL : Sets the clip title to be automatically created when recording
Item
SELECT PREFIX
CLEAR NUMERIC
LOAD PREFIX DATA
PREFIX
NUMERIC
Setting
_
_
_
TITLE/up to 10 characters
00001 to 99999
Function
Select from maximum of 20 titles, or enter a prefix
Sets the start number of the title name
Loads the file from the memory stick to the unit
Enters a title prefix
Sets the initial value of the clip title serial
FILE NAMING Display (Assigns the user-defined names to clips and clip lists)
O30 FILE NAMING TOP
NAMING FORM : FREE
AUTO NAMING : Cxxxx
Item
NAMING FORM
AUTO NAMING
Setting
C
****/FREE
C ****/TITLE/PLAN
Function
Assigns user-defined names to clips and clip lists
*1
Assigns clip name on this unit, when the NAMING FORM item is set to “FREE”
C **** : Assigns clip names in the default naming format
TITLE : Assigns the name that is given when the title is set to ENABL in the
CLIP TITLE page, as the clip name
PLAN
*2
: Assigns the title that is described in the readout planning Metadata, as the clip name
*1 : A user-defined name can be given to the clip list via FAM/FTP.
*2 : The title display on the VF DISP screen can be switched from Settings of the Disc Menu → Planning Clip Name in Clip Info. Area setting.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-25
O31 SELECT FUNCTION TOP
LETTER BOX : DISABLE
FOCUS MAG : DISABLE
* : This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23.9P.
Item
LETTER BOX
FOCUS MAG
HD
→ SD PHASE 0H
SYNCRO
Setting Function
DISABLE/ENABLE Enable the selection of “LETTR” (LETTER BOX) in the
DOWN CON MODE item on the OUTPUT 2 page n
Breakup may occur in output signals and in the video and audio of this unit for about 5 to 10 seconds immediately after this setting is changed.
DISABLE/ENABLE Enable the assignment of the FOCUS MAG function to the
ASSIGN switches n
Breakup may occur in output signals and in the video and audio of this unit for about 5 to 10 seconds immediately after this setting is changed.
Display only Displayed only when LETTER BOX and FOCUS MAG is set to
“DISABLE”
When ENABLE is selected in LETTER BOX or FOCUS MAG
O31 SELECT FUNCTION TOP
LETTER BOX : DISABLE
FOCUS MAG : ENABLE
HD SD PHASE DELAYED
REF HD-Y PHASE DELAYED
Item
HD
→ SD PHASE
DELAYED
REF
→ HD-Y PHASE
DELAYED
Setting
Display only
Display only
Function
Displayed only when LETTER BOX is set to “ENABLE”, or when FOCUS MAG is set to “ENABLE” n
In these states, the phases of HD output and SD output from this unit do not match.
Displayed only when FOCUS MAG is set to “ENABLE” n
In this state, the phase of HD-Y output from this unit does not match the phase of the GENLOCK IN signal. When multiple
PDW-F800 units are daisy chained via this unit inter-system phases do not match.
4-26
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
O32 LENS CONFIG TOP
IMAGE INVERT : OFF
* : Displayed only when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23.9P, 25P, or 29.9P.
Item
IMAGE INVERT
Setting
OFF/ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF the function that cancels the image inversion effect that occurs when using the cine lens converter
MEMORY REC Display (Setting the proxy data record function)
O33 MEMORY REC TOP
MEMORY REC : DSABL
Item
MEMORY REC
Setting
DSABL/ENABL
When ENABL is selected in MEMORY REC
MEMORY REC : ENABL
COPY CURRENT CLP: EXEC
COPY ALL CLIPS : EXEC
ABORT COPY : EXEC
DEL ALL MEM CLP : EXEC
FORMAT MEMORY : EXEC
Function
Turns ON/OFF the proxy data record function and the copy function from the disc to the USB memory
Item Setting
COPY CURRENT CLP
COPY ALL CLIPS
ABORT COPY
*
*
* Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
DEL ALL MEM CLP
FORMAT MEMORY
*
*
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
* : Executable only when ETHERNET/USB is set to ENABL.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Function
Copies a proxy data clip on the disc to the USB memory
Copies all of the proxy data clips on the disc to the USB memory
Stops copying to the USB memory
Deletes the saved proxy data
Formats the USB memory
4-27
4-5. PAINT Menu
n
When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is the relative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
SW STATUS Display (Turns ON/OFF the PAINT related functions)
P01 SW STATUS TOP
GAMMA : ON
BLACK GAMMA : OFF
MATRIX : OFF
KNEE : ON
WHITE CLIP : ON
DETAIL : ON
APERTURE : ON
FLARE : ON
TEST SAW : OFF
Item
GAMMA
BLACK GAMMA
MATRIX
KNEE
WHITE CLIP
DETAIL
APERTURE
FLARE
TEST SAW
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF the gamma correction function
Turns ON/OFF the black gamma correction function
Turns ON/OFF all of the matrix correction functions
Turns ON/OFF the knee correction function
Turns ON/OFF the white clip correction function
Turns ON/OFF the function that adds the detail signal to the video signal to improve resolution power
Turns ON/OFF the aperture correction function
Turns ON/OFF the flare correction function
Turns ON/OFF the test signal correction function
4-28
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
WHITE Display (Setting color temperature at WHITE A/B)
P02 WHITE TOP
COLOR TEMP <A>: 3200
C TEMP BAL <A>: 0
R GAIN <A>: 0
B GAIN <A>: 0
COLOR TEMP <B>: 3200
C TEMP BAL <B>: 0
R GAIN <B>: 0
B GAIN <B>: 0
Item
COLOR TEMP <A>
C TEMP BAL <A>
R GAIN <A>
B GAIN <A>
COLOR TEMP <B>
C TEMP BAL <B>
R GAIN <B>
B GAIN <B>
(
(
(
(
(
(
Setting
Displays the color temperature
(Guideline)
_99 to 99)
_99 to 99)
_99 to 99)
Displays the color temperature
(Guideline)
_99 to 99)
_99 to 99)
_99 to 99)
Function
Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of your preference (WHITE A)
(The displayed value is a guideline)
Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time.
When data of the color temperature display is more than 100000K, ****** appears.
Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimum color cannot be obtained by the above COLOR
TEMP <A ch>
Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time.
Uses this item when you want to adjust the color temperature by changing the R GAIN <A ch>
Uses this item when you want to adjust the color temperature by changing the B GAIN <A ch>
Sets the value that is close to the color temperature of your preference <B ch>
(The displayed value is a guideline)
Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time.
When data of the color temperature display is more than 100000K, ****** appears.
Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimum color cannot be obtained by the above COLOR
TEMP <B ch>
Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time.
Uses this item when you want to adjust the color temperature by changing the R GAIN <B ch>
Uses this item when you want to adjust the color temperature by changing the B GAIN <B ch>
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-29
BLACK/FLARE Display (Adjusting black/flare)
P03 BLACK/FLARE TOP
MASTER BLACK : 0
R BLACK : 0
G BLACK : 0
B BLACK : 0
MASTER FLARE : 0
R FLARE : 0
G FLARE : 0
B FLARE : 0
FLARE : ON
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Item
MASTER BLACK
R BLACK
G BLACK
B BLACK
MASTER FLARE
Setting
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
R FLARE
G FLARE
B FLARE
FLARE
TEST OUT SELECT
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
OFF/ON
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Function
Adjusts the master black level
(All of the R, G and B black levels are adjusted)
Adjusts the R black level
Adjusts the G black level
Adjusts the B black level
Adjusts the master flare compensation level
(All of the R, G and B flare compensation levels are adjusted)
Adjusts the R flare compensation level
Adjusts the G flare compensation level
Adjusts the B flare compensation level
Turns ON/OFF the flare compensation function
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST
OUT connector
4-30
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
GAMMA Display (Adjusting gamma)
P04 GAMMA TOP
GAMMA : ON
STEP GAMMA : 0.45
MASTER GAMMA : 0
R GAMMA : 0
G GAMMA : 0
B GAMMA : 0
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
GAMMA TABLE : STD
GAM TABLE (STD) : 5
ITU-R709
Item
GAMMA
STEP GAMMA
MASTER GAMMA
R GAMMA
G GAMMA
B GAMMA
TEST OUT SELECT
GAMMA TABLE
GAM TABLE (STD)
Setting
OFF/ON
0.35 to 0.90 (0.05 step)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
STD/HG/USER
1 to 6
Function
Turns ON/OFF the gamma correction function
Sets the master gamma correction curve for each step
Adjusts the master gamma correction curve
Adjusts the R gamma correction curve
Adjusts the G gamma correction curve
Adjusts the B gamma correction curve
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST
OUT connector
Selects the gamma type
STD : Standard gamma
HG : Hyper gamma
USER : User gamma
Selects the standard gamma type
1 : Corresponds to SD camcorder
2 : x 4.5 gain
3 : x 3.5 gain
4 : Corresponds to SMPTE-240M
5 : Corresponds to ITU-R709
6 : x 5.0 gain
When HG is selected in GAMMA TABLE
GAMMA TABLE : HG
GAM TABLE (HG) : 4
HG4609
Item
GAM TABLE (HG)
Setting
1 to 4
Function
Selects the hyper gamma type
1 : 325%
→ 100%
2 : 460%
→ 100%
3 : 325%
→ 109%
4 : 460%
→ 109%
When USER is selected in GAMMA TABLE
GAMMA TABLE : USER
GAM TABLE (USER): 1
ITU-R709
Item
GAM TABLE (USER)
Setting
1 to 5
Function
Selects USER GAMMA (USER GAMMA can be loaded from the Memory Stick by using the USER
GAMMA page in the FILE menu)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-31
BLACK GAMMA Display (Adjusting black gamma)
P05 BLACK GAMMA TOP
BLACK GAMMA : OFF
BLACK GAM RANGE : HIGH
MASTER BLK GAMMA: 0
R BLACK GAMMA : 0
G BLACK GAMMA : 0
B BLACK GAMMA : 0
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Item
BLACK GAMMA
BLACK GAM RANGE
MASTER BLK GAMMA
R BLACK GAMMA
G BLACK GAMMA
B BLACK GAMMA
TEST OUT SELECT
(
Setting
OFF/ON
LOW/L.MID/H.MID/HIGH
_99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
(
_99 to 99)
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Function
Turns ON/OFF the black gamma correction function
Sets the range in which the black gamma correction is effective
LOW : 0 to 3.6 %
L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %
H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %
HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %
Adjusts the master black gamma correction curve
(All of the R, G and B black gamma are adjusted)
Adjusts the R black gamma correction curve
Adjusts the G black gamma correction curve
Adjusts the B black gamma correction curve
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST
OUT connector
KNEE 1 Display (Adjusting-1 knee)
P06 KNEE 1 TOP
KNEE : ON
KNEE POINT (M) : 95.0
KNEE SLOPE (M) : 0
KNEE SATURATION : ON
KNEE SAT LEVEL : 0
WHITE CLIP : ON
WHITE CLIP LEVEL: 108.0
Item Setting Function
KNEE
KNEE POINT (M)
KNEE SLOPE (M)
KNEE SATURATION
KNEE SAT LEVEL
WHITE CLIP
OFF/ON
50 to 109.0 (0.1 step)
Turns ON/OFF the knee correction function
Adjusts the master knee point level during the manual knee adjustment
(
_99 to 99)
Adjusts the master knee slope level during the manual knee adjustment
Turns ON/OFF the knee saturation function
(
OFF/ON
_99 to 99)
OFF/ON
Adjusts the knee saturation level
Turns ON/OFF the white clip function
(used during the video signal adjustment)
Note : The video level that is higher than 109% is not output even if this setting is set to OFF.
90.0 to 109.0
*
(0.1 step) Set the master white clip level WHITE CLIP LEVEL
* : Default setting value is 108.0% when COUNTRY is set to “NTSC(J)AREA” or “NTSC AREA”, 105.0% when COUNTRY is set to “PAL
AREA”.
4-32
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
KNEE 2 Display (Adjusting-2 knee)
P07 KNEE 2 TOP
KNEE SATURATION : ON
KNEE POINT (R) : ---
KNEE SLOPE (R) : ---
KNEE POINT (G) : 0.0
KNEE SLOPE (G) : 0
KNEE POINT (B) : ---
KNEE SLOPE (B) : ---
Item Setting Function
KNEE SATURATION
KNEE POINT (R)
OFF/ON
_45.0 to 14.0
*
(0.1 step)
Turns ON/OFF the knee saturation function
Adjusts the R knee point level during the manual knee adjustment
KNEE SLOPE (R)
KNEE POINT (G)
( _99 to 99) *
_45.0 to 14.0
(0.1 step)
(
_99 to 99)
Adjusts the R knee slope level during the manual knee adjustment
Adjusts the G knee point level during the manual knee adjustment
KNEE SLOPE (G)
KNEE POINT (B) _45.0 to 14.0
*
(0.1 step)
( _99 to 99) *
Adjusts the G knee slope level during the manual knee adjustment
Adjusts the B knee point level during the manual knee adjustment
KNEE SLOPE (B) Adjusts the B knee slope level during the manual knee adjustment
* : Enabled only when KNEE SATURATION is set to OFF. (When set to ON, the screen displays “- - -” )
DETAIL 1 Display (Adjusting-1 DETAIL)
P08 DETAIL 1 TOP
DETAIL : ON
APERTURE : ON
DETAIL LEVEL : 0
APERTURE LEVEL : 0
DTL H/V RATIO : 0
CRISPENING : 0
LEVEL DEPEND : ON
LEVEL DEPEND LVL: 0
DETAIL FREQUENCY: 0
Item
DETAIL
APERTURE
DETAIL LEVEL
APERTURE LEVEL
DTL H/V RATIO
CRISPENING
LEVEL DEPEND
LEVEL DEPEND LVL
DETAIL FREQUENCY
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
(
_99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
Function
Turns ON/OFF the detail correction function
Turns ON/OFF the aperture correction function
Sets the overall detail signal level
Sets the aperture correction level
Sets the V. detail signal level only
Sets the range of video signal amplitude to which the detail signal is crispening
Turns ON/OFF the level depend function
(This function decreases the amount of detail signal when the video signal amplitude is small)
Sets the range of video signal amplitude that is suppressed by the level depend
Sets the frequency (thickness) of the H. detail signal
4-33
DETAIL 2 Display (Adjusting-2 DETAIL)
P09 DETAIL 2 TOP
KNEE APERTURE : OFF
KNEE APT LVL : 0
DETAIL LIMIT : 0
DTL WHT LMT : 0
DTL BLK LMT : 0
DTL V-BLK LMT : 0
V DTL CREATION : R+G
H/V CONTROL MODE: V
Item
KNEE APERTURE
KNEE APT LVL
DETAIL LIMIT
DTL WHT LMT
DTL BLK LMT
DTL V-BLK LMT
V DTL CREATION
H/V CONTROL MODE
Setting
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
NAM/ G/ R +G/ Y
H/V /V
Function
Turns ON/OFF the knee aperture function (This function controls the amount of the detail signal that is added to the highlight signal higher than the knee point)
Adjusts the amount of the detail signal that is added to the highlight signal higher than the knee point
Sets the both detail black and white limiters
Limits the white peak of the detail signal
Limits the black peak of the detail signal
Limits the black peak of the V. detail signal
Selects the source signal of the V. detail signal
Selects an operation mode of DETAIL H/V RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page
H/V : Increase/decrease volume for H and V moves in the opposite manner
V : Controls V DTL
SD DETAIL Display (Adjusting DETAIL of SD)
P10 SD DETAIL TOP
SD DETAIL : OFF
SD DETAIL LEVEL : 0
SD CRISPENING : 0
SD DTL WHT LIMIT: 0
SD DTL BLK LIMIT: 0
SD LEVEL DEPEND : ON
SD LV DEPEND LVL: 0
SD DTL FREQUENCY: 0
SD DTL H/V RATIO: 0
SD CROSS COLOR : 0
Item
SD DETAIL
SD DETAIL LEVEL
SD CRISPENING
SD DTL WHT LIMIT
SD DTL BLK LIMIT
SD LEVEL DEPEND
SD LV DEPEND LVL
SD DTL FREQUENCY
SD DTL H/V RATIO
SD CROSS COLOR
Setting
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
(
_99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
(
_99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
Function
Turns ON/OFF the SD detail correction function
Sets the overall SD detail signal level
Sets the SD crispening level
Limits the white peak of the SD detail signal
Limits the black peak of the SD detail signal
Turns ON/OFF the level depend function (This function decreases the amount of detail signal when the video signal amplitude is small)
Sets the range of video signal amplitude that is suppressed by the level depend
Sets the frequency (thickness) of the H. SD detail signal
Sets the SD V. detail signal level only
Sets the SD cross-color reduction level
(When NTSC(J)AREA or NTSC AREA is selected on the FORMAT)
4-34
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
SKIN DETAIL Display (Controlling DETAIL of specific color such as skin tone)
P11 SKIN DETAIL TOP
SKIN DETAIL ALL : OFF
SKIN DETECT : EXEC
SKIN AREA IND : OFF
SKIN DTL SELECT : 1
SKIN DETAIL : ON
SKIN DETAIL LVL : 0
SKIN DTL SAT : 0
SKIN DTL HUE : 0
SKIN DTL WIDTH : 39
Item
SKIN DETAIL ALL
SKIN DETECT
SKIN AREA IND
SKIN DTL SELECT
SKIN DETAIL
SKIN DETAIL LVL
SKIN DTL SAT
SKIN DTL HUE
SKIN DTL WIDTH
Setting
OFF/ON
Moves to color detection page
OFF/ON
1/2/3
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
0 to 359
0 to 359
Function
Turns ON/OFF the skin detail function
Automatic color detection function
Move the cursor to the desired object color and press the
MENU knob. Then the SKIN DTL SAT. and the SKIN
DTL HUE will be set automatically
Turns ON/OFF the zebra display to the target area
Selects the skin detail BANK
(When BANK is switched, the lower 5 lines of display are switched at the same time)
Turns ON/OFF skin detail CH1/2/3 individually
The ON/OFF settings can be set for each selection of
SKIN DTL SELECT above (three settings)
Sets the skin detail signal level
(Increasing this value increases the skin detail signal amplitude)
This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) of the above SKIN DTL SELECT
Sets the range of (saturation) of chroma signal in which the skin detail signal is effective
This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) of the above SKIN DTL SELECT
Sets the center phase of the chroma phase (HUE) in which the skin detail functions (Unit : Degrees)
This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) of the above SKIN DTL SELECT
Sets the width of the chroma phase (HUE) in which the skin detail functions (Unit : Degrees)
This item can be set to each BANK (3 different settings) of the above SKIN DTL SELECT
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-35
MTX LINEAR Display (Setting user-set matrix)
P12 MTX LINEAR TOP
MATRIX : OFF
MATRIX(USER) : OFF
MATRIX(PRESET) : ON
MATRIX(PRST)SEL : 2
MATRIX(USER) R-G: 0
MATRIX(USER) R-B: 0
MATRIX(USER) G-R: 0
MATRIX(USER) G-B: 0
MATRIX(USER) B-R: 0
MATRIX(USER) B-G: 0
Item
MATRIX
MATRIX (USER)
MATRIX (PRESET)
MATRIX (PRST) SEL
MATRIX (USER) R-G
MATRIX (USER) R-B
MATRIX (USER) G-R
MATRIX (USER) G-B
MATRIX (USER) B-R
MATRIX (USER) B-G
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
1/2/3/4/5/6
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
(
_99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
Function
Turns ON/OFF the linear matrix and user-set matrix functions
Turns ON/OFF the user-set linear matrix function
Turns ON/OFF the preset matrix function
Selects the preset matrix
1 : equivalent to SMPTE 240M 2 : equivalent to ITU-709
3 : equivalent to SMPTE WIDE 4 : equivalent to NTSC
5 : equivalent to EBU 6 : equivalent to ITU-601
Sets the R-G user-set matrix coefficients
Sets the R-B user-set matrix coefficients
Sets the G-R user-set matrix coefficients
Sets the G-B user-set matrix coefficients
Sets the B-R user-set matrix coefficients
Sets the B-G user-set matrix coefficients
4-36
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
MTX MULTI Display (Setting multi matrix)
P13 MTX MULTI TOP
MATRIX : OFF
MATRIX (MULTI) : OFF
MATRIX AREA IND : OFF
MATRIX COLOR DET : EXEC
MTX(MULTI) PRESET: EXEC
MTX(MULTI) AXIS : B
MTX(MULTI) HUE : 0
MTX(MULTI) SAT : 0
Item
MATRIX
MATRIX (MULTI)
MTRIX AREA IND
MTRIX COLOR DET
MTX (MULTI) PRESET
MTX (MULTI) AXIS
MTX (MULTI) HUE
MTX (MULTI) SAT
(
(
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
B/B +/MG_/MG/MG+/
R/R +/YL_/YL+/
G _/G/G+/CY/CY+/B_
_99 to 99)
_99 to 99)
Function
Turns ON/OFF the linear matrix and multi matrix correction functions
Turns ON/OFF the multi matrix function
Turns ON/OFF the function that shows the zebra pattern indicating the detecting region of the multi matrix correction, inside VF
Automatic color detection function
Move the cursor to the desired object color and press the MENU knob
Then the MTX (MULTI) AXIS will be set automatically
Return MTX (MULTI) HUE and MTX (MULTI) SAT values to preset values for each of the 16 axes
Sets the chroma phase for the sixteen axes that are the target of the multi matrix correction function
Adjusts the chroma phase (HUE) of the multi matrix correction
(every sixteen axis)
Adjusts the saturation (SAT) of the multi matrix correction
(every sixteen axis)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-37
V MODULATION Display (Adjusting Temporary WHITE V SAW SHADING for LENS)
P14 V MODULATION TOP
V MOD : ON
MASTER VMOD : 0
R VMOD : 0
G VMOD : 0
B VMOD : 0
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Item
V MOD
MASTER VMOD
R VMOD
G VMOD
B VMOD
TEST OUT SELECT
Setting
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Function
Turns ON/OFF the V. modulation function
Adjusts amount of the master V. modulation correction
(All of the R, G and B V. modulation corrections are controlled)
Adjusts amount of the R V. modulation correction
Adjusts amount of the G V. modulation correction
Adjusts amount of the B V. modulation correction
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector
SATURATION Display (Setting the saturation)
P15 SATURATION TOP
LOW KEY SAT : OFF
L KEY SAT LEVEL : 0
L KEY SAT RANGE : HIGH
Y BLACK GAMMA : OFF
Y BLK GAM LEVEL : 0
Y BLK GAM RANGE : HIGH
Item
LOW KEY SAT
L KEY SAT LEVEL
L KEY SAT RANGE
Setting
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
LOW/L.MID/
H.MID/HIGH
Y BLACK GAMMA
Y BLK GAM LEVEL
Y BLK GAM RANGE
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
LOW/L.MID/
H.MID/HIGH
Function
Turns ON/OFF the low key saturation function
Sets the saturation level of low luminance part
Sets the range of video signal in which the low key saturation correction is effective
LOW : 0 to 3.6 %
L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %
H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %
HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %
Turns ON/OFF the Y black gamma correction function
Adjust the gamma curve in the low luminance part
Sets the range of video signal in which the Y black gamma correction is effective
LOW : 0 to 3.6 %
L.MID : 0 to 7.2 %
H.MID : 0 to 14.4 %
HIGH : 0 to 28.8 %
4-38
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
NOISE SUPPRESS Display (Setting the noise suppresser function )
P16 NOISE SUPPRESS TOP
NOISE SUPPRESS : ON
Item Setting
NOISE SUPPRESS OFF/ON
Function
Turn ON/OFF the noise suppresser function
SCENE FILE Display (Operating the SCENE file)
P17 SCENE FILE TOP
1 :STANDARD
2 :STANDARD
3 :STANDARD
4 :STANDARD
5 :STANDARD
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL : EXEC
SCENE STORE : EXEC
F.ID :
Item
1 to 5
STANDARD
Setting
STANDARD
_
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID
_
_
16 characters
(alphanumeric characters, symbols and spaces)
* : Refer to “4-7. FILE Menu” for the file selection display.
Function
Recalls the scene file saved in the memory of the camcorder
*
Selects whether to clear all current detail-adjusted settings and switch settings and returns the settings to the standard settings saved in the reference file
Calls the SCENE file from the main unit or Memory Stick
Save the SCENE file to the main unit or Memory Stick
Sets the file ID (When the SCENE file is stored, the file ID is saved)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-39
4-6. MAINTENANCE Menu
n
When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is the relative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
WHITE SHADING Display (Adjusting white shading)
M01 WHITE SHADING TOP
WHT SHAD CH SEL : R
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
R WHT H SAW : 0
R WHT H PARA : 0
R WHT V SAW : 0
R WHT V PARA : 0
WHITE SAW/PARA : ON
Item Setting Function
WHT SHAD CH SEL
TEST OUT SELECT
R WHT H SAW
(R/G/B)
(
R/G/B/TEST
*
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
_99 to 99)
Selects the channel of shading correction
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector
Adjusts the H SAW white shading correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH
SEL n
It cannot be changed during the service mode.
R WHT H PARA
(R/G/B)
R WHT V SAW
(R/G/B)
R WHT V PARA
(R/G/B)
(
(
( _99 to 99)
_99 to 99)
_99 to 99)
Adjusts the H PARA white shading correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH
SEL n
It cannot be changed during the service mode.
Adjusts the V SAW white shading correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH
SEL n
It cannot be changed during the service mode.
Adjusts the V PARA white shading correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH
SEL n
It cannot be changed during the service mode.
WHITE SAW/PARA OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the white shading SAW/PARA compensation
* : When TEST is set, the channels switch in relation with TEST OUT SELECT.
4-40
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
BLACK SHADING Display (Adjusting black shading)
M02 BLACK SHADING TOP
BLK SHAD CH SEL : R
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
R BLK H SAW : 0
R BLK H PARA : 0
R BLK V SAW : 0
R BLK V PARA : 0
BLACK SAW/PARA : ON
MASTER BLACK : 0
MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB
Item Setting Function
BLK SHAD CH SEL
TEST OUT SELECT
R BLK H SAW
(R/G/B)
(
R/G/B/TEST
*
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
_99 to 99)
Selects the channel of black shading correction
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector
Adjusts the H SAW black shading correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH
SEL
R BLK H PARA
(R/G/B)
R BLK V SAW
(R/G/B)
(
( _99 to 99)
_99 to 99)
Adjusts the H PARA black shading correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH
SEL
Adjusts the V SAW black shading correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH
SEL
R BLK V PARA
(R/G/B)
( _99 to 99)
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
Adjusts the V PARA black shading correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above SHADING CH
SEL
Turns ON/OFF the black shading SAW/PARA compensation BLACK SAW/PARA
MASTER BLACK Adjusts the master black level (All of the R, G and B signal black levels are adjusted)
MASTER GAIN (TMP) _6/_3/0/3/6/9/12/18/ Sets the temporary master gain
24/30/36/42 dB
* : When TEST is set, the channels switch in relation with TEST OUT SELECT.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-41
LEVEL ADJUST Display (Adjusting output signal level)
M03 LEVEL ADJUST TOP
VBS VIDEO LEVEL : 0
HD-Y LEVEL : 0
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Item
VBS VIDEO LEVEL
HD-Y LEVEL
TEST OUT SELECT
Setting
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Function
Adjusts the composite signal video level
Adjusts the Y level of the HD component signal
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector
BATTERY 1 Display (Setting-1 the battery-related items)
M04 BATTERY 1 TOP
Info BEFORE END : 5%
Info END : 0%
Sony BEFORE END :11.5V
Sony END :11.0V
Other BEFORE END :11.8V
Other END :11.0V
DC IN BEFORE END :11.8V
DC IN END :11.0V
DETECTED BATTERY : Info
Item
Info BEFORE END
Info END
Sony BEFORE END
Sony END
Setting
5% to 100% (5% steps)
0%/1%/2%/3%/4%/5%
11.5 to 17.0 V (0.1V steps)
11.0 to 11.5 V (0.1V steps)
Function
Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is used. Sets the remaining power
(% value) of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued
*1
Used when a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack is used. Sets the remaining power
(% value) of the battery at which the END warning should be issued *2
Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued
*1
Used when a BP-L60S/L80S Battery Pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued *2
Other BEFORE END
Other END
DC IN BEFORE END
DC IN END
11.5 to 17.0 V (0.1V steps)
11.0 to 14.0 V (0.1V steps)
11.5 to 17.0 V (0.1V steps)
11.0 to 14.0 V (0.1V steps)
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the BEFORE END warning should be issued
Used when a battery pack other than a Sony battery pack is used. Sets the voltage level of the battery at which the END warning should be issued
Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector
Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the
BEFORE END warning should be issued
Used when an external power source is connected to the DC IN connector
Sets the voltage level of the connected external power source at which the END warning should be issued
DETECTED BATTERY Info/Sony/Other/DC IN Displays the type of automatically detected battery
*1 : The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other BEFORE END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to “ OTHER” .
*2 : The setting of this item is overridden by the setting of Other END when TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to “ OTHER” .
4-42
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
BATTERY 2 Display (Setting-2 the battery-related items)
M05 BATTERY 2 TOP
TAPE DETECTION : AUTO
<Other Battery Scale>
SEGMENT NO.7 : 17.0V
SEGMENT NO.6 : 16.0V
SEGMENT NO.5 : 15.0V
SEGMENT NO.4 : 14.0V
SEGMENT NO.3 : 13.0V
SEGMENT NO.2 : 12.0V
SEGMENT NO.1 : 11.0V
Item Setting Function
TYPE DETECTION *
SEGMENT NO.7 to NO.1
AUTO/OTHER
11.0 to 17.0 V (0.1 V steps)
AUTO: Automatically detects the type of the battery
OTHER: Always judges the battery to be of the
“OTHER” type regardless of the actual battery type
When the battery type judgment is “OTHER” , sets the voltage level below which the battery status indicator segment No.7 should turn off
* : When TYPE DETECTION in the BATTERY 2 page is set to “AUTO” , any batteries other than Sony BP series batteries and Anton
Bauer intelligent battery systems are classified as “Others”.
AUDIO-1 Display (Setting-1 on audio)
M06 AUDIO-1 TOP
FRONT MIC SELECT: STREO
AUDIO CH3/4 MODE: SW
REAR XLR AUTO : OFF
FRONT MIC REF : -50dB
REAR MIC REF : -60dB
MIN ALARM VOL : OFF
SP ATT LEVEL : OFF
HEADPHONE OUT : MONO
Item
FRONT MIC SELECT
AUDIO CH3/4 MODE
Setting
MONO/STREO
CH1/2/SW
REAR XLR AUTO
FRONT MIC REF
REAR MIC REF
MIN ALARM VOL
SP ATT LEVEL
HEADPHONE OUT
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
OFF/ON
_60/_50/_40 dB
_60/_50/_40 dB
OFF/SET
OFF/3/6/9 dB
STREO/MONO
Function
Selects whether to make the front microphone monaural or stereo
Selects the input signal to be recorded on CH3/4
CH1/2 : Same signals as CH1 and CH2
SW : The input signals that are selected by the
AUDIO IN CH3, CH4 switches on the inside panel
Turns ON/OFF the function that automatically detects whether the connector is connected to the AUDIO IN connector at the rear
Sets the reference input level of the front microphone
Select the reference input level when AUDIO IN CH1 of the rear is set to MIC
Volume of the monitor speaker alarm tone when it is turned all the way down
OFF: Almost inaudible
SET: Faintly audible
Lowers the volume of the monitor speaker. Has no effect on earphone volume
Selects whether to make the rear earphone monaural or stereo
4-43
AUDIO-2 Display (Setting-2 on audio)
M07 AUDIO-2 TOP
AU DATA LEN(IMX): 16bit
AU REF LEVEL : -20dB
AU REF OUT : 0dB
AU CH12 AGC MODE: MONO
AU CH34 AGC MODE: MONO
AU AGC SPEC : -6dB
AU LIMITER MODE : OFF
AU OUT LIMITER : ON
Item Setting Function
AU DATA LEN(IMX)
AU REF LEVEL
AU REF OUT
*
AU CH12 AGC MODE
16bit/24bit
_20 dB/_18 dB/_16 dB/
_12 dB/EBUL
0 dB/ +4 dB/_3 dB/EBUL
MONO/STREO
Sets the record format of audio
Sets the output level of the 1 kHz test signal
Sets the output level with respect to the REF. level
Selects whether to perform the auto adjustment on the input level of the analog audio signals to be recorded on
CH1/CH2 separately for each channel, or in the stereo mode
AU CH34 AGC MODE
AU AGC SPEC
AU LIMITER MODE
OFF/MONO/STREO Selects whether to perform the auto adjustment on the input level of the analog audio signals to be recorded on
CH3/CH4 separately for each channel, or in the stereo mode, or to turn it off
_6 dB/_9 dB/_12 dB/
_15 dB/_17 dB
Sets the AGC characteristics (saturation level)
OFF/ _6 dB/_9 dB/_12 dB/ Sets the limiter characteristics (saturation level) for large
_15 dB/_17 dB input signals during the manual adjustment of the audio input level
AU OUT LIMITER OFF/ON
* : Displayed only when REC FORMAT is set to IMX50/40/30.
Turns ON/OFF the audio output limiter
4-44
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
AUDIO-3 Display (Setting-3 on audio)
M08 AUDIO-3 TOP
AU SG (1KHz) : OFF
MIC CH1 LEVEL : FRONT
MIC CH2 LEVEL : FRONT
REAR1/WRR LEVEL : SIDE1
REAR2/WRR LEVEL : SIDE2
AUDIO CH3 LEVEL : FIX
AUDIO CH4 LEVEL : FIX
Item
AU SG (1 KHz)
MIC CH1 LEVEL
MIC CH2 LEVEL
REAR1/WRR LEVEL
REAR2/WRR LEVEL
AUDIO CH3 LEVEL
AUDIO CH4 LEVEL
Setting
ON/OFF/AUTO
SIDE1/FRONT/F +S1
SIDE2/FRONT/F
+S2
SIDE1/FRONT/F +S1
SIDE2/FRONT/F +S2
FIX/FRONT
FIX/FRONT
Function
Sets whether to output the 1 kHz test tone during the COLOR BAR mode or not
ON : 1 kHz test tone is output during the COLOR BAR mode
OFF : 1 kHz test tone is not output during the COLOR BAR mode
AUTO : 1 kHz test tone is output only when the CH1 AUDIO SELECT switch on the inside panel is in the AUTO position
Selects any of these knobs to adjust the front microphone L-CH
SIDE1 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (left side) on the side panel
FRONT : Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
F + S1 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob (left side) or the
MIC LEVEL knob
Selects any of these knobs to adjust the front microphone R-CH
SIDE2 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (right side) on the side panel
FRONT: Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
F
+ S2 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob
(right side) or the MIC LEVEL knob (Two knobs are interlocked each other)
Selects any of these knobs to adjust the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and what is connected to the AUDIO IN CH1 connector on the rear panel
SIDE1 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (left side) on the side panel
FRONT : Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
F + S1 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob
(left side) or the MIC LEVEL knob (Two knobs are interlocked each other)
Selects any of these knobs to adjust the equipment that is connected to the wireless microphone and what is connected to the AUDIO IN CH2 connector on the rear panel
SIDE2 : Adjusts it with the AUDIO LEVEL knob (right side) on the side panel
FRONT : Adjusts it with the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel
F + S2 : It can be adjusted by either the AUDIO LEVEL knob
(right side) or the MIC LEVEL knob (Two knobs are interlocked each other)
Selects the audio level recorded on channel 3 when AU CH34 AGC MODE is set to OFF
FIX : Fixed
FRONT : Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel of the camcorder
Selects the audio level recorded on channel 4 when AU CH34 AGC MODE is set to OFF
FIX : Fixed
FRONT : Level as adjusted by the MIC LEVEL knob on the front panel of the camcorder
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-45
WRR SETTING Display (Setting on Wireless)
M09 WRR SETTING TOP
WRR VALID CH SEL: ALL
WRR CH SELECT : TX1
WRR DELAY COMP : ON
TX1 : -
TX1 AUDIO PEAK : PEAK
TX1 INPUT LEVEL : MIC
TX1 ATT LEVEL : 0dB
TX1 LCF FREQ : 200Hz
TX1 SYSTEM DELAY: AUTO
Item Setting Function
WRR VALID CH SEL
WRR CH SELECT
*2
WRR DELAY COMP
*2
ALL/CH1
TX1/TX2
OFF/ON
Selects whether to enable channels 1 and 2 of the wireless receiver, or channel 1 only
ALL : Enable both channel 1 and 2
CH1 : Enable channel 1 only. Select this setting to use the wireless receiver as a monaural receiver
Specifies the target channel for other items in this menu
TX1 : Channel 1
TX2 : Channel 2
Enables or disables the delay compensation function for wireless audio input
OFF : Disables the function
ON : Enables the function (the audio in all EE output is delayed by about 8 ms)
TX
TX
TX
TX
*
*
*
*
*1, *2
*1, *2
*1, *2
*1, *2
AUDIO PEAK
INPUT LEVEL
ATT LEVEL
-
PEAK
MIC/LINE
-
Displays the name of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH
SELECT
Displays whether the AF level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by
WRR CH SELECT is over the peak
Displays whether the input level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by
WRR CH SELECT is set to MIC or LINE
Sets the ATT level of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH
SELECT (the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device)
TX
TX
*
*
*1, *2
*1, *2
LCF FREQ
SYSTEM DELAY
-
AUTO/0.0 ms to 8.0 ms
Sets the Low Cut Filter frequency of the transmitter whose signals are being received on the channel selected by WRR CH SELECT (the permissible setting range may vary depending on the transmitter device)
When WRR DELAY COMP is set to ON, sets the amount of audio delay for the channel selected by WRR CH
SELECT
AUTO : Automatically adjusts the amount of delay so that the delay in the audio received from the wireless receiver is zero
0.0 ms to 8.0 ms : Sets the amount of anticipated cases in several wireless systems are being used over a device such as an audio mixer
*1 : * indicates the channel number.
*2 : A setting for this item is required when the DWR-S01D Slot-In Digital Wireless Receiver is installed.
4-46
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
TIMECODE Display (Setting on TIME CODE)
M10 TIMECODE TOP
TC OUT : AUTO
DF/NDF : DF
EXT-LK DF/NDF : INT
EXT-LK UBIT : INT
LTC UBIT : FIX
VITC UBIT(SD) : FIX
WATCH AUTO ADJ : ON
UBIT GROUP ID : 000
VITC INS LINE 1 : 16H
VITC INS LINE 2 : 18H
NTSC AREA
M10 TIMECODE TOP
TC OUT : AUTO
EXT-LK UBIT : INT
LTC UBIT : FIX
VITC UBIT(SD) : FIX
WATCH AUTO ADJ : ON
UBIT GROUP ID : 000
VITC INS LINE 1 : 19H
VITC INS LINE 2 : 21H
PAL AREA
Item Setting Function
TC OUT
DF/NDF *
EXT-LK DF/NDF
EXT-LK UBIT
LTC UBIT
*
AUTO/GENE
DF/NDF
INT/EXT
INT/EXT
FIX/TIME
Sets the time-code signal output
AUTO : Outputs the time-code generator during recording and outputs the time-code reader during playback
GENE : Outputs the time-code generator during recording and playback
Sets DF/NDF
DF : Drop frame mode
NDF : Non drop frame mode
Selects either internal setting or external setting for
DF/NDF
INT : Internal
EXT : External
Sets whether the LTC UBIT setup value locks to INT or EXT source when the time-code is locked to an external source
INT : Internal lock
EXT : External lock
Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of LTC
FIX : Records the data that is set by user
TIME : Records the present time
VITC UBIT(SD)
WATCH AUTO ADJ
FIX/TIME
OFF/ON
Sets the data to be recorded in U-BIT of VITC
FIX : Records the data that is set by the user
TIME : Records the present time
Turns ON/OFF the function to match the built-in watch with the actual time data contained in the U-BIT of external time code data
UBIT GROUP ID
VITC INS LINE 1
000/101
12H to 19H (NTSC AREA)
9H to 22H (PAL AREA)
Selects the UBIT GROUP ID
Selects the line into which VITC is to be inserted
VITC INS LINE 2 12H to 19H (NTSC AREA)
9H to 22H (PAL AREA)
* : Displayed only when COUNTRY is set to “NTSC(J)AREA” or “NTSC AREA”.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-47
ESSENCE MARK Display (Setting on essence mark)
M11 ESSENCE MARK TOP
RET SHOT MARK 1 : ON
RET SHOT MARK 2 : ON
INDEX PIC POS : 0SEC
FIND MODE : R.ST
Item
RET SHOT MARK 1
RET SHOT MARK 2
INDEX PIC POS
FIND MODE
Setting
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
0 SEC to 10 SEC
R.ST/CLIP
Function
Turns ON/OFF the function that record shot mark 1 by using RET button
Turns ON/OFF the function that record shot mark 2 by using RET button
Sets the function that display thumbnail image when recording time
Selects an operation mode when the NEXT/PREV button is pressed
R.ST : Moves to the essence mark of the next or previous REC START
CLIP : Moves to the top of the next clip when the
NEXT button is pressed, and moves to the top of the current clip when the PREV button is pressed
(Moves to the top of the previous clip when the
PREV button is pressed at the top of the clip)
4-48
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
CAM CONFIG 1 Display (Setting-1 on camcorder)
M12 CAM CONFIG 1 TOP
REC TALLY BLINK : ON
REC START BEEP : OFF
SUB LCD MODE SEL: TIMER
SUB LCD TIMER : 1H
HDSDI REMOTE I/F: OFF
PROAV DISPLAY : DSABL
MIXED RECORDING : DSABL
SINGLE CLIP MODE: OFF
PB POSITION : KEEP
Item Setting Function
REC TALLY BLINK
REC START BEEP OFF/ON
SUB LCD MODEL SEL TIMER/OFF/CONT
SUB LCD TIMER
HDSDI REMOTE I/F
PROAV DISPLAY
MIXED RECORDING
SINGLE CLIP MODE
OFF/ON
1H/3H/8H
OFF/CHARA/G-TLY/
R-TLY
DSABL/ENABL
DSABL/ENABL
OFF/ON
Turns ON/OFF the tally blinking at the event of BATTERY BEFORE END/DISC
BEFORE END
Turns ON/OFF the beep sound at REC START/STOP
Sets the time counter display on the LCD after the power supply is turned off
TIMER : Display is terminated after the elapse of time which is specified in the item SUB LCD TIMER below
OFF : No displayed
CONT : Displayed
Specifies the time to terminate the display of time counter after the power-off, when TIMER was set in the above SUB LCD MODEL SEL (H : hour)
Selects whether to use the function that enables recording control from this unit of an external device connected to the SDI OUT 1/2 connectors (HDSDI output) of this unit.
*1
Also selects the indication that shows whether the external device is recording
OFF : Do not use the remote recording control function
CHARA : Use the function, and indicate by the controlling external device indicator in the viewfinder
G-TLY : Use the function, and indicate by the TALLY indicator in the viewfinder
R-TLY : Use the function, and indicate by the REC (recording, red tally) indicator in the viewfinder
Specifies whether to display the PROAV folder when this unit is accessed by a
FAM/FTP connection
DSABL : Do not display
ENABL : Display
Turns ON/OFF the function that enables recording and saving of the clips having the different recording formats to the same disc only when they belong to the same frame frequency group *2
Selects the clip for the playback operation
ON : Selects only the currently selected clip for the playback operation
OFF : Selects all clips stored on the disc for the playback operation
PB POSITION KEEP/TOP Specifies the playback start position of the clip or sub clip when switching between the clip playback screen and the clip list playback screen
KEEP : Resumes playback at the previous stop position
TOP : Starts playback from the top clip or from the top frame of the top sub clip
*1 : SDI OUT 1 SELECT or SDI OUT 2 SELECT in the OUTPUT 1 page of the OPERATION menu must be set to HDSDI.
*2 : The details of the frame frequency groups are shown below.
Frame frequency group System frequency
59.94 Hz
50 Hz
23.98 Hz
59.94P, 59.94i, 29.97P
50P, 50i, 25P
23.98P
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-49
CAM CONFIG 2 Display (Setting-2 on camcorder)
M13 CAM CONFIG 2 TOP
TEST SAW SELECT : SAW
COLOR BAR SELECT: ARIB
USER & ALL ONLY : OFF
RM COMMON MEMORY: OFF
RM REC START : RM
SHT DISP MODE : SEC
AF MARKER SOURCE: ASPEC
RM F NO DISPLAY : CTRL
FAN CONTROL : AUTO
FOCUS MAG SW : MTRY
Item Setting Function
TEST SAW SELECT
COLOR BAR SELECT
USER & ALL ONLY OFF/ON
RM COMMON MEMORY OFF/ON
RM REC START
SHT DISP MODE
AF MARKER SOURCE *1
REC/SAW
ARIB/100%/75%/SMPTE
RM/CAM/PARA
SEC/DEG
SAFE/ASPEC/USER
Selects the test signal
Selects the color bar type
Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN value also change accordingly at the same time.
Show only USER menu in the top menu
Selects whether or not to share settings for when a remote control unit is connected and when the unit is used alone
When an remote control unit is connected, selects which recording start/stop buttons are enabled
RM : Remote control unit
CAM : Camcorder
PARA : Both
Selects shutter speed display (second or degree)
When the FUJINON PF lens (HA22 x7.4BRD, HA13x4.5BRD) is connected, selects which existing marker is enabled to display the AF detection window
ASPEC : Use ASPECT MARKER as the substitute
SAFE : Use SAFETY ZONE as the substitute
USER : Use USER BOX as the substitute (It is not displayed in the LCD/
VBS output)
RM F NO DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL *2
CTRL/RET
AUTO/R.MIN/MIN
Selects the method used to display IRIS F values on the MSU-900 or another remote control unit
CTRL : Display on the basis of control value from the camera
(normal display method)
RET: Display on the basis of position information from the lens
(same method as when AUTO IRIS is enabled)
Selects the control method of the cooling fan
AUTO : The cooling fan rotation is automatically controlled
R.MIN : The cooling fan runs at a low speed only during recording
(The fan stops rotating if the temperature inside the unit does not rise due to the low temperature environment)
MIN : The cooling fan runs at a low speed (The fan stops rotating if the temperature inside the unit does not rise due to the low temperature environment) n
Regardless of the setting of this item, the cooling fan starts running at a high speed if the internal temperature of the unit rises close to the point where an alarm is issued.
FOCUS MAG SW MTRY/ALT Selects the operation when the FOCUS MAG function is assigned to the
ASSIGN switch
MTRY : Turns ON only as long as it is pressed
ALT : Toggles between ON and OFF each time it is pressed
(Turns OFF automatically after 5 seconds have passed since ON)
*1 : Displayed only when AF DISPLAY is set to ON on SERVICE MENU.
*2 : The setting of this item is retained even after the power is turned off.
4-50
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
CAM CONFIG 3 Display (Setting-3 on camcorder)
M14 CAM CONFIG 3 TOP
ALAC : AUTO
Item
ALAC
Setting
OFF/AUTO
Function
Sets the operation of the lens aberration correction function
OFF : Turns OFF the function forcibly even when the lens that supports the aberration correction function is mounted
AUTO : Turns ON the function when the lens that supports the aberration correction function is mounted
PRESET WHT Display (WHITE BAL switch: The function to adjust the white balance gain that is assigned to PRST)
M15 PRESET WHT TOP
COLOR TEMP <P>: 3200
C TEMP BAL <P>: 0
R GAIN <P>: 0
B GAIN <P>: 0
AWB ENABLE <P>: OFF
Item
COLOR TEMP <P>
C TEMP BAL <P>
Setting
Displays the color temperature
(Guideline)
( _99 to 99)
R GAIN <P>
B GAIN <P>
AWB ENABLE <P>
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
OFF/ON
Function
Sets the white balance preset
Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time.
Uses this item for fine adjustment when the optimum color cannot be obtained by the above COLOR TEMP
Reference : The R GAIN and B GAIN values also change accordingly at the same time.
Uses this menu item to set the color temperature of a
WHITE preset value, by adjusting R GAIN
Uses this menu item to set the color temperature of a
WHITE preset value, by adjusting B GAIN
Turns ON/OFF the function that sets the white balance adjustment value as the preset value when the white balance automatic adjustment is executed with the WHITE
BAL switch being set in PRST
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-51
DCC ADJUST Display (Setting the DCC function)
M16 DCC ADJUST TOP
DCC FUNCTION SEL: DCC
DCC D RANGE : 600%
DCC POINT : 0
DCC GAIN : 0
DCC DELAY TIME : 0
DCC PEAK FILTER : 0
Item
DCC FUNCTION SEL
DCC D RANGE
DCC POINT
DCC GAIN
DCC DELAY TIME
DCC PEAK FILTER
Setting
DCC/FIX
400/450/500/550/600 (%)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
(0 to 15)
Function
Selects the DCC function modes when the DCC switch is ON
DCC : Automatically makes adjustments according to the knee point and the luminance of the object
FIX : Executes knee correction by fixing the knee point at 600%
Sets the dynamic range when the DCC switch is set to ON
Sets the minimum knee point when the DCC switch is set to ON
Adjusts the gain to DCC detected value when the DCC switch is set to ON
Sets the response speed of DCC (Increasing the data slows down the response speed)
Adjust the response sensitivity to the peak of the DCC detected value
4-52
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
AUTO IRIS 2 Display (Setting-2 AUTO IRIS)
M17 AUTO IRIS 2 TOP
IRIS WINDOW : 1
IRIS WINDOW IND.: OFF
IRIS LEVEL : 0
IRIS APL RATIO : 0
IRIS VAR WIDTH : 240
IRIS VAR HEIGHT : 135
IRIS VAR H POS : 0
IRIS VAR V POS : 0
IRIS SPEED : 0
CLIP HIGH LIGHT : OFF
Item
IRIS WINDOW
IRIS WINDOW IND.
IRIS LEVEL
IRIS APL RATIO
IRIS VAR WIDTH
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
IRIS VAR H POS
IRIS VAR V POS
IRIS SPEED
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
(
Setting
1/2/3/4/5/6/VAR
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
20 to 479
20 to 269
_460 to 459
_250 to 249
_99 to 99)
OFF/ON
*2
*2
Function
Selects the IRIS WINDOW (detection range)
*1
When VAR is selected, the iris window can be set by the IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT/H POS/V POS as described below
Turns ON/OFF the function that displays a frame marker for the auto iris detection window
Sets the auto iris convergence level
Adjusts the mix ratio of the auto iris detection peak value and average value
Sets width of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW
Sets height of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS WINDOW
Sets the center in the horizontal direction of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS
WINDOW
Sets the center in the vertical direction of the iris window when VAR is selected in the above IRIS
WINDOW
Sets the AUTO IRIS response speed
Turns ON/OFF the function that limits the AUTO IRIS detection level to 100% when the video signal of higher than 100% is input
3 4 5
*1 : The IRIS WINDOW is set as shown below.
Setting 1 2
VF screen
Shaded ( ) area : IRIS WINDOW frame
*2 : Range of this setting is different depending upon the above IRIS VAR WIDTH/HEIGHT setting.
6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-53
GENLOCK Display (Setting on GENLOCK input connector)
M18 GENLOCK TOP
GENLOCK : ON
GL HD H PHASE : 0
GL SD H PHASE : 0
REFERENCE :INTERNAL
Item Setting Function
GENLOCK OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that synchronizes the internal reference signal with the video signal that is connected to the GENLOCK connector
GENLOCK phase adjustment (HD) GL HD H PHASE
GL SD H PHASE
REFERENCE
*
( _99 to 99)
(
_99 to 99)
Display only
GENLOCK phase adjustment (SD)
Displays the type of genlocked reference signal
* : This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23.9P.
ND COMP Display (ND OFFSET compensation)
M19 ND COMP TOP
ND OFFSET ADJUST: OFF
CLEAR ND OFFSET : EXEC
Item
ND OFFSET ADJUST
CLEAR ND OFFSET
Setting
OFF/ON
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Function
Turns ON/OFF the ND OFFSET adjustment mode
Returns the ND OFFSET value to the production adjustment value
4-54
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
AUTO SHADING Display (Automatic SHADING adjustment)
M20 AUTO SHADING TOP
AUTO BLK SHADING: EXEC
RESET BLK SHD : EXEC
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB
Item
AUTO BLK SHADING
RESET BLK SHD
TEST OUT SELECT
Setting
_
_
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
MASTER GAIN(TMP) _6/_3/0/3/6/9/12/18/
24/30/36/42 dB
APR Display (Detect compensation function)
M21 APR TOP
APR : EXEC
APR(SLS) : EXEC
APR PRESET : EXEC
Function
Executes the auto black shading function
Clears black shading compensation values
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST
OUT and the VBS/SDI OUT connector (Invalid when the BARS signal is selected)
(The Y-signal becomes the VBS signal when VBS is selected in the SD REAR BNC OUT of the OUTPUT
SEL display (of the OPERATION menu) and SD is selected in the TEST OUT SELECT). The output signal returns to the Y-signal without fail at power-on
Temporarily sets the master gain value
Item Setting Function
APR
APR (SLS)
*
_
_
Executes the defect compensation function
Suppresses white flecks in SLS (Slow Speed Shutter) mode by executing the automatic pixel noise reduction function n
The execution time for this function is about 30 minutes.
More time may be required when temperatures inside the unit are low.
APR PRESET _ Deletes white flecks data that was added by execution of the APR and automatic black balance adjustment functions
* : This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 720, SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 59.9P, and SCAN MODE is set to 23.9P.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-55
NETWORK Display (Setting on NETWORK)
M22 NETWORK TOP
DHCP : DISABLE
IP ADRESS : 1192 168 1 10
SUBNET MASK : 2255 255 255 0
DEF.GATEWAY : 0 0 0 0
LINK SPEED : AUTO
DUPLEX : AUTO
DNS1 : 0 0 0 0
DNS2 : 0 0 0 0
UPnP : DISABLE
NET CFG RESET: EXEC
Item
DHCP
IP ADDRESS
*
SUBNET MASK *
DEF.GATEWAY
*
LINK SPEED *
DUPLEX
DNS1
DNS2
*
*
*
*
Setting
ENABL/DISABLE
192 168 1 10
255 255 255 0
0 0 0 0
AUTO/10Mbps/100Mbps
AUTO/FULL/HALF
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0
UPnP * DISABLE/ENABLE
NET CFG RESET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
* : The unit must be restarted to enable changes to this setting.
Function
Selects whether to enable automatic acquisition of the
IP address from a DHCP server
Sets the IP address
Sets the subnet mask
Sets the default gateway
Sets the communications speed
Sets the duplex mode
AUTO : Automatically sets full duplex or half duplex
FULL : Full duplex communication
HALF : Half duplex communication
Sets the DNS address 1 (Required in order to select the connecting device from the host name using the
FTP client function)
Sets the DNS address 2 (Required in order to select the connecting device from the host name using the
FTP client function)
Enables or disables the Universal Plug & Play function
Resets all of the setup items on the NETWORK page
4-56
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
UP CONVERTER Display (Setting on Upconverter)
M23 UP CONVERTER TOP
UP CON PROCESS : ADPT
UC DETAIL LEVEL : 0
UC CRISPENING : 0
UC DETAIL LIMIT : 0
UC LV DEPEND LVL: 0
UC DTL FREQUENCY: 5.0M
UC DTL H/V RATIO: 0
Item
UP CON PROCESS
Setting
FIELD/ADPT
UC DETAIL LEVEL
UC CRISPENING
UC DETAIL LIMIT
UC LV DEPEND LVL
UC DTL FREQUENCY
(
_99 to 99)
( _8 to 7)
( _99 to 99)
( _8 to 7)
3.2M/4.5M/5.0M/4.0M
UC DTL H/V RATIO ( _3 to 4)
Function
Selects the conversion source picture when SD is upconverted to HD
FIELD : Use the field picture
ADPT : Optimize the ratio of conversion from the frame or field picture
Adjusts the sharpness of edge enhancement by the upconverter
Sets the amplitude width at which the upconverter does not emphasize low-amplitude signals
Sets the maximum level of edge enhancement by the upconverter
Sets the luminance of edge enhancement by the upconverter
Sets the center frequency and frequency properties of edge enhancement by the upconverter
3.2M : 3.2
± 1.1 MHz
4.5M : 4.5
± 1.4 MHz
5.0M : 5.0
± 0.7 MHz
4.0M : 4.0
± 2.0 MHz
Sets the horizontal/vertical ratio of edge enhancement by the upconverter
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-57
SHUTTER SELECT Display (Setting the shutter with reference to the angle)
M24 SHUTTER SELECT TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : SECOND
Item
SHUTTER SELECT
Setting
SECOND/DEGREE
Function
Selecting DEGREE enables to select the shutter with reference to the angle
When DEGREE is selected in SHUTTER SELECT
M24 SHUTTER SELECT TOP
SHUTTER SELECT : DEGREE
ADD: ---.-
DEL:
DEGREE SECOND
*1: 180.0 1/48.00
2: 172.8 1/50.05
3: 144.0 1/60.07
4: 45.0 1/192.2
5: 22.5 1/383.0
6: 11.2 1/760.0
When OFF is selected in SLOW & QUICK of the REC FUNCTION display
(SYSTEM FREQUENCY : 23.9P, 25P, 29.9P )
Item
ADD
DEL
Setting
4.3 to 360
1 to 6
Function
Registers the angle setting (If all settings from 1 to 6 are already registered, some of them need to be deleted before registration)
Deletes the registered angle setting
When OFF is selected in SLOW & QUICK of the REC FUNCTION display
(SYSTEM FREQUENCY : 50i, 59.9i, 50P, 59.9P)
Item
ADD
DEL
Setting
4.5 to 360
1 to 6
Function
Registers the angle setting (If all settings from 1 to 6 are already registered, some of them need to be deleted before registration)
Deletes the registered angle setting
When ON is selected in SLOW & QUICK of the REC FUNCTION display
(SYSTEM FREQUENCY : 23.9P, 25P, 29.9P)
Item Setting Function
ADD
*
(1080/23.9P)
1F: 4.3 to 22.5
2 to 3F: 4.3 to 45.0
4 to 6F: 4.3 to 90.0
7 to 12F: 4.3 to 180.0
13 to 48F: 4.3 to 360.0
(1080/25P)
1F: 4.3 to 22.5
2 to 3F: 4.3 to 45.0
4 to 6F: 4.3 to 90.0
7 to 12F: 4.3 to 180.0
13 to 50F: 4.3 to 360.0
(1080/29.9P)
1F: 4.3 to 22.5
2 to 3F: 4.3 to 45.0
4 to 7F: 4.3 to 90.0
8 to 15F: 4.3 to 180.0
16 to 60F: 4.3 to 360.0
Registers the angle setting (If all settings from 1 to 6 are already registered, some of them need to be deleted before registration)
DEL 1 to 6 Deletes the registered angle setting
* : The effective ranges of the angle setting are different depending on the settings of SYSTEM LINE/SYSTEM FREQUENCY and SLOW & QUICK FRAME RATE.
4-58
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-7. FILE Menu
For details of the file structure and the method to save the files, refer to “Section 5. File System.” n
When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is the relative value. The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
USER FILE Display (Operating the USER files)
F01 USER FILE TOP
USER FILE LOAD : EXEC
USER FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
USER PRESET : EXEC
Item
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
F.ID
USER PRESET
Setting Function
Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display
Reads the USER file from a Memory Stick
(For the description of the file selection display, see below to the following descriptions)
Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display
Saves the USER file to a Memory Stick
(For the description of the file selection display, see below to the following descriptions)
16 characters (alphanumeric characters, Sets the file ID (When the USER FILE SAVE is symbols and spaces) executed, this ID is saved)
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Returns all the items of the USER menu to the standard setup
File selection display
P00 USER LOAD ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/000/00
002. 00/000/00
003. 00/000/00
004. 00/000/00
005.NO FILE
P00 USER SAVE ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/000/00
002. 00/000/00
003. 00/000/00
004. 00/000/00
005.NEW FILE
USER FILE LOAD USER FILE SAVE
Item Setting Function
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE
001 to 005
Display only The display appears when inserting a Memory Stick or during saving data in a Memory Stick or during reading data from a Memory Stick
ALL/F.ID/DATE/MODEL Switches the attributes when displaying the following file
ALL : File ID and date are displayed
( 00/JAN/00)
F. ID : File ID is displayed
( )
DATE : Date and time of saving the file are displayed
(00/00/00 00 : 00 : 00)
MODEL: Model name and format are displayed
(PDW-F800 59.94i )
Press the MENU knob When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE is displayed to execute this menu item Select the target read file from which data is read or select the target storage file to which the data is going to be stored
When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-59
USER FILE 2 Display (Operating the USER file)
F02 USER FILE 2 TOP
STORE USR PRESET: EXEC
CLEAR USR PRESET: EXEC
CUSTOMIZE RESET : EXEC
LOAD CUSTOM DATA: OFF
LOAD OUT OF USER: OFF
BEFORE FILE PAGE: OFF
USER LOAD WHITE : OFF
Item
STORE USR PRESET
CLEAR USR PRESET
CUSTOMIZE RESET
LOAD CUSTOM DATA
LOAD OUT OF USER
BEFORE FILE PAGE
USER LOAD WHITE
Setting
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Saves the data that is set by the USER menu, in the
PRESET layer and uses it as the standard setup
Returns the USER menu setup to the default setting when shipped from the factory
Returns the items that are edited by the
MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, to the original setting
Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the data from
Memory Stick that are set on the MENU CUSTOMIZE menu during execution of USER FILE LOAD
Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the data from
Memory Stick that are not contained in the present
USER menu during execution of USER FILE LOAD
Turns ON/OFF the function not to save the
USER FILE page and the subsequent pages of the
USER menu, in Memory Stick during execution of
USER FILE SAVE
ON : Not to save
Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the white balance data from Memory Stick that are saved in
USER FILE during execution of USER FILE LOAD
4-60
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
ALL FILE Display (Operating the ALL file)
F03 ALL FILE TOP
ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC
ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
ALL PRESET : EXEC
STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC
CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC
3SEC CLR PRESET : OFF
NETWORK DATA : OFF
Item
ALL FILE LOAD
ALL FILE SAVE
F.ID
ALL PRESET
STORE ALL PRESET
CLEAR ALL PRESET
3SEC CLR PRESET
NETWORK DATA
Setting
Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display
Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display
16 characters
(alphanumeric numbers, symbols and space)
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
Function
Reads the ALL file from a Memory Stick
(For the description of the file selection display, see below)
Saves the ALL file in a Memory Stick
(For the description of the file selection display, see below)
Sets the file ID
(When ALL FILE SAVE is execute, this name is saved)
Returns all the data of all menu items to the standard settings
Saves all the data that are set by all of the menu items, in the PRESET layer and uses them as the standard setups
Returns the settings of all menu items to the default setting when shipped from the factory
Turns ON/OFF the function that returns the data in the
PRESET layer to its factory-set value when the MENU
CANCEL/PRST/ESCAPE switch is pressed for 3 seconds (It returns to OFF at power-on even when having been turned ON)
Selects whether or not to read in the network-related data
File selection display
P00 ALL LOAD ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/000/00
002. 00/000/00
003. 00/000/00
004. 00/000/00
005.NO FILE
P00 ALL SAVE ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/000/00
002. 00/000/00
003. 00/000/00
004. 00/000/00
005.NEW FILE
ALL FILE LOAD ALL FILE SAVE
Descriptions of the respective file selection displays are the same as the file selection display of the USER
FILE display.
For details, refer to the corresponding item of the USER FILE display.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-61
SCENE FILE Display (Operating the SCENE file)
F04 SCENE FILE TOP
1 :STANDARD
2 :STANDARD
3 :STANDARD
4 :STANDARD
5 :STANDARD
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL : EXEC
SCENE STORE : EXEC
F.ID :STANDARD
Item
1 to 5
STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID
Setting Function
STANDARD
_
Selects the file when reading the SCENE file from the unit
Selects whether to return the SCENE file setup to the standard setting or not to return to
When pressing the MENU knob during the “ ” display, the standard setting is canceled and returns to the original setting
Read the SCENE file from a Memory Stick
(For the description of the file selection display, see below)
Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display
Press the MENU knob to move to the file selection display
Save the SCENE file to the main unit or Memory Stick
(For the description of the file selection display, see below)
16 characters Sets the file ID
(alphanumeric characters, (When the SCENE file is stored, the file ID is saved) symbols and space)
File selection display (When calling a file from the inside of the unit/when saving a file to the inside of the unit)
P01 SCENE RECALL ESC
RECALL OK? YES NO
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001.SCENE1:
002.SCENE2:
003.NO FILE
004.SCENE4:
005.SCENE5:
.5FILE LOAD MEM1-5
SCENE RECALL
Item
DISPLAY MODE
Setting
ALL/F.ID/DATE/MODEL
MEM (1) to (5) Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Function
Switches the attributes when displaying a file stored in a
Memory Stick
For a file stored in the main unit, the file ID is displayed when ALL/F.ID/DATE is selected. When MODEL is selected, the format when the file was saved is displayed
Select the target read file from which data is read or select the target storage file to which the data is going to be stored
When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE is displayed
When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE
4-62
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
File selection display (When reading a file from a Memory Stick/when saving a file to a
Memory Stick)
P00 SCENE RECALL ESC
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1):
MEM(2):
MEM(3):
MEM(4):
MEM(5):NO FILE
P00 SCENE STORE ESC
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1):
MEM(2):
MEM(3):
MEM(4):
MEM(5):NEW FILE
P01 SCENE RECALL ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/000/00
002. 00/000/00
003. 00/000/00
004. 00/000/00
005.NO FILE
***.5FILE LOAD MEM 1-5
SCENE RECALL
Item Setting
MEMORY STICK ACCESS Display only
DISPLAY MODE
001 to 005
5FILE LOAD
5FILE SAVE
ALL/F.ID/DATE/MODEL
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
P01 SCENE STORE ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/000/00
002. 00/000/00
003. 00/000/00
004. 00/000/00
005.NEW FILE
***.5FILE SAVE MEM 1-5
SCENE STORE
Function
The display appears when inserting a Memory Stick or during saving data in a Memory Stick or during reading data from a Memory Stick
Switches the attributes when displaying the following file
ALL : File ID and date are displayed
( 00/JAN/00)
F. ID : File ID is displayed
( )
DATE : Date and time of saving the file are displayed
(00/00/00 00 : 00 : 00)
MODEL: Model name and format are displayed
(PDW-F800 59.94i)
When the file does not exist, the message NO FILE is displayed
Select the target read file from which data is read or select the target storage file to which the data is going to be stored
When saving the data in a new file, select NEW FILE
Reads the 5 files that are being displayed on screen, into MEM1-5 inside the main unit
Saves the contents of MEM1-5 of the main unit that are being displayed on screen, into 5 files
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-63
REFERENCE Display (Operating the REFERENCE file)
F05 REFERENCE TOP
REFERENCE STORE : EXEC
REFERENCE CLEAR : EXEC
REFERENCE LOAD : EXEC
REFERENCE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF
Item
REFERENCE STORE
REFERENCE CLEAR
REFERENCE LOAD
REFERENCE SAVE
F.ID
SCENE WHITE DATA
Setting Function
Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item
Saves the REFERENCE file in the main unit
Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item
Returns the setting of the REFERENCE file to the standard setting
Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item
Reads the REFERENCE file from a Memory Stick
Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item
Saves the REFERENCE file in a Memory Stick
16 characters
(alphanumeric numbers, symbols and space)
OFF/ON
Sets the file ID
(When REFERENCE STORE of REFERENCE
SAVE is executed, this ID is saved)
Turns ON/OFF the function to read out the white balance data that are saved in SCENE file during execution of SCENE FILE RECALL
4-64
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
USER GAMMA Display (Operating the USER GAMMA file)
F06 USER GAMMA TOP
USER GAMMA LOAD : EXEC
USER GAMMA RESET: EXEC
F.ID :
Item
USER GAMMA LOAD
USER GAMMA RESET
F.ID
Setting
Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob and select YES for the confirmation message to execute this menu item
Display only
Function
Loads the GAMMA TABLE data (USER
GAMMA file) created by the user from the
Memory Stick into the internal memory
Clears the USER GAMMA file on the internal memory
Displays the USER GAMMA file name on the internal memory
When a USER GAMMA file exists in the inserted Memory Stick
F06 USER GAMMA TOP
USER GAMMA LOAD : EXEC
USER GAMMA RESET: EXEC
F.ID:
F.ID:
DATE: SEP/19/05
USER GAMMA file information in the Memory Stick
Item
F.ID
DATE
Setting
Display only
Display only
Function
Displays the USER GAMMA file name in the
Memory Stick
Displays the date and time when the USER
GAMMA file in the Memory Stick is created
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-65
LENS FILE 1 Display (Setting-1 the LENS file)
F07 LENS FILE 1 TOP
LENS FILE RECALL: EXEC
LENS FILE STORE : EXEC
F.ID :
SOURCE : MEMORY 1
LENS NO OFFSET : EXEC
LENS AUTO RECALL: S.No
S.No : (unknown)
L.ID : (unknown)
L.MF : (unknown)
Item Setting Function
LENS FILE RECALL Press the MENU knob to Calls the LENS file from the main unit, or read the LENS file from a move to the file selection display Memory Stick
(For the description of the file selection display, see below)
LENS FILE STORE
F.ID
SOURCE
Press the MENU knob to Save the LENS file to the main unit or Memory Stick move to the file selection display (For the description of the file selection display, see below)
16 characters (alphanumeric Sets the file ID characters, symbols and spaces) (When the LENS FILE STORE is executed, the file ID is saved)
Display only Displays the memory number of the LENS file from which the data is read
LENS NO OFFSET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
LENS AUTO RECALL OFF/ON/S.No
S.No
*
Display only
Returns the LENS file setting to the standard setting
Turns ON/OFF the auto recall function when a serial lens is attached
Displays the serial number of the lens (when the serial lens is attached) when LENS AUTO RECALL is set to S.No
Displays the unique ID of the lens (when a serial lens is attached) L.ID
* Display only
L.MF
*
Display only Displays the manufacturer name of the lens (when a serial lens is attached)
* : When a lens other than a serial lens is attached, (Unknown) is displayed.
n
When the LENS FILE STORE is executed, the stored memory number is displayed. When the LENS NO OFFSET is executed, the message NO OFFSET is displayed.
File selection display (When calling a file from the inside of the unit/when saving a file to the inside of the unit)
LENS RECALL ESC
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1):
MEM(2):
MEM(3):
MEM(4):
MEM(5):NEW FILE
LENS STORE ESC
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
MEM(1):
MEM(2):
MEM(3):
MEM(4):
MEM(5):NEW FILE
LENS FILE RECALL LENS FILE STORE
File selection display (When reading a file from a Memory Stick/when saving a file to a Memory Stick)
P07 LENS RECALL ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/000/00
002. 00/000/00
003. 00/000/00
004. 00/000/00
005.NO FILE
***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32
LENS FILE RECALL
P07 LENS STORE ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/000/00
002. 00/000/00
003. 00/000/00
004. 00/000/00
005.NEW FILE
***.M.S.001-032 MEM1-32
LENS FILE STORE
Descriptions of the respective file selection displays are the same as the file selection display of the SCENE FILE display.
For details, refer to the corresponding item of the SCENE FILE display.
4-66
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
LENS FILE 2 Display (Setting-2 the LENS file)
F08 LENS FILE 2 TOP
LENS M VMOD : 0
LENS CENTER H : 0
LENS CENTER V : 0
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
LENS R FLARE : 0
LENS G FLARE : 0
LENS B FLARE : 0
LENS W-R OFST : 0
LENS W-B OFST : 0
Item
LENS M VMOD
LENS CENTER H
LENS CENTER V
TEST OUT SELECT
LENS R FLARE
LENS G FLARE
LENS B FLARE
LENS W-R OFST
LENS W-B OFST
Setting
( _99 to 99)
_480 to 479
_270 to 269
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
Function
Adjusts the lens file V SAW shading compensation
Sets the center marker position (Horizontal direction)
Sets the center marker position (Vertical direction)
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector
Adjusts the R flare compensation level
Adjusts the G flare compensation level
Adjusts the B flare compensation level
Adjusts the R white gain offset value
Adjusts the B white gain offset value n
In the LENS M VMOD, LENS CENTER H, LENS CENTER V, LENS R/G/B FLARE and LENS W-R/
W-B OFST, the lens extender position is displayed in the rightmost-end of the menu items.
Blank : Extender OFF
EX : Extender ON
0.8 : Shrinker ON
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-67
LENS FILE 3 Display (Setting-3 the LENS file)
F09 LENS FILE 3 TOP
SHADING CH SEL : R
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
LENS R H SAW : 0
LENS R H PARA : 0
LENS R V SAW : 0
LENS R V PARA : 0
Item
SHADING CH SEL
TEST OUT SELECT
LENS R H SAW
LENS R H PARA
LENS R V SAW
LENS R V PARA
Setting
Y/R/G/B/TEST
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
Function
Selects the channel of shading adjustment
Selects the video signal that is output from the TEST OUT connector
Adjusts the H SAW correction value
Adjusts the H PARA correction value
Adjusts the V SAW correction value
Adjusts the V PARA correction value n
In the LENS R/G/B V/H SAW and LENS R/G/B V/H PARA, the lens extender position is displayed in the rightmost-end of the menu items.
Blank : Extender OFF
EX : Extender ON
0.8 : Shrinker ON
MEMORY STICK Display (Function on Memory Stick)
F10 MEMORY STICK TOP
M.S.FORMAT : EXEC
M.S.IN > JUMP TO: OFF
Item
M. S. FORMAT
M. S. IN > JUMP TO
Setting
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
OFF/USER/ALL/SCENE/
LENS/REFER/USER1
Function
Implements formatting of a Memory Stick
(All of the data is erased)
Sets the function that opens the file setup page automatically as a Memory Stick is inserted when this menu is set to ON
(This function is disabled when the file-related page is opened already)
4-68
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-8. DIAGNOSIS Menu
HOURS METER Display (Confirming and resetting hours meter)
D01 HOURS METER TOP
OPERATION : 000000H
LASER : 000000H
OPERATION(rst): 000000H
SPINDLE (rst): 000000H
LOADING (rst): 000000H
SEEK (rst): 000000H
Item
ADJUST
HOUR
MIN
SEC
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
Item
OPERATION
LASER
OPERATION (rst)
SPINDLE (rst)
LOADING (rst)
SEEK (rst)
Setting
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Function
Displays the total operation time
Calculates and displays the total optical output parameter of the optical head
Displays the total operation time (Can be reset)
Displays the total time of SPINDLE rotation
(Can be reset)
Displays the total count of disc insertion
(Can be reset)
Displays the total seek time of the optical head
(Can be reset)
TIME/DATE Display (Confirming and setting date and hour)
D02 TIME/DATE TOP
ADJUST : EXEC
HOUR : 12
MIN : 55
SEC : 58
YEAR : 00
MONTH : 06
DAY : 24
Setting
Press the MENU knob
Then the TIME ADJUST display appears
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Function
Sets date and time (For more details, refer to
“Setting the Date/Time of Internal Clock” of Operation Manual)
Hour
Minute
Second
Year
Month
Day
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-69
ROM VERSION 1 Display (Displaying the ROM version)
D03 ROM VERSION 1 TOP
PACKAGE : x.xx
SY1 : x.xx
SY2K : x.xx
SY2U : x.xx
DRV : x.xx
AT : x.xx
FP : x.xx
Item Setting Function
PACKAGE Display only Displays the firmware package version
*
SY1
SY2K
Display only Displays the IC200 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the SY-355 board
*
Display only Displays the IC1300 version stored in the IC1405 and IC1406 on the SY-355 board *
SY2U
DRV
AT
FP
Display only Displays the IC1300 version stored in the IC1405 and IC1406 on the SY-355 board *
Display only Displays the IC600 version stored in the ROM (IC602) on the DR-606 board
*
Display only
Display only
Displays the IC209 version stored in the ROM (IC302, IC303) on the AT-177 board
Displays the ROM version of the IC921 on the FP-157 board
* : Can be upgraded with the firmware package file from MENU.
*
*
ROM VERSION 2 Display (Displaying the ROM version)
D04 ROM VERSION 2 TOP
LVIS : x.xx
TSYS : x.xx
TMBP : x.xx
FAM : x.xx
LABY : x.xx
BRDG : x.xx
PIER : x.xx
CAVA : x.xx
Item Setting Function
LVIS Display only Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC400 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board
*1
TSYS Display only Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC1000, IC1200, IC1400 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board *1
TMBP Display only Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC1000, IC1200, IC1400 version stored in the ROM (IC505,
IC506) on the SY-355 board
*1
FAM Display only Displays the SY-355 board’s IC600 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board *1 *2
LABY Display only Displays the ROM version of the IC1000 on the DCP-49A board
*1
BRDG Display only Displays the SY-355 board’s IC900 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board *1
PIER Display only Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC1900 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board
*1
CAVA Display only Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC200 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board *1
*1 : Can be upgraded with the firmware package file from MENU.
*2 : Displayed only when OPERATION MENU - POWER SAVE - i.LINK(FAM) is set to ENABL.
4-70
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
ROM VERSION 3 Display (Displaying the ROM version)
D05 ROM VERSION 3 TOP
DSP0 : x.xx
DSP2 : x.xx
PRXA : x.xx
Item Setting Function
DSP0 Display only Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC800 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board *
DSP2 Display only Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC801 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board
*
PRXA Display only Displays the DVP-45 board’s IC900 version stored in the ROM (IC505, IC506) on the
SY-355 board *
* : Can be upgraded with the firmware package file from MENU.
DEV STATUS Display (Checking the communication function of each device)
D06 DEV STATUS TOP
I/O EEPROM LSI
MS :OK CN :OK DCP1:OK
FP :OK DCP :OK DCP2:OK
CN :OK DR :OK DCP3:OK
DCP :OK DCP4:OK
VF :OK FRAM TG :OK
D/A AT :OK
DCP1:OK SCI
DCP2:OK FAN SY :OK
DCP3:OK MB :OK RM :--
Item
I/O
D/A
EEPROM
FRAM
FAN
LSI
SCI
_
_
_
_
_
Display
_
_
Function
I/O : Status display of MS/FP/CN/DCP/VF
MS-86:IC2/FP-157:IC701/CN-3005:IC1/
DCP-49A:IC1119/VF(IO in each VF)
OK/NG/ __ message is displayed
OK : Normal
NG : Abnormal
__ : The state is not defined
D/A : Status display of DCP1/DCP2/DCP3
DCP-49A:IC1524/DCP-49A:IC1518/DCP-49A:IC1525
EEPROM : Status display of CN/DCP/DR
CN-3005:IC2/DCP-49A:IC8/DR-617:IC20
FRAM : Status display of AT
AT-177 : IC308
FAN : Status display of MB
LSI : Status display of DCP1/DCP2/DCP3/DCP4/TG
DCP-49A:IC600/DCP-49A:IC800/DCP-49A:IC221/
DCP-49A:IC1000/TG-260:IC8
SCI : Status display of SY/RM
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-71
OPTION Display (Displaying the option feature)
D07 OPTION TOP
HD/SD-SDI INPUT
COMPOSITE INPUT
Item
HD/SD-SDI INPUT
COMPOSITE INPUT
Setting
Display only
Display only
Function
O appears when the optional CBK-HD01 HD/SD-SDI
Input Board is installed
O appears when the optional CBK-SC02 Analog
Composite Input Board is installed
4-72
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-9. SERVICE Menu
n
When the range of setting is surrounded by parenthesis ( ) in the setting column, the setup value is the relative value.
The range of setting in parenthesis ( ) can be different from what shown in the manual depending on the setting in the layer lower than this menu.
Display method 1
1.
Open the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3, step 1.)
2.
Set the S402-1/AT-177 board to the “ON” position.
SERVICE
7
8
5
6
1
2
3
4
O
N
S402
AT-177 board
3.
Close the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3, step 1.)
4.
Turn on the power and flip the MENU switch to ON.
5.
Enter SERVICE mode to display the SERVICE menu.
Indicate SERVICE mode
S <TOP MENU>
USER
USER CUSTOMIZE
ALL
OPERATION
PAINT
MAINTENANCE
FILE
DIAGNOSIS
SERVICE
The SERVICE menu can be selected
6.
The following contents are available in the SERVICE menu.
S00 CONTENTS TOP
01.MENU SET
02.SP FUNC
03.WHITE SHADING
04.BLACK SHADING
05.SHADING
06.VCO ADJUST
07.CCD ADJUST 1
08.CCD ADJUST 2
09.REGI ADJUST
10.FBC ADJUST
7.
Keep turning the MENU knob to display the next page
(11-20).
S00 CONTENTS TOP
11.LCD ADJUST
12.FLARE
13.GAMMA/DETAIL
14.MANUAL RPN
15.RPN MANAGE
16.VDR MAINTENANCE
17.FAN
18.MEASURE
19.FILTER CTEMP
20.BATTERY INFO
8.
Keep turning the MENU knob further to display the next page (21-25).
S00 CONTENTS TOP
16.VDR MAINTENANCE
17.FAN
18.MEASURE
19.FILTER CTEMP
20.BATTERY INFO
21.HOURS METER2
22.FUNCTION LIMIT
23.S/H DC
24.BOARD INFO
25.SERVICE FILE m
. After servicing is completed, make sure to set the
S402-1/AT-177 board to the “OFF” position, and exit from SERVICE mode.
. When parameters are changed while the SERVICE menu is displayed, run ALL PRESET from the RESET menu after exiting from SERVICE mode to activate the changed parameters.
Display method 2
. Select the DIAGNOSIS menu D00 CONTENTS page.
. While pressing the MENU knob and the ASSIGN1 switch simultaneously, set the MENU ON/OFF switch from OFF to ON. (However, if the switch S402-2/AT-
177 board is set to ON, or if the switch S400/AT-177 board is OFF, this method is disabled).
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-73
MENU SET
S01 MENU SET TOP
RE ROTATION REV : OFF
RE SPEED : 2
DIRECT VALUE : OFF
SERVICE RESET : EXEC
FACTORY PRESET : EXEC
Item
RE ROTATION REV
RE SPEED
DIRECT VALUE
Setting
OFF/ON
1/2/3
OFF/DEC/HEX
SERVICE RESET
FACTORY PRESET
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
SP FUNC
S02 SP FUNC TOP
GAIN DISP MODE : dB
KNEE 2ND POINT : ON
Function
Turns ON/OFF the function to invert the rotating direction of the
MENU knob
Sets the response speed of the MENU knob 1 (slow)
→ 3 (fast)
OFF: The set value is displayed after conversion (in the range of
-99 to 99) (It returns to OFF when the main power is turned on)
DEC : The set value is displayed after being converted into a decimal number (The variable range differs depending on the item)
HEX : The set value is displayed after being converted into a hexadecimal number (The variable range differs depending on the item)
Resets the data in the SERVICE hierarchy
Refer to “5-2. Data Structure” for details of the hierarchical structure
Returns all of the settings to the default setting when shipped from the factory (Excluding the black balance automatic adjustment value)
Item
GAIN DISP MODE
Setting
dB/ISO
KNEE 2ND POINT OFF/ON
4-74
Function
Turns ON/OFF the function that sets the GAIN value in the ISO indication
ON: ISO indication
OFF: Decibel (dB) indication n
Correspondence between the ISO and decibel (dB) indications is shown below. Values in parenthesis indicate the decibel (dB) indication
400(-6)/570(-3)/800(0)/1100(3)/1600(6)/2300(9)/3200(12)/6400(18)
13000(24)/26000(50)/51000(36)/100000(42)
The setting whether or not to enable the knee 2nd point when compressing a high luminance signal
ON : The knee 2nd point is enabled to allow operator to compress the high luminance part in wide range
OFF : The knee 2nd point is disabled and only the knee 1st point is enabled
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
WHITE SHADING
S03 WHITE SHADING TOP
WHT SHAD CH SEL : R
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
R WHT H SAW : 0
R WHT H PARA : 0
R WHT V SAW : 0
R WHT V PARA : 0
WHITE SAW/PARA : ON
Item
WHT SHAD CH SEL
TEST OUT SELECT
R WHT H SAW
(R/G/B)
R WHT H PARA
(R/G/B)
R WHT V SAW
(R/G/B)
R WHT V PARA
(R/G/B)
WHITE SAW/PARA
Setting
R/G/B/TEST
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
(-99 to 99)
(-99 to 99)
(-99 to 99)
(-99 to 99)
OFF/ON
Function
Selects the channel of shading correction
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
Adjusts the H SAW correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above WHT SHAD CH SEL
Adjusts the H PARA correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above WHT SHAD CH SEL
Adjusts the V SAW correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above WHT SHAD CH SEL
Adjusts the V PARA correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above WHT SHAD CH SEL
Turns ON/OFF all of the white shading menu items of R/G/B, H/V and
SAW/PARA corrections
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-75
BLACK SHADING
S04 BLACK SHADING TOP
BLK SHAD CH SEL : R
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
R BLK H SAW : 0
R BLK H PARA : 0
R BLK V SAW : 0
R BLK V PARA : 0
BLACK SAW/PARA : ON
MASTER BLACK : 0
MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB
Item
BLK SHAD CH SEL
TEST OUT SELECT
R BLK H SAW
(R/G/B)
R BLK H PARA
(R/G/B)
R BLK V SAW
(R/G/B)
Setting
R/G/B/TEST
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
(-99 to 99)
(-99 to 99)
(-99 to 99)
R BLK V PARA
(R/G/B)
BLACK SAW/PARA
(-99 to 99)
OFF/ON
MASTER BLACK (-99 to 99)
MASTER GAIN (TMP)
-6/-3/0/3/6/9/12/
18/24/30/36/42 dB
Function
Selects the channel of shading correction
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
Adjusts the H SAW correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above BLK SHAD CH SEL
Adjusts the H PARA correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above BLK SHAD CH SEL
Adjusts the V SAW correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above BLK SHAD CH SEL
Adjusts the V PARA correction
The R, G and B displays are switched in accordance with the channel selection implemented by the above BLK SHAD CH SEL
Turns ON/OFF all of the black shading menu items of R/G/B, H/V and
SAW/PARA corrections
Adjusts the master black level
(All of the R, G and B master black levels are adjusted)
Temporarily adjusts the master gain value
4-76
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
SHADING
S05 SHADING TOP
AUTO WHT SHADING: EXEC
RESET WHT SHD : EXEC
AUTO BLK SHADING: EXEC
RESET BLK SHD : EXEC
2D BLACK SHADING: OFF
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB
Item Setting
AUTO WHT SHADING Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
RESET WHT SHD
AUTO BLK SHADING
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
RESET BLK SHD
2D BLACK SHADING
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
OFF/ON
TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
MASTER GAIN (TMP)
-6/-3/0/3/6/9/12/
18/24/30/36/42 dB
VCO ADJUST
S06 VCO ADJUST TOP
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
CLK OUT SELECT : OFF
HDCK(NTSC AREA) : 0
HDCK(PAL AREA) : 0
SDCK : 0
Function
Starts to the auto white shading adjustment
Returns the white shading value to the default value when shipped from the factory (SAW/PARA)
Starts to the auto black shading adjustment
Returns the black shading value to the default value when shipped from the factory (SAW/PARA or 2D)
Turns ON/OFF the function that sets whether to apply 2D black shading
(area shading)
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
Temporarily adjusts the master gain value
Item
TEST OUT SELECT
CLK OUT SELECT
HDCK (NTSC AREA)
Setting
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
OFF/HDCK (N)/HDCK (P)/
SDCK
-99 to 99
HDCK (PAL AREA) -99 to 99
SDCK
-99 to 99
Function
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
Outputs the clock from the TEST OUT connector
Adjusts the transmitting frequency of HD
Adjusts the HDCK (N) output to be 37.0879 MHz
Adjusts the transmitting frequency of HD
Adjusts the HDCK (P) output to be 37.125 MHz
Adjusts the transmitting frequency of SD
Adjusts the SDCK output to be 27 MHz
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-77
CCD ADJUST 1
S07 CCD ADJUST 1 TOP
R CCD GAIN : 0
G CCD GAIN : 0
B CCD GAIN : 0
R TEST SAW GAIN : 0
G TEST SAW GAIN : 0
B TEST SAW GAIN : 0
TEST SAW : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Item
R CCD GAIN
G CCD GAIN
B CCD GAIN
R TEST SAW GAIN
G TEST SAW GAIN
B TEST SAW GAIN
TEST SAW
TEST OUT SELECT
Setting
-99 to 99
-99 to 99
-99 to 99
-99 to 99
-99 to 99
-99 to 99
OFF/ON
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Function
Adjusts the sensitivity of the R-channel
Adjusts the sensitivity of the G-channel
Adjusts the sensitivity of the B-channel
Adjusts the GAIN of the R-channel test saw
Adjusts the GAIN of the G-channel test saw
Adjusts the GAIN of the B-channel test saw
Turns ON/OFF the test saw function
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
CCD ADJUST 2
S08 CCD ADJUST 2 TOP
R VSUB : 14.0V
G VSUB : 14.0V
B VSUB : 14.0V
R VSUB OFST (P) : ±0.0V
G VSUB OFST (P) : ±0.0V
B VSUB OFST (P) : ±0.0V
CCD H DRIVER : 6.0V
AD CLOCK PHASE : ±0
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Item Setting Function
R VSUB
G VSUB
9.0 V to 18.0 V (0.1 V step) *1
9.0 V to 18.0 V (0.1 V step) *1
9.0 V to 18.0 V (0.1 V step)
*1
Sets the V. substrate voltage of the R-channel
Sets the V. substrate voltage of the G-channel
B VSUB
R VSUB OFST (P)
G VSUB OFST (P)
B VSUB OFST (P)
-5.0 V to +5.0 V (0.1 V step)
-5.0 V to +5.0 V (0.1 V step)
-5.0 V to +5.0 V (0.1 V step)
Sets the V. substrate voltage of the B-channel
Adjusts the offset for the V. substrate voltage of the R-channel during the progressive reading
*2
Adjusts the offset for the V. substrate voltage of the G-channel during the progressive reading *2
Adjusts the offset for the V. substrate voltage of the B-channel during the progressive reading
*2
CCD H DRIVER
AD CLOCK PHASE
5.2 V/5.4 V/5.6 V/5.8 V/6.0 V/6.2 V Sets the drive voltage of the CCD H DRIVE
-2/-1/± 0/+1/+2
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Sets the phase frequency of AD
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector TEST OUT SELECT
*1 : The default value varies depending on the set.
*2 : The setting that enters the Camcorder in the progressive reading
• When the SYSTEM LINE is 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is 29.9P, 25P or 23.9P at the same time, or when the slow shutter function is set to ON.
• When the SYSTEM LINE is 720 and the SYSTEM FREQUENCY is 59.9P, and at the same time SCAN MODE is 23.9P.
For example, the V. substrate voltage of the R-channel in 1080/29.9P becomes the sum of R VSUB setup value and the R VSUB OFST (P) setup value.
4-78
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
REGI ADJUST
S09 REGI ADJUST TOP
R CCD REGI : 0.000%
B CCD REGI : 0.000%
R DCP REGI : 0.000%
B DCP REGI : 0.000%
DCP REGI PULSE : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Item
R CCD REGI
B CCD REGI
R DCP REGI
B DCP REGI
DCP REGI PULSE
TEST OUT SELECT
Setting
-0.100 to 0.1 % (0.002 % step)
-0.100 to 0.1 % (0.002 % step)
-0.100 to 0.1 % (0.002 % step)
-0.100 to 0.1 % (0.002 % step)
OFF/ON
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Function
Adjusts the registry (H direction) of CCD
Adjusts the registry (H direction) of CCD
Adjusts the registry (H direction) of the DCP circuit
Adjusts the registry (H direction) of the DCP circuit
Turns ON/OFF the pulse for the adjustment of the registry
(H direction) of the DCP circuit
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
FBC ADJUST
S10 FBC ADJUST TOP
FBC ADJUST MODE : OFF
R FBC OFFSET : 0
G FBC OFFSET : 0
B FBC OFFSET : 0
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Item
FBC ADJUST MODE
R FBC OFFSET
G FBC OFFSET
B FBC OFFSET
TEST OUT SELECT
Setting
OFF/ON
( _99 to 99)
(
_99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Function
Periodically switches the high-speed feedback clamp and the normal feedback clamp (For adjusting R/G/B FBC OFFSET)
Adjusts the DC offset for the high-speed feedback clamp
Adjusts the DC offset for the high-speed feedback clamp
Adjusts the DC offset for the high-speed feedback clamp
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-79
LCD ADJUST
S11 LCD ADJUST TOP
LCD VCO ADJUST : EXEC
LCD COM DC : 0
LCD BLACK LIMIT : 0
LCD PS BRIGHT : 0
LCD BRIGHT : 0
LCD BRIGHT R : 0
LCD BRIGHT B : 0
LCD CONTRAST : 0
Item
LCD VCO ADJUST
LCD COM DC
LCD BLACK LIMIT
LCD PS BRIGHT
LCD BRIGHT
LCD BRIGHT R
LCD BRIGHT B
LCD CONTRAST
Setting
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
FLARE
S12 FLARE TOP
R FLARE : 0
G FLARE : 0
B FLARE : 0
FLARE : ON
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
Function
Adjusts the free run frequency of the color LCD VCO
Adjusts the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of the color LCD
Adjusts the limiter level on the black side of the color LCD
Adjusts the amplitude of the output signal of the color LCD PSIG
Adjusts the color LCD brightness displayed in normal position
Adjusts the black balance of the picture displayed in normal position
Adjusts the R output signal BRIGHT with reference to the G output signal
Adjusts the black balance of the picture displayed in reverse position
Adjusts the B output signal BRIGHT with reference to the G output signal
Adjusts the color LCD contrast displayed in normal position
Item
R FLARE
G FLARE
B FLARE
FLARE
TEST OUT SELECT
Setting
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
OFF/ON
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
Function
Adjusts the R flare compensation level
Adjusts the G flare compensation level
Adjusts the B flare compensation level
Turns ON/OFF the flare compensation circuit
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
4-80
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
GAMMA / DETAIL
S13 GAMMA/DETAIL TOP
R GAMMA : 0
G GAMMA : 0
B GAMMA : 0
DETAIL LEVEL : 0
Item
R GAMMA
G GAMMA
B GAMMA
DETAIL LEVEL
MANUAL RPN
S14 MANUAL RPN TOP
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
RPN CURSOR : OFF
SUPER(MENU) : OFF
RPN WIDTH : 1
CURSOR H POS : 960
CURSOR V POS : 540
CURSOR JUMP : CURR
RECORD RPN : EXEC
DELETE RPN : EXEC
Item
TEST OUT SELECT
RPN CURSOR
SUPER (MENU)
RPN WIDTH
CURSOR H POS
CURSOR V POS
CURSOR JUMP
RECORD RPN
DELETE RPN
Setting
( _99 to 99)
(
_99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
Setting
VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD
OFF/ON
OFF/ON
0/1/2/3/4
37 to 1966
34 to 1118
PREV/CURR/NEXT
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Function
Offsets PAINT/GAMMA/R
Offsets PAINT/GAMMA/G
Offsets PAINT/GAMMA/B
Offsets PAINT/DETAIL1/DETAIL LEVEL
Function
Selects the video signal of the TEST OUT connector
Controls ON/OFF of the RPN cursor
Turns ON/OFF the character information output (superimpose) of the
TEST OUT connector
Sets the RPN correction width
Sets position of the RPN cursor (horizontal)
Sets position of the RPN cursor (vertical)
Jumps the cursor to the position in which the RPN data is registered
PREV : Jumps to the RPN data preceding the current position
CURR : Current display
NEXT : Jumps to the RPN data after the current position
Registers the RPN data of the present cursor position
Deletes the RPN data of the present cursor position
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-81
PRN MANAGE
S15 RPN MANAGE TOP
CONC (APR)RESET : EXEC
CONC2(APR)RESET : EXEC
RPN ALL PRESET : EXEC
AUTO CONCEAL : EXEC
AUTO CONCEAL2 : EXEC
Item Setting
CONC (APR) RESET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
CONC2 (APR) RESET Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
RPN ALL PRESET
AUTO CONCEAL
AUTO CONCEAL2
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Function
Deletes the RPN data registered at ABB, APR, or AUTO CONCEAL
Deletes the RPN data registered at ABB, APR (SLS), or AUTO CONCEAL2
Returns all RPN data to the state of factory shipment
(Data registered manually are also deleted)
Executes the AUTO RPN correction
(The Black Level adjustment is not executed)
Executes the AUTO RPN correction (For SLS ON)
(The Black Level adjustment is not executed) n
The execution time for this function is about 30 minutes.
More time may be required when temperatures inside the unit are low.
VDR MAINTENANCE
S16 VDR MAINTENANCE TOP
AUDIO A/D ADJUST: EXEC
AUDIO D/A ADJUST: EXEC
AU SIDE VOL ADJ : EXEC
POWER A/D ADJUST: EXEC
DRIVE MAINTE : EXEC
SERVICE SUPPORT : EXEC
Item
AUDIO A/D ADJUST
AUDIO D/A ADJUST
AU SIDE VOL ADJ
Setting
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
POWER A/D ADJUST Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
DRIVE MAINTE Press the MENU knob to move to the DRIVE
MAINTE screen
SERVICE SUPPORT Press the MENU knob to move to the SERVICE
SUPPORT screen
4-82
Function
Adjustment of the AUDIO A/D Error Correction value
(Refer to “4-11. AUDIO A/D Error Correction” for details)
Adjustment of the AUDIO D/A Error Correction value
(Refer to “4-12. AUDIO D/A Error Correction” for details)
Adjustment of the AUDIO LEVEL Volume (inside panel)
Error Correction value
(Refer to “4-13. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Compensation” for details)
Adjustment of the Battery END Detecting Voltage
(Refer to “4-14. Adjusting Battery End Detection Voltage” for details)
For the description of DRIVE MAINTE screen, see below
Displaying the VDR system error log and setting clear
(Refer to “4-15. SERVICE SUPPORT Menu” for details)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
DRIVE MAINTE Screen
Menu
CHECK
Item
DEVICE
Sub item
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
DEW SENSOR
FAN MOTOR
ACCELERATION
SENSOR
LOADER
SLIDER
SPINDLE
MOTOR
OPTICAL
BLOCK
AUTO TEST
IN-LIM TEST
OUT-LIM TEST
AUTO TEST
FOCUS ACTUATOR
TRACKING
ACTUATOR
SA ACTUATOR
LASER
ND FILTER
ADJUST
LENS CLEANING
SERVO_1
SKEW
SERVO_2
TAN ADJUST
RAD ADJUST
OTHER ADJUST ACCELERATION
OFFSET
ERROR LOGGER
OTHERS VERSION
SERIAL NO
CLEAR MEDIA LOG
MEMORY
SUPPORT
UPLOAD TO
EEPROM
Description
Checks the temperature sensor on the drive block
Checks the dew sensor on the optical block assembly
Checks the fan motor connected to the drive block
Checks the acceleration sensor
Checks the loader performance
Checks the slider performance and the limit sensor
Moves the slider to the IN LIMIT position
Move the slider to the OUT LIMIT position
Checks the spindle motor performance
Checks the focus directions of the two shafts
Checks the tracking directions of the two shafts
Checks the SA actuator
Checks the laser
Checks the ND filter
Performs Pick-up lens cleaning
Servo 1 system (MTX BLOCK, PI/FE BLOCK, FE AGC) auto adjustment
Adjust the skew
Servo 2 system (SKEW OFFSET, TE/CE BLOCK, SV LOOP GAIN) auto adjustment
Adjusts the offset of the acceleration sensor
Records the error occurred in the drive
Displays the version of the drive block
Displays the serial number of the drive block
Clears the acquired media information
Uploads the data backed up in the DR-606 board back to the
EEPROM (IC4) on the SE-857 board
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-83
FAN
S17 FAN TOP
FAN VOLT FIX : OFF
FAN ROTATION DET: OK
Item
FAN VOLT FIX
Setting
OFF/ON
FAN ROTATION DET —/OK/NG
MEASURE
S18 MEASURE TOP
MEASUREMENT MODE: OFF
MASTER BLACK : 0
MASTER GAIN(TMP): 0dB
Function
Sets the fan mode
(Normally, set this to OFF and use the automatic control)
OFF: Temperature increase inside the unit is detected and the fan is automatically controlled
ON: The fan is controlled by the fixed voltage (8 V)
(For the operation check of the fan)
Display only
Item
MEASUREMENT
MODE
Setting
OFF/S/N/MODU/RESO/
SENSE/REGI/DRANG
MASTER BLACK
MASTER GAIN(TMP)
( _99 to 99)
_6/_3/0/3/6/9/12/18/24/
30/36/42
Function
Selects the measurement mode
OFF : It returns to OFF when the main power is turned on
S/N : S/N ratio measurement mode
MODU : Modulation degree measurement mode
RESO : Resolution power measurement mode
SENSE : Sensitivity measurement mode
REGI : Registration measurement mode
DRANG : Dynamic range measurement mode
Adjusts the master black level
(All of the R, G and B signal black levels are adjusted)
Sets the tentative gain value
4-84
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
FILTER CTEMP
S19 FILTER CTEMP TOP
FILTER CTEMP A : 3200
FILTER CTEMP B : 3200
FILTER CTEMP C : 4300
FILTER CTEMP D : 6300
Item
FILTER CTEMP A
FILTER CTEMP B
FILTER CTEMP C
FILTER CTEMP D
Setting
2000 to 10000 (100/1 step)
2000 to 10000 (100/1 step)
2000 to 10000 (100/1 step)
2000 to 10000 (100/1 step)
Function
Sets the color temperature of filter A
Sets the color temperature of filter B
Sets the color temperature of filter C
Sets the color temperature of filter D
BATTERY INFO
When the battery (BP-GL65/GL95) supporting Info is used
S20 BATTERY INFO TOP
TYPE : LION
MFD DATE D/M/Y :25022008
CYCLE COUNT : 31
CAPACITY : 6534mAh
VOLTAGE : 15.6V
CURRENT : 2759mA
REMAINING(%) : 95%
REMAINING(MIN) : 114M
MODE : 0000
STATUS : 00E0
Item
TYPE
MFD DATE D/M/Y
CYCLE COUNT
CAPACITY
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
REMAINING (%)
REMAINING (MIN)
MODE
STATUS
Setting
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Function
Selecting battery types
Date of manufacture
Number of times of charge/discharge
Selecting the capacity when battery is fully charged
Indicating the battery voltage
Indicating the battery current
Indicating the remaining power of the battery in units of %
Indicating the remaining power of the battery in units of time (minute)
Battery operating mode is displayed
Battery status is displayed
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-85
HOURS METER 2
S21 HOURS METER2 TOP
RESET METER : EXEC
OPERATION : XXXXXH
LASER : XXXXX
OPERATION (rst): XXXXXH
SPINDLE (rst): XXXXXH
LOADING (rst): XXXXX
SEEK (rst): XXXXXH
Refer to “6-4. Digital Hours Meter” for the description of HOURS METER 2 page.
Item
RESET METER
OPERATION
Setting
Press the MENU knob to move to the RESET
METER display
Display only
Function
Resets the hours meters
LASER
OPERATION (rst)
SPINDLE (rst)
LOADING (rst)
SEEK (rst)
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
Display only
OPERATION (operation time display) mode
Accumulates the time during which the power is turned on, and displays the value by an hour
LASER PARAMETER (optical block assembly light output time display) mode
Accumulates the time (laser-illuminated hours) during which the light is being emitted, and displays the value by an hour. Resettable
The value can be used as a reference to when the next periodical replacement should be
OPERATION (operation time display) mode (resettable)
This is the same function as the OPERATION mode above, but is resettable
By resetting it after replacing a part, the value can be used as a reference to when the next periodical replacement should be
SPINDLE RUNNING (spindle motor rotation time display) mode (resettable)
Accumulates the time during which the spindle is rotating, and displays the value by an hour. Resettable.
By resetting it after replacing a spindle, the value can be used as a reference to when the next replacement should be
LOADING COUNTER (number of times of disc insertion display) mode
(resettable)
Accumulates and displays the number of times of disc insertion. Resettable.
By resetting it after replacing a loader assembly, the value can be used as a reference to when the next periodical replacement should be
SEEK RUNNING (optical-head seek operation time display) mode
(resettable)
Accumulates the seek operation time of the optical head, and displays the value by an hour. Resettable.
By resetting it after replacing a seek motor, the value can be used as a reference to when the next replacement should be
4-86
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
FUNCTION LIMIT
S22 FUNCTION LIMIT TOP
AF DISPLAY : OFF
Item Setting Function
AF DISPLAY OFF/ON When the FUJINON PF lens (HA22 x7.4BRD, HA13x4.5BRD) is used, turns ON/OFF the function that displays the AF detection window and the in-focus indicator on the viewfinder screen *
* : Turning ON/OFF the AF detection window, changing the area and turning ON/OFF the in-focus display are activated by the switch of the lens side.
(For details, refer to the lens specifications.)
In-focus indicator display (displayed above F value display of lens on VF DISP) : Out of former focus
Just focus
Out of post-focus
S/H DC
S23 S/H DC TOP
S/H DC ADJ MODE : OFF
TEST OUT SELECT : VBS
S/H DC B Rch (1): 0
S/H DC B Gch (1): 0
S/H DC B Bch (1): 0
Item Setting Function
S/H DC ADJ MODE OFF/ON Turns ON/OFF the function that displays the dummy white spots (vertical bars) for adjustment on the screen (The dummy white spots are displayed in the order of R/G/B starting from the center of screen to the right)
Adjusts the S/H DC B R-channel/G-channel/B-channel to the point where the dummy white spots are least visible on the screen (Adjusts them with the GAIN set in 12 dB)
TEST OUT SELECT VBS/Y/R/G/B/LCD Select the video signal to be output from the TEST OUT connector
S/H DC B R ch (1)
S/H DC B G ch (1)
S/H DC B B ch (1)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
( _99 to 99)
Adjusts the sample-and-hold DC level of the R-channel
Adjusts the sample-and-hold DC level of the G-channel
Adjusts the sample-and-hold DC level of the B-channel
*
*
*
* : If this adjustment is not made for optimum result, the troubles may occur such as thin vertical bars during the high gain mode or poor accuracy of white spot compensation.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-87
BOARD INFO
S24 BOARD INFO TOP
TG VERSION : 1.400
Item
TG VERSION
Setting
Display only
SERVICE FILE
S25 SERVICE FILE TOP
SVC FILE LOAD : EXEC
SVC FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID:
Function
Indicating the ROM Version number of IC8/TG-260 board
Item
SVC FILE LOAD
SVC FILE SAVE
F.ID
Setting
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
Press the MENU knob to execute this menu item
16 characters
(alphanumeric characters symbols and spaces)
Function
Loads the SERVICE file from the main unit or a memory stick
Saves the SERVICE file in the main unit or a memory stick
Sets the file ID
(When the SVC FILE SAVE is executed, this ID is saved)
4-88
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-10. Drive Maintenance
Used for the maintenance of the optical drive.
. Use an external monitor for the following items.
“4-10-5. ACCELERATION SENSOR”
“4-10-21. ACCELERATION OFFSET”
. The alignment disc (PFD23A-RS) is required for the following item.
“4-10-16. SKEW”
4-10-1. Basic Operation on Drive
Maintenance Menus
Enter the drive maintenance menu from the SERVICE menu. (Refer to “4-9. SERVICE Menu”.)
If a cartridge is remaining inside, it is ejected automatically.
1.
Select the “S16 VDR MAINTENANCE” on the
SERVICE menu.
2.
Select “DRIVE MAINTE” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
S16 VDR MAINTENANCE TOP
AUDIO A/D ADJUST: EXEC
AUDIO D/A ADJUST: EXEC
AU SIDE VOL ADJ : EXEC
POWER A/D ADJUST: EXEC
DRIVE MAINTE : EXEC
SERVICE SUPPORT : EXEC
4-10-2. TEMPERATURE SENSOR
This menu allows you to check the temperature sensor on the optical drive.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [DEVICE]
→ [TEMPERATURE SENSOR]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The current temperature appears.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
36.0[DEG]
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
DRIVE MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE START?
YES NO
The drive maintenance menu is displayed.
DRIVE MAINTENANCE
*CHECK
ADJUST
ERROR LOGGER
OTHERS
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-89
4-10-3. DEW SENSOR
This menu allows you to check the dew sensor on the optical drive.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [DEVICE]
→ [DEW SENSOR]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
DEW SENSOR
4-10-4. FAN MOTOR
This menu allows you to check the fan motor connected to the optical drive.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [DEVICE]
→ [FAN MOTOR]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
FAN MOTOR
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
DEW SENSOR
DRY
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
FAN MOTOR
CHECKING...OK
If failed:
The following screen appears.
FAN MOTOR
CHECKING...ERROR
4-90
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-10-5. ACCELERATION SENSOR
This menu allows you to check the acceleration sensor on the optical drive.
n
Be sure to place the unit horizontally with the outside panel facing upward as shown in the figure when checking the sensor.
The check may be failed if the optical drive is incorrectly placed.
Preparation:
1.
Place the unit with the outside panel facing upward as shown in the figure.
2.
Connect the component cable to the TEST OUT connector and the monitor.
3.
Select VIDEO OUT MENU from the VIDEO OUT page in the OPERATION menu.
The menu appears on the connected monitor.
Component cable
TEST OUT
Outside panel
DRIVE MAINTENANCE
*CHECK
ADJUST
ERROR LOGGER
OTHERS
Monitor
If failed:
The following screen appears.
Check optical drive posture and sensor installation.
n
CHECKING: Disconnection check result
SENSOR POSTURE: SENSOR POSTURE check result
If the disconnection check results in an error, the SENSOR
POSTURE check is not carried out.
ACCELERATION SENSOR
CHECKING...OK
SENSOR POSTURE:TILTING!
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [DEVICE]
→ [ACCELERATION SENSOR]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
ACCELERATION SENSOR
A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Check that the unit is placed horizontally, and press the MENU knob.
ACCELERATION SENSOR
PLACE DRIVE
HORIZONTALLY
ARE YOU SURE?
*YES
NO
When the optical drive is detected as horizontal, the following screen appears.
ACCELERATION SENSOR
CHECKING...OK
SENSOR POSTURE:OK
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-91
4-10-6. LOADER
This menu allows you to check loader operations.
n
Check that the loader is correctly installed on the optical drive before starting the check.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [LOADER]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
LOADER
SENSOR HOLE
. When insert 23.3 GB SL disc such as PFD23A, the message “SENSOR HOLE:2 3 4” is displayed.
. When insert 50 GB SL disc such as PFD50LA, the message “SENSOR HOLE:3 4” is displayed.
In cases other than above, check the corresponding detection sensor because of possibility of failure.
INSERT DISC
POSITION:EJECT
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:NOT DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:
2.
Insert a cartridge.
The result appears.
The loader moves to the DOWN position.
LOADER
CHECKING...OK
POSITION:DOWN
REC INHI:NOT INHI
DOWN SENSOR:DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:2 3 4
Detection sensor 2
Detection sensor 4
Detection sensor 3
If failed:
The following screen appears.
LOADER
Appears just for a moment
CHECKING...ERROR
POSITION:DOWN
REC INHI:NOT INHI
DOWN SENSOR:DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:2 3 4
The following describes four procedures:
. Moving DOWN Position to EJECT Position
. Moving DOWN Position to STBY Position
. Moving STBY Position to EJECT Position
. Moving STBY Position to DOWN Position
4-92
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Moving DOWN Position to EJECT Position
1.
The item selection screen appears.
2.
Press the MENU knob.
LOADER
Moving DOWN Position to STBY Position
1.
The item selection screen appears.
2.
Select “MOVE TO STBY POS” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
LOADER
*MOVE TO EJECT POS
MOVE TO STBY POS
POSITION:DOWN
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:2 3 4
A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
LOADER
MOVE TO EJECT POS
*MOVE TO STBY POS
POSITION:DOWN
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:2 3 4
A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
LOADER
MOVE TO EJECT POS
MOVE TO STBY POS
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
The loader moves to the EJECT position to eject the cartridge.
LOADER
CHECKING...OK
POSITION:EJECT
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:NOT DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:
If failed:
The following screen appears.
LOADER
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
The loader moves to the STBY position.
LOADER
Appears just for a moment
CHECKING...OK
POSITION:STBY
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:NOT DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:
If failed:
The following screen appears.
LOADER
Appears just for a moment
CHECKING...ERROR
POSITION:DOWN
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:2 3 4
CHECKING...ERROR
POSITION:DOWN
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:2 3 4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-93
Moving STBY Position to EJECT Position
1.
The item selection screen appears.
2.
Press the MENU knob.
LOADER
Moving STBY Position to DOWN Position
1.
The item selection screen appears.
2.
Select “MOVE TO DOWN POS” by turning the
MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
LOADER
*MOVE TO EJECT POS
MOVE TO DOWN POS
POSITION:STBY
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:NOT DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:
A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
LOADER
MOVE TO EJECT POS
*MOVE TO DOWN POS
POSITION:STBY
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:NOT DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:
A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
LOADER
MOVE TO EJECT POS
MOVE TO DOWN POS
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
The loader moves to the EJECT position to eject the cartridge.
LOADER
CHECKING...OK
POSITION:EJECT
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:NOT DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:
If failed:
The following screen appears.
LOADER
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
The loader moves to the DOWN position.
LOADER
Appears just for a moment
CHECKING...OK
POSITION:DOWN
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:2 3 4
If failed:
The following screen appears.
LOADER
Appears just for a moment
CHECKING...ERROR
POSITION:STBY
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:NOT DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:
CHECKING...ERROR
POSITION:STBY
REC INHI:INHI
DOWN SENSOR:NOT DOWN
SENSOR HOLE:
4-94
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-10-7. SLIDER-AUTO TEST
This menu allows you to check optical block assembly operations and the limit sensor.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [SLIDER]
→ [AUTO TEST]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
AUTO TEST
4-10-8. IN-LIM TEST
This menu allows you to move the optical block assembly to the inner-limit position of the disc.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [SLIDER]
→ [IN-LIM TEST]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
IN-LIM TEST
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
AUTO TEST
CHECKING...OK
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
n
Check visually that the optical block assembly moves to the inner-limit position.
IN-LIM TEST
CHECKING...OK
If failed:
The following screen appears.
AUTO TEST
CHECKING...ERROR
If failed:
The following screen appears.
IN-LIM TEST
CHECKING...ERROR
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-95
4-10-9. OUT-LIM TEST
This menu allows you to move the optical block assembly to the outer-limit position of the disc.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [SLIDER]
→ [OUT-LIM TEST]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
OUT-LIM TEST
4-10-10. SPINDLE MOTOR-AUTO TEST
This menu allows you to check spindle motor operations.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [SPINDLE MOTOR]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Press the MENU knob.
DRIVE MAINTENANCE
CHECK
SPINDLE MOTOR
*AUTO TEST
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
n
Check visually that the optical block assembly moves to the outer-limit position.
OUT-LIM TEST
CHECKING...OK
A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
AUTO TEST
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
A screen to insert a cartridge appears.
AUTO TEST
INSERT DISC.
If failed:
The following screen appears.
OUT-LIM TEST
CHECKING...ERROR
4.
Insert a cartridge.
The result appears.
AUTO TEST
CHECKING...OK
4-96
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
If failed:
The following screen appears.
AUTO TEST
CHECKING...ERROR
4-10-11. FOCUS ACTUATOR
This menu allows you to check the focus of the 2-axis actuator.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [OPTICAL BLOCK]
→ [FOCUS ACTUATOR]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
FOCUS ACTUATOR
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
Check that the 2-axis actuator moves several times.
. If the actuator does not move or its movement is not smooth, the harness may be connected improperly or the optical block may be defective.
The result appears.
FOCUS ACTUATOR
CHECKING...OK
If failed:
The following screen appears.
FOCUS ACTUATOR
CHECKING...ERROR
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-97
4-10-12. TRACKING ACTUATOR
This menu allows you to check the tracking of the 2-axis actuator.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [OPTICAL BLOCK]
→ [TRACKING ACTUATOR]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
TRACKING ACTUATOR
4-10-13. SA ACTUATOR
This menu allows you to check the SA actuator motor.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [OPTICAL BLOCK]
→ [SA ACTUATOR]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
SA ACTUATOR
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
Check that the 2-axis actuator moves several times.
. If the actuator does not move or its movement is not smooth, the harness may be connected improperly or the optical block may be defective.
The result appears.
TRACKING ACTUATOR
CHECKING...OK
If failed:
The following screen appears.
TRACKING ACTUATOR
CHECKING...ERROR
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
SA ACTUATOR
CHECKING...OK
If failed:
The following screen appears.
The harness may be connected improperly or the optical block may be defective.
SA ACTUATOR
CHECKING...ERROR
4-98
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-10-14. LASER
This menu allows to check the laser.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [OPTICAL BLOCK]
→ [LASER]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
LASER
4-10-15. ND FILTER
This menu allows you to check the ND filter.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [OPTICAL BLOCK]
→ [ND FILTER]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
ND FILTER
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
A screen to insert a cartridge appears.
LASER
INSERT DISC.
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
ND FILTER
CHECKING...OK
3.
Insert a cartridge.
The result appears.
LASER
CHECKING...OK
If failed:
The following screen appears.
ND FILTER
CHECKING...ERROR
If failed:
The following screen appears.
LASER
CHECKING...ERROR
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-99
4-10-16. SKEW
This menu allows you to check the skew.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [SKEW]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
SKEW
4.
Insert the alignment disc.
5.
Press the MENU knob.
The result appears.
SKEW
CHECKING...OK
CHECK START?
*YES
NO
A warm-up screen appears.
n
If five minutes has already passed since power ON, this screen appears just for a moment.
SKEW
WARMING UP...
REMAINED 0299 SEC
ARE YOU PASS?
*YES
NO
If the power has been supplied to the unit for over five minutes, you can select YES and proceed to the next step even after you turn off the power and then turn it back on.
3.
A confirmation screen appears when “0000 SEC” is displayed.
SKEW
INSERT ALIGNMENT DISC
PFD23A-RS
If failed:
The following screen appears.
Perform optical drive alignment. (Refer to Section 8.)
SKEW
CHECKING...ERROR
4-100
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-10-17. LENS CLEANING
This menu allows you to clean the lens.
n
Before cleaning, be sure to unload the disc from the unit.
If the disc remains at the loading slot, cleaning will not be finished completely.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [CHECK]
→ [LENS CLEANING]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob.
LENS CLEANING
PLEASE REMOVE DISC
COMPLETELY
CLEANING START?
*YES
NO n
Check that no disc is remaining in the unit.
3.
Check that no disc is remaining, and then press the
MENU knob.
The result appears.
LENS CLEANING
FINISHED CLEANING
4-10-18. SERVO_1
This menu allows you to adjust the offset and gain of the signal circuit for servo error detection.
(Refer to “Section 8 Optical Drive Alignment” for details.)
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [ADJUST]
→ [SERVO_1]
4-10-19. SKEW
This menu allows you to skew adjustment.
Remove the loader assembly before executing this menu.
(Refer to “Section 8 Optical Drive Alignment” for details.)
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [ADJUST]
→ [SKEW]
4-10-20. SERVO_2
This menu allows you to adjust TE/CE BLOCK, and SV
LOOP GAIN necessary for servo operation. (Refer to
“Section 8 Optical Drive Alignment” for details.) n
Be sure to install the loader. The adjustments are not available if the loader is not installed.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [ADJUST]
→ [SERVO_2]
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-101
4-10-21. ACCELERATION OFFSET
This menu allows you to perform the offset adjustment of the acceleration sensor.
n
Be sure to place the unit horizontally with the outside panel facing upward as shown in the figure when checking the sensor.
The servo operation is not ensured if the optical drive is incorrectly placed.
Preparation:
1.
Place the unit with the outside panel facing upward as shown in the figure.
2.
Connect the component cable to the TEST OUT connector and the monitor.
3.
Select VIDEO OUT MENU from the VIDEO OUT page in the OPERATION menu.
The menu appears on the connected monitor.
TEST OUT
Component cable
Outside panel
DRIVE MAINTENANCE
*CHECK
ADJUST
ERROR LOGGER
The result appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
ACCELERATION OFFSET
PLACE DRIVE
HORIZONTALLY.
ARE YOU SURE?
*YES
NO
A confirmation screen appears.
ACCELERATION OFFSET
ADJUSTING...COMPLETED
If failed:
The following screen appears.
ACCELERATION OFFSET
ADJUSTING...FAILED
Monitor
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [ADJUST]
→ [OTHER ADJUST]
→ [ACCELERATION OFFSET]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
ACCELERATION OFFSET
ADJUST START?
*YES
NO
4-102
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-10-22. ERROR LOGGER
This menu allows you to delete registered error logs.
m
. DRIVE ERROR and DRIVE WARNING are recorded.
. Up to 16 pieces of log data are displayed.
The following data is overwritten on the existing data from the oldest.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [ERROR LOGGER]
1.
Displayed the error log list.
2.
Select a desired error number using the MENU knob.
ERROR LOGGER
*01: 09/22 13:38 95-503
02: 09/22 02:00 3C-500
03: 09/21 11:19 3C-500
04: 09/21 11:18 3C-500
05: 09/21 11:13 3C-500
06: 09/21 10:58 04-77C
07: 09/21 10:58 02-B68
08: 09/21 10:58 08-091 n
To change the display to the next screen, by turning the MENU knob.
ERROR LOGGER
*09: 09/21 10:58 37-500
10: 09/20 01:00 3C-500
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
CLEAR ERROR LOG
3.
Press the MENU knob.
Detailed information of the selected error appears.
ERROR LOGGER
01:
2007/09/22 13:38:39
C 95-503
Clearing Error Log
1.
Display the error log list.
2.
Select “CLEAR ERROR LOG” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
ERROR LOGGER
09: 09/21 10:58 37-500
10: 09/20 01:00 3C-500
11:
12:
13:
14:
15:
16:
*CLEAR ERROR LOG
A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
CLEAR ERROR LOG
ARE YOU SURE?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
CLEAR ERROR LOG
EXECUTING...COMPLETED
If failed:
The following screen appears.
CLEAR ERROR LOG
EXECUTING...FAILED
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-103
4-10-23. VERSION
This menu displays the version of the optical drive.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [OTHERS]
→ [VERSION]
VERSION
VER : 1.20
BOOT: 1.00 DSP : 1.02
SYS : 1.20 PLD1: 1.10
4-10-24. SERIAL NO
This menu displays the serial number of the optical drive.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [OTHERS]
→ [SERIAL NO]
SERIAL NO
NO: 0000106
4-10-26. UPLOAD TO EEPROM
This menu allows you to update the EEPROM (IC4) information backed up on the SE-857 board when only IC4 is replaced.
n
When replacing the SE-857 board, remove the EEPROM
(IC4) from the board, and then mount it on the new board.
This menu is not necessary.
Execute this menu only when IC4 is replaced solely.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [OTHERS]
→ [MEMORY SUPPORT]
→ [UPLOAD TO EEPROM]
1.
A confirmation screen appears.
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
UPLOAD TO EEPROM
FLASH >>> EEPROM
LOAD BACKUP DATA.
ARE YOU SURE?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
UPLOAD TO EEPROM
FLASH >>> EEPROM
LOAD BACKUP DATA.
LOADING...COMPLETED
4-10-25. CLEAR MEDIA LOG
This menu allows you to delete the log of media.
(Refer to “8-6. Cleaning Media Log” for details.) n
Once deleted, the deleted log cannot be restored.
Menu hierarchy:
[DRIVE MAINTENANCE]
→ [OTHERS]
→ [CLEAR MEDIA LOG]
If failed:
The following screen appears.
UPLOAD TO EEPROM
FLASH >>> EEPROM
LOAD BACKUP DATA.
LOADING...FAILED
4-104
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-11. AUDIO A/D Error Correction
Before starting adjustment, refer to “9-1. Preparation”.
Fixtures and Equipment
For more details, refer to “1-10-2. Measuring Equipment”.
. Signal generator
Adjustment Procedure
1.
Input the sine wave of +4 dBu of 1 kHz to the AUDIO
IN CH1 connector and CH2 connector on the rear.
2.
Execute AUDIO A/D ADJUST of the VDR MAINTE-
NANCE page of the SERVICE menu.
AUDIO A/D ADJUST
ADJUST START?
YES NO
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
The auto adjustment starts. The following screens are displayed during the adjustment.
. Screen displayed when CH1 is being adjusted
AUDIO A/D ADJUST
CH1: ADJUSTING
CH2:
CH3:
CH4:
. Screen displayed when all CH is are finished
AUDIO A/D ADJUST
CH1: COMPLETE
CH2: COMPLETE
CH3: COMPLETE
CH4: COMPLETE
4.
Press down the MENU ESCAPE switch when the adjustment is complete.
5.
Turn off the power of this equipment once and back on again. The error is corrected.
m
. If “TIME OVER ERR” is indicated on the adjustment screen, check the menu setting, switch setting and others, and re-execute the adjustment.
. If “INPUT OVER ERR” is indicated on the adjustment screen, check the signal level, since the input signal level may be too high.
. If “INPUT UNDER ERR” is indicated on the adjustment screen, check the signal level, since the input signal level may be too low.
. If “NO INPUT ERR” is indicated on the adjustment screen, check the input signal, since the signal may not be input correctly.
. Screen displayed when CH1 is finished and CH2 is being adjusted
AUDIO A/D ADJUST
CH1: COMPLETE
CH2: ADJUSTING
CH3:
CH4:
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-105
4-12. AUDIO D/A Error Correction
Before starting adjustment, refer to “9-1. Preparation”.
Fixtures and Equipment
For more details, refer to “1-10-2. Measuring Equipment”.
. Audio level-meter
Adjustment Procedure
1.
Execute AUDIO D/A ADJUST of the VDR MAINTE-
NANCE page of the SERVICE menu.
AUDIO D/A ADJUST
ADJUST START?
YES NO
4-13. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Compensation
Before starting adjustment, refer to “9-1. Preparation”.
Fixtures and Equipment
For more details, refer to “1-10-2. Measuring Equipment”.
. Signal generator
Adjustment Procedure
1.
Input the sine wave of +4 dBu of 1 kHz to the AUDIO
IN CH1 connector and CH2 connector on the rear.
2.
Align the LEVEL knobs of CH1 and CH2 to the position one scale left of the mechanical center position.
3.
Execute AU SIDE VOL ADJ. of the VDR MAINTE-
NANCE page of the SERVICE menu.
AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJUST
ADJUST START?
YES NO
2.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
3.
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL knob of CH1 so that the output level of CH1 becomes 0 dBu
±0.05 dB.
4.
Turn the AUDIO LEVEL knob of CH2 so that the output level of CH2 becomes 0 dBu
±0.05 dB.
AUDIO D/A ADJUST
COMPLETE ADJUSTING?
YES NO
4.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
AUDIO SIDE VOL ADJUST
ADJUST COMPLETE.
CH1: OK DATA: 508
CH2: OK DATA: -460
5.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
n
When “NO” is selected, the data adjusted this time becomes invalid, and the previous adjustment value becomes valid.
6.
Press down the MENU ESCAPE switch when the adjustment is complete.
7.
Turn off the power of this equipment once and back on again. The error is corrected.
5.
Press down the MENU ESCAPE switch when the adjustment is complete.
6.
Turn off the power of this equipment once and back on again. The error is corrected.
n
If the adjustment result screen shows “NG”, execute the adjustment from step 3 again. When “NG” reappears, replace the variable resister (RV1 or RV2 on the FP-157 board) of the LEVEL knob.
4-106
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-14. Adjusting Battery End Detection
Voltage
Before starting adjustment, refer to “9-1. Preparation”.
Devices and tools
For more details, refer to “1-10-2. Measuring Equipment”.
. Rated voltage power source (one that can output at least
10 A)
. Digital voltmeter
. Blank disc
Adjustment Procedure
1.
Supply a +12 V voltage to the DC IN connector.
2.
Insert a blank disc for recording into the unit, press the
REC START button, and begin recording.
3.
Execute POWER A/D ADJUST from the page of
VDR MAINTENANCE of the SERVICE menu.
POWER A/D ADJUST
ADJUST START?
YES NO
4.
Turn the MENU knob to select “YES” and press the
MENU knob.
POWER A/D ADJUST
ADJUST COMPLETE.
ADJ DATA: 0.02[V]
5.
After adjustment finishes, press down on the MENU
ESCAPE switch.
n
If the message “ADJUST ERROR” appears in the adjustment result menu, recheck whether a +12 V voltage is supplied to the DC IN connector and repeat the adjustment from step 3.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-107
4-15. SERVICE SUPPORT Menu
Displays the error log for all errors except for the ones that occur in the optical drive block.
Procedure
1.
Execute SERVICE SUPPORT from the VDR MAIN-
TENANCE page of the SERVICE menu.
SERVICE SUPPORT
DISPLAY ERR LOG : EXEC
CLEAR ERR LOG : EXEC
Clearing the Error Log
n
Normally, do not clear the error log. The error log is useful when trying to fix problems that have occurred.
The error log can contain important information for solving these problems.
Procedure
1.
Execute SERVICE SUPPORT from the page of VDR
MAINTENANCE of the SERVICE menu.
SERVICE SUPPORT
DISPLAY ERR LOG : EXEC
CLEAR ERR LOG : EXEC
2.
Turn the MENU knob to select “DISPLAY ERR
LOG” and press the MENU knob.
3.
Turn the MENU knob to move the arrow so that it points to the error code that you want to view in more detail.
DISPLAY ERR LOG
(003/0027)
001 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
002 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
003 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
004 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
005 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
006 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
007 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
008 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
009 ERROR-XX-XXX: EXEC
* : (Selected log No./total number of logs)
*
4.
Press the MENU knob to display the detailed menu.
DISPLAY ERROR LOG
ERROR:XX-XXX (003/0027)
DATE : MM/DD HH:MM:SS
TC : 00:00:00:00
2008/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
*1
*2
*3
2.
Turn the MENU knob to select “CLEAR ERR LOG” and press the MENU knob.
3.
Turn the MENU knob to select “YES” or “NO” and press the MENU knob.
CLEAR ERROR LOG
CLEAR ALL DATA?
YES NO
Do not clear the log (NO):
The screen returns to the SERVICE SUPPORT menu.
Clear the log (YES):
The screen changes to the following screen and returns to the SERVICE SUPPORT menu after two seconds.
CLEAR ERROR LOG
EXECUTING.
*1 : (Date when the error has occurred)
*2 : (TC value when the error has occurred)
*3 : (Current data and time)
4-108
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-16. Setup Menu List
The data that is set by the Setup menu can be saved in files. (Refer to Section 5 for the details of the file system.)
This section shows the list covering all the items of the setup menu. The following list shows the respective default settings when the unit was shipped from the factory and the destination files to which the respective menu items can be saved.
F-SET :
ALL :
PRST:
Indicates the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory.
Indicates the items that can be saved when the ALL FILE SAVE is executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.
Indicates the items that can be preset when the ALL PRESET is executed. The items are
SCN:
REF:
LENS : indicated by the symbols.
Indicates the items that can be saved in the SCENE file when the SCENE STORE is executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.
Indicates the items that can be saved in the REFERENCE file when the REFERENCE
SAVE/STORE is executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.
Indicates the items that can be saved in the LENS file when the LENS FILE STORE is executed. The items are indicated by the symbols.
The items that are returned to the standard setup (PRESET value) when the STANDARD STD : submenu is clicked.
Power OFF : Indicates the items that return to the default setting when the unit was shipped from the
SVC : factory at power-off.
Indicates the item that can be saved in the service when the SVC FILE SAVE is executed.
The items are indicated by the symbols.
Symbols
: Can be saved. (The menu display value remains as it is even after saving.)
O : Can be saved. (The menu display value becomes 0 when it is saved.)
X : Cannot be saved.
T : Saved with the factory default setting regardless of the current setting. (If the setting value is changed in the Service mode, the setting value in the Service mode returns to the default value when the power is turned off.)
: Virtually invalid because the operation is prohibited.
: Can be saved only when executed from Remote.
n
The items that have the crossing mark X (cannot be saved) in their ALL and PRESET columns, can be the target of the USER file and USER PRESET if the items are located in the USER menu. However, the items that return to the default setting when the unit was shipped from the factory at power-OFF, are excluded from the target.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-109
1. OPERATION Menu (1/5)
No.
Page
01 OUTPUT 1
Setup Item
SDI OUT 1 SELECT
SDI OUT 2 SELECT
SDI OUT 2 SUPER
TEST OUT SELECT
F-SET
OFF
OFF
OFF
VBS
02 OUTPUT 2
TEST OUT SUPER
LIVE & PLAY
DOWN CON MODE
WIDE ID
03 SUPERIMPOSE SUPER(VFDISP)
SUPER(MENU)
SUPER(TC)
04 LCD
SUPER(MARKER)
SUPER(ZEBRA)
LCD COLOR
OFF
OFF
0
LCD MARKER&ZEBRA ON
05 REC FUNCTION SLOW & QUICK OFF
FRAME RATE *1
CACHE/INTVAL REC OFF
OFF
OFF
CROP
THROU
ON
ON
OFF
X
X
ALL PRST SCN
X
X
X
X
O
T
T X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
REF
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CACHE REC TIME
TAKE TOTAL TIME
REC TIME
0-2S
5MIN
5SEC
PRE-LIGHTING OFF
NUMBER OF FRAME 1
*2
TRIGGER INTERVAL M
DISC EXCHG CACHE OFF
CLIP CONT REC
06 ASSIGNABLE SW ASSIGN SW <1>
ASSIGN SW <2>
ASSIGN SW <3>
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
07 POWER SAVE
ASSIGN SW <4>
ASSIGN SW <5>
ASSIGN SW <RET>
ZOOM SPEED
RETURN VIDEO
ETHERNET/USB i.LINK(FAM)
REC AUDIO OUT
TEST OUT SAVE
OFF
OFF
RET
20
OFF
DSABL
DSABL
EE
ON
*1 : Initial value is 24 when SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23.9P.
Initial value is 25 when SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 25P.
Initial value is 30 when SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 29.9P.
*2 : Initial value is 2 when SYSTEM LINE is 720 and REC FORMAT is HD422/HD420.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O Y when
R/G/B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
It is set to
OFF when A.
INT/M. INT is selected.
4-110
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
OPERATION Menu (2/5)
No.
08
09
10
11
12
Page
VF DISP 1
VF DISP 2
VF DISP 3
‘!’ LED
‘!’LED STD
Setup Item
VF DISP
VF DISP MODE
DISP EXTENDER
DISP FILTER
DISP WHITE
DISP GAIN
DISP SHUTTER
DISP AUDIO
DISP DISC
DISP IRIS
F-SET
ON
3
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
DISP ZOOM ON
DISP COLOR TEMP OFF
DISP BATT REMAIN INT
DISP DC IN
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID
OFF
OFF
DISP WRR RF LVL OFF
DISP REC FORMAT OFF
DISP CLIP NO(PB) ON
DISP TIME CODE
DISP ALAC
LOW LIGHT
LOW LIGHT LEVEL
OFF
OFF
OFF
0
VF BATT WARNING 10%
ABSOLUTE VALUE
GAIN <!>
SHUTTER <!>
WHITE BAL <!>
CC 5600K <!>
ATW RUN <!>
EXTENDER <!>
FILTER ND <!>
FILTER CC <!>
OVERRIDE <!>
GAIN
SHUTTER
<!>
<!>
WHITE BAL
CC 5600K
<!>
<!>
OFF
ON
0dB
*
AB
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ATW RUN <!>
EXTENDER <!>
FILTER ND
FILTER CC
<!>
<!>
OVERRIDE <!>
1
B
OFF
OFF
OFF
* : Initial value is OFF when FORMAT is set to 50i/50P.
Initial value is OFF when FORMAT is set to 59.9i/59.9P (SCAN MODE 59.9P).
Initial value is 1/48 when FORMAT is set to 23.9P.
Initial value is 1/50 when FORMAT is set to 25P.
Initial value is 1/60 when FORMAT is set to 29.97P.
Initial value is 1/48 when FORMAT is set to 59.9P (SCAN MODE 23.9P).
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
ALL PRST SCN
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
REF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4-111
OPERATION Menu (3/5)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
13
14
MARKER 1
MARKER 2
MARKER
CENTER
CENTER MARK
SAFETY ZONE
SAFETY AREA
ASPECT
ASPECT SELECT
ASPECT MASK
ASPECT MASK LVL 12
100% MARKER OFF
USER BOX
USER BOX WIDTH
OFF
240
USER BOX HEIGHT 135
USER BOX H POS 0
USER BOX V POS
CENTER H POS
CENTER V POS
0
0
0
OFF
OFF
3
OFF
90%
OFF
4:3
ON
ASPECT SAFE ZONE OFF
ASPECT SAFE AREA 90%
15 FOCUS ASSIST FOCUS ASSIST IND OFF
FOCUS IND POS BOTTM
FOCUS AREA MARK OFF
16 GAIN SW GAIN LOW
GAIN MID
0dB
6dB
17 VF SETTING
GAIN HIGH
GAIN TURBO
TURBO SW IND
SHOCKLESS GAIN
ZEBRA
12dB
42dB
OFF
OFF
OFF
REF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ALL PRST SCN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
18 AUTO IRIS
4-112
ZEBRA SELECT
ZEBRA1 DET LVL
ZEBRA1 APT LVL
ZEBRA2 DET LVL
VF DETAIL LEVEL
VF ASPECT (SD)
IRIS OVERRIDE
IRIS SPEED
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
IRIS WINDOW
IRIS WINDOW IND
IRIS VAR WIDTH
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
IRIS VAR H POS
IRIS VAR V POS
OFF
0
OFF
1
OFF
240
135
0
0
1
70%
10%
100%
0
AUTO
O
O
X T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Depends on the VF switch setting
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Initial value
X
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
OPERATION Menu (4/5)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
19
20
21
SHOT ID
SHOT DISP
SET STATUS
ID-1
ID-2
ID-3
Blank
Blank
Blank
ID-4
SHOT DATE
Blank
OFF
SHOT TIME OFF
SHOT MODEL NAME OFF
SHOT SERIAL NO
SHOT ID SEL
OFF
OFF
SHOT 16:9 CHARA OFF
SHOT BLINK CHARA OFF
STATUS ABNORMAL ON
STATUS SYSTEM ON
STATUS FUNCTION ON
STATUS AUDIO ON
22 WHITE SETTING WHITE SWITCH <B> MEM
SHOCKLESS WHITE 1
ATW HOLD MEMORY OFF
ATW SPEED 4
AWB FIXED AREA
FILTER WHT MEM
OFF
ON
23 OFFSET WHT
24 SHT ENABLE
OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF
WARM-COOL <A> 3200
WARM-COOL BAL <A> 0
OFFSET WHITE <B> OFF
WARM-COOL <B> 3200
WARM-COOL BAL <B> 0
SHUTTER ECS
SHUTTER SLS
ON
OFF
SHUTTER 1/32
SHUTTER 1/33
SHUTTER 1/40
SHUTTER 1/48
SHUTTER 1/50
SHUTTER 1/60
SHUTTER 1/96
SHUTTER 1/100
SHUTTER 1/120
SHUTTER 1/125
SHUTTER 1/250
SHUTTER 1/500
SHUTTER 1/1000
SHUTTER 1/2000
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
REF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ALL PRST SCN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4-113
OPERATION Menu (5/5)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET ALL PRST SCN REF
25 LENS FILE LENS FILE SELECT
F.ID
1 X
No Offset _
S.No
Depends on the Lens
_
L.ID
Depends on the Lens
_
X
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
26
27
FORMAT
SOURCE SEL
L.MF
SYSTEM LINE
Depends on the Lens
_
Default setting X
SYSTEM FREQUENCY Default setting X
SCAN MODE 59.9P
X
REC FORMAT HD422 50
ASPECT RATIO(SD)
AU DATA LEN (IMX)
COUNTRY
16:9
16bit
Default setting X
FRONT MIC SELECT STREO
_
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
28 UMID SET
REC VIDEO SOURCE CAM
EXT VIDEO SOURCE
WIDE MODE (EXT)
SETUP REMOVE
COUNTRY CODE
ORGANIZATION
USER CODE
HDSDI
AUTO
7.5%
Blank
Blank
Blank
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
29
30
CLIP TITLE
FILE NAMING
TIME ZONE
TITLE
SELECT PREFIX
CLEAR NUMERIC
LOAD PREFIX DATA
PREFIX
NUMERIC
NAMING FORM
AUTO NAMING
LETTER BOX
00
DSABL
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
TITLE
00001
C ****
C
****
DISABLE
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
X
X
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X 31 SELECT
FUNCTION *1
32 LENS CONFIG *2
FOCUS MAG
IMAGE INVERT
DISABLE
OFF
X
X
X
X
33 MEMORY REC MEMORY REC DSABL
COPY CURRENT CLP EXEC
COPY ALL CLIPS
ABORT COPY
DEL ALL MEM CLP
FORMAT MEMORY
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
*1 : This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23.9P.
*2 : Displayed only when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23.9P, 25P, or 29.9P.
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4-114
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
_
_
X
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
2. PAINT Menu (1/4)
No.
Page
01 SW STATUS
02 WHITE
03 BLACK/FLARE
Setup Item
GAMMA
BLACK GAMMA
MATRIX
KNEE
WHITE CLIP
DETAIL
APERTURE
FLARE
TEST SAW
COLOR TEMP <A>
C TEMP BAL <A>
R GAIN
B GAIN
<A>
<A>
COLOR TEMP <B>
C TEMP BAL <B>
R GAIN
B GAIN
<B>
<B>
MASTER BLACK
R BLACK
G BLACK
B BLACK
MASTER FLARE
R FLARE
G FLARE
B FLARE
FLARE
TEST OUT SELECT
F-SET
0
0
0
0
ON
VBS
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3200
0
ON
ON
OFF
3200
0
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
04 GAMMA GAMMA
STEP GAMMA
MASTER GAMMA
R GAMMA
G GAMMA
B GAMMA
TEST OUT SELECT
0
0
0
ON
0.45
0
VBS
GAMMA TABLE
GAM TABLE (STD)
GAM TABLE (HG) 4
GAM TABLE (USER) 1
STD
5
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
T
T
T
O
O
O
O
T
T
T
T
O
O
O
O
T
T
T
T
ALL PRST SCN REF
T
T
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ON
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y when
R/G/B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y when
R/G/B
O
O
O
O
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-115
PAINT Menu (2/4)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
05 BLACK GAMMA BLACK GAMMA OFF
BLACK GAM RANGE HIGH
0 MASTER BLK
GAMMA
R BLACK GAMMA 0
G BLACK GAMMA
B BLACK GAMMA
TEST OUT SELECT
0
0
VBS
06
07
08
KNEE 1
KNEE 2
DETAIL 1
KNEE
KNEE POINT (M)
KNEE SLOPE (M)
ON
95.0
0
KNEE SATURATION ON
KNEE SAT LEVEL 0
WHITE CLIP
WHITE CLIP LEVEL
ON
108.0
KNEE SATURATION ON
*
KNEE POINT (R)
KNEE SLOPE (R)
KNEE POINT (G)
0.0
0
0.0
KNEE SLOPE (G)
KNEE POINT (B)
KNEE SLOPE (B)
DETAIL
APERTURE
DETAIL LEVEL
APERTURE LEVEL
DTL H/V RATIO
CRISPENING
LEVEL DEPEND
0
0
0
ON
0
0.0
0
ON
ON
0
09 DETAIL 2
LEVEL DEPEND LVL 0
DETAIL FREQUENCY 0
KNEE APERTURE
KNEE APT LVL
DETAIL LIMIT
OFF
0
0
DTL WHT LIMIT
DTL BLK LIMIT
DTL V-BLK LMT
V DTL CREATION
0
0
0
R+G
H/V CONTROL MODE V
* : Initial value is 105.0 when COUNTRY is set to “PAL AREA”.
ALL PRST SCN REF
O
O
O
O
O
O
T
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
T
O
O
T
O
O
O
T
T
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O Y when
R/G/B
Initial value
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4-116
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
PAINT Menu (3/4)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
10
11
12
SD DETAIL
SKIN DETAIL
MTX LINEAR
SD DETAIL
SD DETAIL LEVEL
SD CRISPENING
SD DTL WHT LIMIT
SD DTL BLK LIMIT 0
SD LEVEL DEPEND ON
SD LV DEPEND LVL 0
SD DTL FREQUENCY 0
SD DTL H/V RATIO 0
0
0
OFF
0
SD CROSS COLOR
SKIN DETAIL ALL
SKIN DETECT
SKIN AREA IND
SKIN DTL SELECT
SKIN DETAIL
SKIN DETAIL LVL
SKIN DTL SAT
SKIN DTL HUE
SKIN DTL WIDTH
MATRIX
MATRIX (USER)
0
39
OFF
OFF
MATRIX (PRESET) OFF
MATRIX (PRST) SEL 2
MATRIX (USER) R-G 0
MATRIX (USER) R-B 0
0
0
1
ON
0
OFF
EXEC
OFF
13 MTX MULTI
MATRIX (USER) G-R 0
MATRIX (USER) G-B 0
MATRIX (USER) B-R 0
MATRIX (USER) B-G 0
MATRIX
MATRIX (MULTI)
OFF
OFF
MATRIX AREA IND OFF
MATRIX COLOR DET EXEC
MTX (MULTI) PRESET EXEC
MTX (MULTI) AXIS B
MTX (MULTI) HUE
MTX (MULTI) SAT
0
0
14 V MODULATION VMOD
MASTER VMOD
R VMOD
G VMOD
B VMOD
TEST OUT SELECT
ON
0
0
0
0
VBS
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
_
X
X
_
T
T
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
ALL PRST SCN REF
_
X
X
_
T
_
_
T
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
_
X
X
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
T
T
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
T
T
T
_
_
T
T
T
T
T
O
O
O
O
O
O
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Initial value
Initial value
Initial value
Initial value
_
X
X
X
_
_
X
X
_
_
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
_
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Y when
R/G/B
4-117
PAINT Menu (4/4)
No.
Page
15 SATURATION
16 NOISE
SUPPRESS
17 SCENE FILE
Setup Item F-SET
LOW KEY SAT
L KEY SAT LEVEL
L KEY SAT RANGE
Y BLACK GAMMA
OFF
0
HIGH
OFF
Y BLK GAM LEVEL 0
Y BLK GAM RANGE HIGH
NOISE SUPPRESS ON
[] 1
[] 2
[] 3
[] 4
[] 5
[] STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID
ALL
STANDARD _
STANDARD
_
STANDARD _
STANDARD _
STANDARD _
_ _
EXEC
EXEC
_
_
Blank X
PRST
O
O
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
SCN
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
REF
O
O
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
4-118
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
3. MAINTENANCE Menu (1/4)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
01 WHITE SHADING WHT SHAD CH SEL R
TEST OUT SELECT VBS
R/G/B WHT H SAW 0
R/G/B WHT H PARA 0
R/G/B WHT V SAW 0
R/G/B WHT V PARA 0
WHITE SAW/PARA
02 BLACK SHADING BLK SHAD CH SEL
ON
R
TEST OUT SELECT
R/G/B BLK H SAW
R/G/B BLK H PARA
R/G/B BLK V SAW
R/G/B BLK V PARA
BLACK SAW/PARA
MASTER BLACK
VBS
0
0
0
0
ON
0
MASTER GAIN(TMP) Depends on X the switch setting.
03 LEVEL ADJUST VBS VIDEO LEVEL 0
HD-Y LEVEL 0
X
X
TEST OUT SELECT VBS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
04
05
BATTERY 1
BATTERY 2
Info BEFORE END
Info END
5 %
0 %
Sony BEFORE END 11.5V
Sony END 11.0V
Other BEFORE END 11.8V
Other END 11.0V
DC IN BEFORE END 11.8V
DC IN END
DETECTED BATTERY
11.0V
TYPE DETECTION
SEGMENT No.7
SEGMENT No.6
SEGMENT No.5
SEGMENT No.4
SEGMENT No.3
SEGMENT No.2
SEGMENT No.1
AUTO
17.0V
16.0V
15.0V
14.0V
13.0V
12.0V
11.0V
ALL PRST SCN
X
X
_
O
O
O
O
T
O
O
O
O
T
O
O
O
_
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
T
T
T
O
X
X
X
X
T
REF
T
T
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
O
O Y when
R/G/B
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
O ON
ON
Depends on the GAIN switch setting.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O Y when
R/G/B
_
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-119
MAINTENANCE Menu (2/4)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
06 AUDIO-1
07 AUDIO- 2
08 AUDIO-3
09 WRR SETTING
10 TIMECODE
FRONT MIC SELECT STREO
AUDIO CH3/4 MODE SW
REAR XLR AUTO
FRONT MIC REF
REAR MIC REF
MIN ALARM VOL
OFF
_50dB
_60dB
OFF
SP ATT LEVEL
HEADPHONE OUT
OFF
MONO
AU DATA LEN (IMX) 16bit
AU REF LEVEL
AU REF OUT
_20dB
0dB
AU CH12 AGC MODE MONO
AU CH34 AGC MODE MONO
AU AGC SPEC
AU LIMITER MODE
_6dB
OFF
AU OUT LIMITER
AU SG (1KHz)
MIC CH1 LEVEL
MIC CH2 LEVEL
ON
OFF
FRONT
FRONT
REAR1/WRR LEVEL SIDE1
REAR2/WRR LEVEL SIDE2
AUDIO CH3 LEVEL
AUDIO CH4 LEVEL
FIX
FIX
WRR VALID CH SEL ALL
WRR CH SELECT TX1
WRR DELAY COMP ON
TX1/2/3/4
TX1/2/3/4 AUDIO PEAK
TX1/2/3/4 INPUT
LEVEL
TX1/2/3/4 ATT LEVEL 0dB
TX1/2/3/4 LCF FREQ 200Hz
TX1/2/3/4 SYSTEM
DELAY
AUTO
TC OUT AUTO
DF/NDF
EXT-LK DF/NDF
EXT-LK UBIT
LTC UBIT
VITC UBIT(SD)
WATCH AUTO ADJ
UBIT GROUP ID
VITC INS LINE 1
VITC INS LINE 2
DF
INT
INT
FIX
FIX
ON
000
16H *1
18H
*2
*1 : Initial value is 19H when COUNTRY is set to “PAL AREA”.
*2 : Initial value is 21H when COUNTRY is set to “PAL AREA”.
4-120
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
REF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
ALL PRST SCN
X
_
_
_
T
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Initial value X
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
Initial value
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
MAINTENANCE Menu (3/4)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
11 ESSENCE MARK RET SHOT MARK 1
RET SHOT MARK 2
INDEX PIC POS
FIND MODE
12 CAM CONFIG 1 REC TALLY BLINK
REC START BEEP
ON
ON
0SEC
R.ST
ON
OFF
SUB LCD MODE SEL TIMER
SUB LCD TIMER 1H
HDSDI REMOTE I/F
PROAV DISPLAY
OFF
DSABL
MIXED RECORDING DSABL
SINGLE CLIP MODE OFF
PB POSITION KEEP
13 CAM CONFIG 2 TEST SAW SELECT SAW
COLOR BAR SELECT ARIB
USER & ALL ONLY OFF
RM COMMON
MEMORY
RM REC START
OFF
RM
SHT DISP MODE SEC
AF MARKER SOURCE ASPEC
RM F NO DISPLAY CTRL
FAN CONTROL
FOCUS MAG SW
14 CAM CONFIG 3 ALAC
15 PRESET WHT COLOR TEMP <P>
C TEMP BAL <P>
16 DCC ADJUST
AUTO
MTRY
AUTO
3200
0
R GAIN
B GAIN
<P>
<P>
0
0
AWB ENABLE <P> OFF
DCC FUNCTION SEL DCC
DCC D RANGE 600%
17 AUTO IRIS 2
DCC POINT
DCC GAIN
DCC DELAY TIME
DCC PEAK FILTER
IRIS WINDOW
IRIS WINDOW IND
IRIS LEVEL
IRIS APL RATIO
IRIS VAR WIDTH
IRIS VAR HEIGHT
IRIS VAR H POS
IRIS VAR V POS
IRIS SPEED
CLIP HIGH LIGHT
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
240
135
0
0
1
OFF
OFF
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
REF
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ALL PRST SCN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
O
O
O
O
O
T
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
T
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Initial value
Initial value
X
X
4-121
MAINTENANCE Menu (4/4)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
18 GENLOCK GENLOCK ON
19
20
ND COMP
AUTO SHADING
GL HD H PHASE
GL SD H PHASE *1
0
0
REFERENCE
ND OFFSET ADJUST
INTERNAL _
OFF
X
X
X
CLEAR ND OFFSET EXEC
AUTO BLK SHADING
RESET BLK SHD
EXEC
EXEC
_
_
_
TEST OUT SELECT VBS
ALL PRST SCN
O
O
_
T
_
_
_
X
_
X
X
X
_
_
_
X
21
22
APR
NETWORK
MASTER GAIN(TMP) Depends on X the switch setting.
APR EXEC
APR(SLS)
APR PRESET
DHCP
*2
IP ADDRESS
*2
SUBNET MASK
*2
DEF.GATEWAY
*2
LINK SPEED *2
DUPLEX
*2
DNS1
*2
DNS2 *2
UPnP *2
EXEC
EXEC
DSABL
192.168.1.10
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
AUTO
AUTO
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
DSABL
_
_
_
_ NET CFG RESET
23 UP CONVERTER UP CON PROCESS
UC DETAIL LEVEL
UC CRISPENING
UC DETAIL LIMIT
24 SHUTTER
SELECT
0
0
EXEC
ADPT
0
UC LV DEPEND LVL 0
UC DTL FREQUENCY 5.0M
UC DTL H/V RATIO
SHUTTER SELECT
0
SECOND
ADD
DEL
1 :
2 :
180
1
*3
*3
*3
3 :
4 :
5 :
*3
*3
X
X
6 :
*3
_
O
O
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
O
X
X
T
T
T
T
T
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
*1 : This does not appear when SYSTEM LINE is set to 1080 and SYSTEM FREQUENCY is set to 23.9P.
*2 : These items can be loaded when NETWORK DATA is set to ON on the ALL FILE page.
*3 : Initial values are different by value of SYSTEM FREQUENCY.
. When 59.94P, 59,94i, 29.97P: [1: 216.0 / 2: 180.0 / 3: 90.0 / 4: 45.0 / 5: 22.5 / 6 : 11.2]
. When 50P, 50i, 25P: [1: 180.0 / 2: 150.0 / 3: 90.0 / 4: 45.0 / 5: 22.5 / 6 : 11.2]
. When 23.98P: [1: 180.0 / 2: 172.8 / 3: 144.0 / 4: 45.0 / 5: 22.5 / 6 : 11.2]
4-122
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
REF
X
_
X
X
X
_
_
_
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
_
X
X
X
_
_
_
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
_
_
_
O
O
Initial value
Y when
R/G/B
_
X
Depends on X the GAIN switch setting.
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
X
X
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4. FILE Menu (1/2)
No.
Page
01 USER FILE
02 USER FILE 2
03 ALL FILE
04 SCENE FILE
05 REFERENCE
06 USER GAMMA
Setup Item F-SET
USER FILE LOAD
USER FILE SAVE
F.ID
USER PRESET
EXEC
EXEC
Blank
EXEC
STORE USR PRESET EXEC
CLEAR USR PRESET EXEC
CUSTOMIZE RESET EXEC
LOAD CUSTOM DATA OFF
LOAD OUT OF USER OFF
BEFORE FILE PAGE OFF
USER LOAD WHITE OFF
ALL FILE LOAD
ALL FILE SAVE
F.ID
EXEC
EXEC
Blank
ALL PRESET
STORE ALL PRESET
CLEAR ALL PRESET
3SEC CLR PRESET
NETWORK DATA
[] 1
[] 2
[] 3
[] 4
[] 5
[] STANDARD
SCENE RECALL
SCENE STORE
F.ID
REFERENCE STORE
REFERENCE CLEAR
REFERENCE LOAD
OFF X
STANDARD
_
STANDARD _
STANDARD _
STANDARD _
STANDARD
_
_
EXEC
_
EXEC
_
_
Blank
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
X
_
_
_
REFERENCE SAVE
F.ID
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
OFF
EXEC
Blank
_
X
_
_
_
X
SCENE WHITE DATA OFF
USER GAMMA LOAD EXEC
USER GAMMA RESET EXEC
F.ID
↓
F.ID
DATE
Blank
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
ALL PRST SCN
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
T
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
X
_
X
_
_
REF
_
_
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
Initial value X
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
X
_
_
_
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-123
FILE Menu (2/2)
No.
Page
07 LENS FILE 1
08
09
LENS FILE 2
LENS FILE 3
Setup Item F-SET
LENS FILE RECALL
LENS FILE STORE
F.ID
SOURCE
LENS NO OFFSET
EXEC
EXEC
No Offset _
MEMORY 1 _
EXEC
_
_
_
LENS AUTO RECALL OFF
S.No
L.ID
Depends on the Lens
_
Depends on the Lens
_
L.MF
LENS M VMOD
LENS CENTER H
LENS CENTER V
TEST OUT SELECT
0
0
Depends on the Lens
_
0
VBS
X
X
X
ALL PRST SCN
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
LENS R FLARE
LENS G FLARE
LENS B FLARE
LENS W-R OFST
LENS W-B OFST
SHADING CH SEL
TEST OUT SELECT
0
0
0
0
0
R
VBS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS R/G/B H SAW
M.S.IN > JUMP TO
0
LENS R/G/B H PARA 0
LENS R/G/B V SAW 0
LENS R/G/B V PARA 0
10 MEMORY STICK M.S.FORMAT
EXEC
OFF
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
_
_
REF
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
_
X
_
X
X
X
_
_
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
O Y when
R/G/B
Y when
R/G/B
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
4-124
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5. DIAGNOSIS Menu (1/2)
No.
Page Setup Item
01 HOURS METER OPERATION
LASER
OPERATION (rst)
SPINDLE (rst)
LOADING (rst)
SEEK (rst)
02 TIME/DATE ADJUST
HOUR
MIN
SEC
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
03 ROM VERSION 1 PACKAGE
SY1
SY2K
SY2U
DRV
AT
FP
04 ROM VERSION 2 LVIS
TSYS
TMBP
FAM
LABY
BRDG
PIER
CAVA
05 ROM VERSION 3 DSP0
DSP2
PRXA
F-SET ALL PRST SCN
000000H
000000
000000H
000000H
000000
000000H
EXEC
Internal clock _
Internal clock
_
Internal clock _
Internal clock _
Internal clock _
Internal clock _
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
ROM Version _
ROM Version
_
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
ROM Version
_
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
ROM Version
_
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
ROM Version _
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
REF
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-125
DIAGNOSIS Menu (2/2)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
06 DEV STATUS I/O
MS
FP
CN
DCP
VF
EEPROM
CN
DCP
DR
LSI
DCP1
DCP2
DCP3
DCP4
TG
D/A
DCP1
DCP2
DCP3
FRAM
AT
FAN
MB
SCI
OK
OK
SY OK
07 OPTION BOARD
RM
HD/SD-SDI INPUT
_
_
COMPOSITE INPUT _
OK
OK
OK
OK
_
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
_
OK
OK
OK
OK
REF
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
ALL PRST SCN
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
4-126
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
6. SERVICE Menu (1/4)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
01 MENU SET RE ROTATION REV OFF
RE SPEED 2
DIRECT VALUE
SERVICE RESET
FACTORY PRESET
GAIN DISP MODE
OFF
EXEC
EXEC dB 02 SP FUNC
KNEE 2ND POINT ON
03 WHITE SHADING WHT SHAD CH SEL R
TEST OUT SELECT VBS
05 SHADING
R/G/B WHT H SAW
R/G/B WHT V SAW
WHITE SAW/PARA
04 BLACK SHADING BLK SHAD CH SEL
TEST OUT SELECT
0
R/G/B WHT H PARA 0
0
R/G/B WHT V PARA 0
ON
R
VBS
R/G/B BLK H SAW
R/G/B BLK H PARA
R/G/B BLK V SAW
R/G/B BLK V PARA
BLACK SAW/PARA
MASTER BLACK
0
0
0
0
ON
0
MASTER GAIN(TMP) Depends on X the switch setting.
AUTO WHT SHADING EXEC
RESET WHT SHD
AUTO BLK SHADING
RESET BLK SHD
2D BLACK SHADING
EXEC
EXEC
EXEC
OFF
_
_
X
_
_
TEST OUT SELECT VBS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ALL PRST SCN
X
_
X
X
_
X
X
_
_ _
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
T
T
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
_
_
MASTER GAIN(TMP) Depends on X the switch setting.
_
_
_
_
X
T
X
X
X
X
T
O
T
T
T
X
X
X
X
REF
_
X
X
T
T
X
_
X
X
_
_
X
X
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
O
O
X
_
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
_
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
Initial value
Y when
R/G/B
_
_
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
ON
Y when
R/G/B
X
O
O
O
X
X
X
X
ON X
_
_
_
_
X
O
Depends on X the GAIN switch setting.
_
_
_
_
X O
Y when
R/G/B
Depends on X the GAIN switch setting.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
4-127
SERVICE Menu (2/4)
No.
Page
06 VCO ADJUST
CLK OUT SELECT OFF
HDCK (NTSC AREA) 0
HDCK (PAL AREA)
SDCK
07 CCD ADJUST 1 R CCD GAIN
0
0
0
G CCD GAIN
B CCD GAIN
R TEST SAW GAIN
G TEST SAW GAIN
B TEST SAW GAIN
TEST SAW
TEST OUT SELECT
0
0
0
0
0
OFF
VBS
08
09
CCD ADJUST 2
REGI ADJUST
Setup Item
TEST OUT SELECT
R VSUB
G VSUB
B VSUB
R VSUB OFST(P)
G VSUB OFST(P)
B VSUB OFST(P)
CCD H DRIVER
AD CLOCK PHASE
TEST OUT SELECT
R CCD REGI
B CCD REGI
R DCP REGI
B DCP REGI
DCP REGI PULSE
TEST OUT SELECT
F-SET
VBS
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
VBS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
Factory adjustment value
OFF
VBS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ALL PRST SCN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
4-128
REF
T
X
X
T
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X O Y when
R/G/B
Initial value X
X
X
O
X
X
X
O
X
X
X
X
X
Y when
R/G/B
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X X
X
X
O
X
Y when
R/G/B
X X
X X
X X
X
X
X
O
Initial value X
Y when
R/G/B
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
SERVICE Menu (3/4)
No.
Page
10 FBC ADJUST
Setup Item F-SET
FBC ADJUST MODE OFF
R FBC OFFSET 0
G FBC OFFSET
B FBC OFFSET
TEST OUT SELECT
0
0
VBS
11 LCD ADJUST
12 FLARE
LCD VCO ADJUST
LCD COM DC
LCD BLACK LIMIT
LCD PS BRIGHT
LCD BRIGHT
LCD BRIGHT R
LCD BRIGHT B
LCD CONTRAST
R FLARE
G FLARE
B FLARE
FLARE
TEST OUT SELECT
EXEC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
ON
VBS
13 GAMMA/DETAIL R GAMMA
G GAMMA
14 MANUAL RPN
B GAMMA
DETAIL LEVEL
TEST OUT SELECT
0
0
0
0
VBS
15
16 VDR
MAINTENANCE
17
RPN MANAGE
FAN
RPN CURSOR
SUPER(MENU)
RPN WIDTH
CURSOR H POS
CURSOR V POS
CURSOR JUMP
RECORD RPN
DELETE RPN
CONC (APR) RESET EXEC
CONC2(APR) RESET EXEC
RPN ALL PRESET EXEC
OFF
ON
1
960
540
CURR
EXEC
EXEC
AUTO CONCEAL
AUTO CONCEAL2
EXEC
EXEC
AUDIO A/D ADJUST EXEC
AUDIO D/A ADJUST EXEC
AU SIDE VOL ADJ EXEC
POWER A/D ADJUST EXEC
DRIVE MAINTE EXEC
SERVICE SUPPORT EXEC
FAN VOLT FIX OFF
FAN ROTATION DET OK
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
ALL PRST SCN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
T
REF
X
X
X
X
T
X
X
X
T
T
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Initial value
X
Y when
R/G/B
X
X
X
O
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
_
X
Y when
R/G/B
_
X
X
X
X
O Y when
R/G/B
Initial value X
Initial value X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
4-129
SERVICE Menu (4/4)
No.
Page Setup Item F-SET
18
19
20
MEASURE
FILTER CTEMP
BATTERY INFO
MEASUREMENT
MODE
FILTER CTEMP A
FILTER CTEMP B
FILTER CTEMP C
FILTER CTEMP D
TYPE
MFD DATE D/M/Y
CYCLE COUNT
CAPACITY
VOLTAGE
CURRENT
REMAINING(%)
OFF
3200
3200
4300
6300
----
--------
-----
-----mAh
--.-V
----mA
---%
X
MASTER BLACK 0
MASTER GAIN(TMP) Depends on X the switch setting.
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
ALL PRST SCN
X
O
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
REMAINING(MIN)
MODE
STATUS
21 HOUSE METER2 RESET METER
OPERATION
LASER
OPERATION (rst)
SPINDLE (rst)
LOADING (rst)
SEEK (rst)
AF DISPLAY 22 FUNCTION
LIMIT
23 S/H DC S/H DC ADJ MODE
TEST OUT SELECT
OFF
VBS
---M
----
----
EXEC
000000H
000000
000000H
000000H
000000
000000H
OFF
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
24 BOARD INFO
25 SERVICE FILE
S/H DC B Rch (1)
S/H DC B Gch (1)
S/H DC B Bch (1)
TG VERSION
SVC FILE LOAD
SVC FILE SAVE
F.ID
0
0
0 X
ROM Version _
EXEC
_
EXEC
Blank
_
X
X
X
_
X
_
_
X
_
_
X
X
_
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
X
_
_
X
X
_
X
X
T
REF
X
O
X
_
_
X
X
_
X
X
X
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
X
X
LENS STD Power OFF SVC
X X Initial value X
O
O
_
_
_
_
X
X
X
X
_
_
_
Depends on X the GAIN switch setting.
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
X
X
_
_
X
X
_
X
X
O
Initial value X
Y when
R/G/B
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
_
4-130
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Section 5
File System
5-1. Structure of File System
The PDW-F800 can save data modifications made in the setup menu, as files in the main unit itself and in a memory stick. The file system consists of the USER FILE, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE, REFERENCE
FILE and LENS FILE. For details of each file, refer to “4-1. Setup Menus”.
USER FILE
The USER file contains the customized USER menu items and its setups. Up to 100 files can be saved in a memory stick. When this file is saved in a memory stick, the USER menu can be set instantly to the users’ preferred setup by reading the USER file data from the memory stick.
ALL FILE
The ALL file contains the setups of all menus. Up to 100 files can be saved in a memory stick. By saving the ALL file in a memory stick after adjusting the first camera, the user can instantly set the same adjustment setup as the first camera to the second and subsequent cameras by reading the ALL file data from the memory stick.
SCENE FILE
The SCENE file contains the setup value of the paint items adjusted in accordance with the shooting scene. Up to 5 SCENE files can be set in the built-in memory, and up to 100 SCENE files in a memory stick. When an operator saves the setup data optimized for a specific scene during rehearsal, the operator can establish exactly the same setup for the actual take as in the rehearsal by calling the saved setup data.
REFERENCE FILE
The REFERENCE file contains the setup values that serve as a reference for implementing SCENE FILE
STANDARD. One file can be saved in the memory stick.
LENS FILE
The LENS file contains setup data that corrects the characteristics unique to each lens (flare, white shading, center marker position, white correction values). Up to 32 LENS files can be saved in the builtin memory, and up to 100 files can be saved in a memory stick.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-1
5-2. Data Structure
Each menu item can be classified into the categories of USER, OPERATION, PAINT and MAINTE-
NANCE. In addition to these categories, each menu item has different data in the USER layer (not the
USER menu), PRESET layer, SERVICE layer (not the SERVICE menu) and FACTORY layer.
USER layer: Data layer that can be changed by menu operation.
PRESET layer: Data layer to be registered as the standard setup.
SERVICE layer: Data layer that can be changed by a service engineer after entering the Service mode
*1
.
For users, this layer is identical to the factory default setup.
FACTORY layer: Data layer that contains factory-adjusted values and fixed values.
*1: Refer to “4-1-2. How to Display the SERVCE Menu” for entering the service mode.
USER
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE SERVICE
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
The USER layer, PRESET layer, SERVICE layer and FACTORY layer contain absolute values. The data in the USER layer, which is at the top, is used as the actual setup value.
Regarding the items that change continuously such as DETAIL LEVEL (hereafter referred to as analog data) in the MENU display, when the data in the PRESET layer are changed by performing REFERENCE
LOAD (refer to step 4 in 5-3-3) or a similar process that displays the differential values between the
USER layer and the PRESET layer (USER mode), the MENU display changes according to the data in the PRESET layer. However, the values actually set do not change. In the Service mode, the MENU display for the analog data shows the differential values between the SERVICE layer and the FACTORY layer.
Location where the data of each layer is saved:
USER, PRESET and SERVICE layers: FRAM (AT-177 board)
FACTORY layer: EEPROM (CN-3005, DCP-49A and DR-617 boards) and ROM
(fixed value)
5-2
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-3. Operating the Files and the Data Flow
5-3-1. USER FILE
1.
Initializing all the items in the USER menu to the default values. (USER PRESET)
When executing USER PRESET in the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 1 <F01>, all the items in the USER menu is initialized to the default values.
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
USER
Executing USER PRESET:
Copy the data in the PRESET layer of the USER menu items to the USER layer.
2.
Registering the setups of the USER menu as the default values. (STORE USER PRESET)
When executing STORE USER PRESET on the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 2
<F02>, all the USER menu items are stored as the default values.
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
USER
Executing STORE USER PRESET:
Copy the data in the PRESET layer of the USER menu items to the USER layer.
3.
Initializing all the USER menu setups to the factory default values. (CLEAR USER PRESET)
When executing CLEAR USR PRESET on the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 2
<F02>, all the items in the USER menu are initialized to the factory default values.
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
USER
Executing CLEAR USER PRESET:
Copy the data in the SERVICE layer of the USER menu items to the USER and PRESET layers.
n
After USER PRESET, STORE USER PRESET, or CLEAR USER PRESET is performed, the
MENU display for the analog data shows “0”.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-3
4.
Saving the setups of the USER menu in the memory stick. (USER FILE SAVE)
When executing USER FILE SAVE on the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 1 <F01>, all the USER menu items are saved as USER FILE in the memory stick.
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
USER
Memory stick
Executing USER FILE SAVE:
Save the data of the USER layer of the USER menu items in the memory stick.
n
The contents of USER CUSTOMIZE MENU and the WHITE BALANCE data are also saved in the memory stick.
5.
Calling the USER file saved in the memory stick. (USER FILE LOAD)
When executing USER FILE LOAD on the USER FILE page under the FILE menu page 1 <F01>, the USER FILE saved in the memory stick are called to the USER layer.
When the same USER FILE is loaded to two units, the same settings are reflected to the both units, but if the data in the PRESET layer are different, the MENU display shows different values.
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
USER
Memory stick
Executing USER FILE LOAD:
Call the USER FILE saved in the memory stick to the data in the USER layer of the USER menu items.
n
There are LOAD OPTION setups such as the one to choose whether or not to load the contents of
USER CUSTOMIZE MENU when loading the data from the memory stick.
. LOAD CUSTOM DATA: Setup to choose whether or not to call the data to customize the menu
. LOAD OUT OF USER:
Setup to choose whether or not to have the data saved in the memory stick call the items that do not exist in the current customized USER menu
. BEFORE FILE PAGE: Setup to choose whether or not to call the USER FILE data saved in the memory stick to the setup data contained in the pages after the USER
FILE page, when the USER menu contains the USER FILE page of
FILE menu
. USER LOAD WHITE: Setup to choose whether or not to call the WHITE BALANCE data saved in the USER FILE
5-4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-3-2. ALL FILE
n
Refer to “4-16. Setup Menu List” for the items of object. (ALL: ALL FILE object items.
PRESET: ALL PRESET object items.)
1.
Returning the items in the ALL file to the preset value. (ALL PRESET)
When executing ALL PRESET on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 <F03>, the ALL
FILE items (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE and FILE) are returned to the default values.
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
Executing ALL PRESET:
Copy the data stored in the PRESET layer of the ALL PRESET object items to the USER layer.
2.
Setting the preset values of the ALL PRESET object items. (STORE ALL PRESET)
When executing STORE ALL PRESET on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 <F03>, the ALL FILE items (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE and
FILE) are saved as the default values.
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
Executing STORE ALL PRESET:
Copy the data stored in the USER layer of the ALL PRESET object items to the PRESET layer.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-5
3.
Clearing the preset value of the ALL PRESET object items. (CLEAR ALL PRESET)
When executing CLEAR ALL PRESET on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 <F03>, the value of the ALL FILE items (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTE-
NANCE and FILE) are initialized to the factory default value
*1
.
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
Executing CLEAR ALL PRESET:
Copy the data stored in the SERVICE layer of the ALL PRESET object items to the USER and
PRESET layers.
*1: As the users will use the values set in the service mode as the factory default value, be sure to handle the setup values with care in the service mode.
4.
Saving the setups of the ALL FILE object items in the memory stick. (ALL FILE SAVE)
When executing ALL FILE SAVE on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 <F03>, the data of the USER and PRESET layers of ALL FILE object items (corresponding items among
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE and FILE) are saved to the memory stick as ALL FILE.
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
Memory stick
Executing ALL FILE SAVE:
Save the data of the USER and PRESET layers of the ALL FILE object items in the memory stick.
5.
Calling the ALL FILE saved in the memory stick. (ALL FILE LOAD)
When executing ALL FILE LOAD on the ALL FILE page under the FILE menu page 3 <F03>, ALL
FILE stored in the memory stick are called to the USER layer and the PRESET layer of the ALL
FILE object items (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE and FILE).
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
Memory stick
Executing ALL FILE LOAD:
Call ALL FILE stored in the memory stick to the USER and PRESET layers of the ALL FILE object items.
5-6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-3-3. REFERENCE FILE
The REFERENCE FILE data is the same as the one in the PRESET layer. The difference is that the items to be handled as REFERENCE FILE in the PRESET layer are limited.
n
Refer to “4-16. Setup Menu List” for the items of the REFERENCE FILE.
Data
Structure
Menu
PRESET layer
USER
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE SERVICE
REFERENCE FILE items
1.
Saving the REFERENCE FILE in the built-in memory of the PDW-F800. (REFERENCE STORE)
When executing REFERENCE STORE on the REFERENCE page under the FILE menu page 5
<F05>, the REFERENCE FILE items (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT and
MAINTENANCE) are saved as the default values.
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
Executing REFERENCE STORE:
Copy the data stored in the USER layer of the REFERENCE FILE items to the PRESET layer.
2.
Initializing all the REFERENCE FILE setups to the factory default values. (REFERENCE CLEAR)
When executing REFERENCE CLEAR on the REFERENCE page under the FILE menu page 5
<F05>, the REFERENCE FILE items (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT and
MAINTENANCE) are initialized to the factory default value
*1
.
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
Executing REFERENCE CLEAR:
Copy the data stored in the SERVICE layer of the REFERENCE FILE items to the USER and
PRESET layers.
*1: As the users will use the values set in the service mode as the factory default value, be sure to handle the setup values with care in the service mode.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-7
3.
Saving the REFERENCE FILE in the memory stick. (REFERENCE SAVE)
When executing REFERENCE SAVE on the REFERENCE page under the FILE menu page 5
<F05>, the data of the PRESET layer of the REFERENCE FILE items (corresponding items among
OPERATION, PAINT and MAINTENANCE) are saved as REFERENCE FILE in the memory stick.
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
Memory stick
Executing REFERENCE SAVE:
Save the data of the PRESET layer of the REFERENCE FILE items in the memory stick.
4.
Calling the REFERENCE FILE saved in the memory stick. (REFERENCE LOAD)
When executing REFERENCE LOAD on the REFERENCE page on the FILE menu page 5 <F05>, the REFERENCE FILE are called to the PRESET layer of the REFERENCE FILE item (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT and MAINTENANCE).
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
Memory stick
Executing REFERENCE LOAD:
Call the REFERENCE FILE stored in the memory stick to the data on the PRESET layer of the
REFERENCE FILE items.
n
Some of the menu items are displayed as the setup data for the newly called REFERENCE (reference value).
(E.g.) DETAIL LEVEL
Display value of PAINT menu: 10
REFERENCE value: 20
Output value: 30
REFERENCE value saved in the memory stick: _10
(Execute REFERENCE LOAD)
Display value of the PAINT menu: 40
REFERENCE value: _10
Output value: 30 (No difference in the output values before and after execution)
5-8
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-3-4. Other FILE (SCENE FILE and LENS FILE)
There is no hierarchical layer structure for the data of SCENE FILE and LENS FILE. The USER layer and the memory area of each file handle all the data.
Data
Structure
Menu
PRESET layer
USER
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE SERVICE
Internal memory
FILE 1
FILE 2
FILE 3
FILE 4
FILE 5
SCENE FILE items
Memory stick
SCENE FILE 1
:
:
:
SCENE FILE 100
LENS FILE items
Memory stick
LENS FILE 1
:
:
:
LENS FILE 100
Internal memory
FILE 1
:
:
:
FILE 16
FILE 32 n
Refer to “4-16. Setup Menu List” for the items of SCENE FILE, LENS FILE and STANDARD.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-9
5-3-5. SERVICE FILE
When the system enters the service mode, most of the items in all the menus belong to the SERVICE layer. If changes are made in the data, the changed data will be saved as the data belonging to the SER-
VICE layer.
1.
Saving the setups for the items to be included in the SERVICE FILE in the memory stick. (SERVICE
FILE SAVE)
When executing SVC FILE SAVE on the SERVICE FILE page under the SERVICE menu page 25
<S25>, the data of the SERVICE FILE items (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT,
MAINTENANCE FILE and SERVICE) belonging to the SERVICE layer are saved as SERVICE
FILE in the memory stick.
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE SERVICE
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
Memory stick
Executing USER FILE SAVE:
Save the data in the SERVICE layer of the SERVICE FILE item in the memory stick.
2.
Calling the SERVICE FILE saved in the memory stick. (SERVICE FILE LOAD)
When executing SVC FILE LOAD on the SERVICE FILE page under the SERVICE menu page 25
<S25>, the data of the SERVICE FILE (corresponding items among OPERATION, PAINT, MAIN-
TENANCE, FILE and SERVICE) stored in the memory stick are called to the SERVICE layer of the
SERVICE FILE item.
Data
Structure
USER layer
Menu
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE SERVICE
Memory stick
Executing SVC FILE LOAD:
Call the SERVICE FILE stored in the memory stick to the data in the PRESET layer of the SER-
VICE FILE items.
5-10
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-3-6. Other RESET
This section describes SERVICE RESET and FACTORY PRESET in the SERVICE menu.
1.
Resetting the data changed in the SERVICE mode. (SERVICE RESET)
When executing SERVICE RESET on the MENU SET page under the SERVICE menu page 1
<S01>, the setups changed in the SERVICE mode are initialized to the factory default value.
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE SERVICE
Executing SERVICE RESET:
Copy the data in the FACTORY layer to the SERVICE layer.
2.
Initializing all the setup data to the factory default values. (FACTORY PRESET)
When executing FACTORY RESET on the MENU SET page under SERVICE menu page 1 <S01>, all the changed setups except for the DIAGNOSIS menu are initialized to the default value.
Data
Structure
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
OPERA-
TION
PAINT
MAINTE-
NANCE
FILE SERVICE
Executing FACTORY PRESET:
Copy the data stored in the FACTORY layer to the SERVICE, PRESET and USER layers.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-11
5-4. Special Items to Save
5-4-1. White Gain
Using the ALL FILE
Executing item
ALL FILE SAVE
(FILE menu/ALL FILE page)
ALL FILE LOAD
(FILE menu/ALL FILE page)
STORE ALL PRESET
(FILE menu/ALL page)
CLEAR ALL PRESET
(FILE menu/ALL FILE page)
ALL PRESET
(FILE menu/ALL FILE page)
Using the REFERENCE FILE
Executing item
REFERENCE STORE
(FILE menu/REFERENCE page)
REFERENCE CLEAR
(FILE menu/REFERENCE page)
Status after execution
All the values of the white gain are saved in the ALL FILE. (Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)
All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the value of ALL FILE.
(Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)
The value of the preset white gain specified on the MAINTENANCE menu/PRESET WHT page is saved as the value of the PRESET layer (identical to the value of the REFERENCE FILE).
All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the factory default value.
(Filter A/B/C/D, WHITE BAL A/B)
The PRESET WHITE R/B GAIN is also changed to the factory default value.
All the values of the white gain are overwritten to the value of PRESET layer.
Status after execution
The current value of the white gain at the time of execution is saved in REFERENCE FILE.
(When the WHITE BAL switch is A, the saved value is A. When B, the saved value is B.
When PRST, the saved value is PRST.)
If REFERENCE STORE is executed when the WHITE BAL switch is A or B, the preset WHITE
GAIN to be specified in the MAINTENANCE menu/PRESET WHT page is also overwritten to the value of the saved WHITE GAIN.
When the WHITE BAL switch is A at the time of execution, R/B GAIN of A becomes the default value. When the WHITE BAL switch is B, R/B GAIN of B becomes the factory default value.
PRESET WHITE R. B GAIN becomes the default value irrespective of the BAL switch.
Using the SCENE FILE
Executing item
SCENE STORE
(FILE menu/SCENE FILE page)
SCENE RECALL
(FILE menu/SCENE FILE page)
SCENE STANDARD
(FILE menu/SCENE FILE page)
Status after execution
The current value of the white gain at the time of execution is saved in the SCENE FILE.
(When the WHITE BAL switch is A, the saved value is A. When B, the saved value is B.
When PRST, the saved value is PRST.)
The current value of the WHITE GAIN at the time execution is overwritten to that of the SCENE file only when “SCENE WHITE DATA” is set to ON in the FILE menu/REFERENCE page.
(When the WHITE BAL switch is A, the value of A is overwritten. When it is B, the value of B is overwritten.)
However, the value of the preset WHITE GAIN is retained when the WHITE BAL switch is PRST.
The current value of the WHITE GAIN at the time of execution is overwritten to that of the
REFERENCE file only when “SCENE WHITE DATA” is set to ON in the FILE menu/
REFERENCE page.
5-12
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-4-2. Master Gain
The Master Gain value can be saved in the REFERENCE FILE and in the SCENE FILE. When the
PDW-F800 is used in a standalone manner, the hardware switches are prioritized, so the saved value cannot be read out. When the PDW-F800 is connected to the remote controller, the value of the master gain can be read from each file and is retained until a change is made. (The value is retained even after the power is turned off.) When the RM-B150 is connected, the hardware switches of the RM-B150 take precedence.
5-4-3. Shutter
The values of SHUTTER ON/OFF, ECS frequency and SHUTTER SEL can be saved in the SCENE
FILE. When the PDW-F800 is used in a standalone manner, the value of the ECS frequency and SHUT-
TER SEL can be read. The values are retained until a change is made. (The values are retained even after the power is turned off.)
(The hardware switches are prioritized for SHUTTER ON/OFF, so the saved value cannot be read out.)
When the PDW-F800 is connected to the remote controller, the value of SHUTTER SEL can be read out.
The value is retained until a change is made. (The values are retained even after the power is turned off.)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
5-13
Section 6
Periodic Maintenance and Inspection
6-1. Periodic Check/Replacement Parts List
This table does not describe the guarantee period of each part.
The replacement period of each part is changed according to the environment and condition.
Part to Be
Replaced
Hours Meter
(Menu item)
Check/Replacement
Period
Parts Number and
Name
Optical block assembly
Seek motor
Laser parameter
(LASER PARAMETER)
Seek running hours
(SEEK RUNNING)
Laser parameter
(LASER PARAMETER)
Replace every 6000.
Replace every 12000 H.
! 8-820-389-02
KES-330A/J1RP
A-1374-689-A
Seek motor assembly
A-1256-291-A
Cleaner (P100) assembly
Cleaner assembly Check every 6000.
Replace when bristles of brush become sparse or damaged remarkably.
PS-708 board
Lithium battery
Loader assembly
Battery connector
Laser parameter
(LASER PARAMETER)
Current-carrying hours
(OPERATION)
Disc loading count
(LOADING)
*
Current-carrying hours
(OPERATION)
Replace around the same time as optical block assembly.
About 5 years
Replace every 110,000 times.
About 5 years
A-1164-283-A
PS-708 board
! 1-528-174-31
Lithium battery (CR2032)
A-1256-958-B
Loader (P100) assembly
(RP)
1-820-459-21
Battery connector
* : This count differs from the actual disc insertion times because the loader up/down count is made by the normal loading operation.
PDW-F800V1 (E)
6-1
6-2. Cleaning
To make the most of the functions, fully realize the performance of this unit, and to lengthen the life of the unit and cartridge, clean the components often.
6-2-1. General Information for the Use of
Cleaning Cloth
1. Cautions
. Be sure turn the power off before cleaning.
. Each block in the drive consists of precision parts and is adjusted precisely. Be careful not to damage the parts and to apply excessive force during cleaning.
. Do not insert a cartridge before cleaning fluid completely evaporates after cleaning.
2. Preparation
(1) Turn the power off.
(2) Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6-2-2. Cleaning Loader Assembly
Precautions
The loader assembly consists of precision parts.
Be careful not to damage and give excessive force to the parts.
Cleaning Procedure
Tools
. Cleaning cloth (or cotton swab)
. Cleaning fluid (alcohol)
Procedure
1.
Clean the eject levers in the loader assembly using the cleaning cloth (or cotton swab) with the cleaning fluid soaked.
Eject levers
Loader assembly
6-2
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
6-2-3. Cleaning Spindle Motor
Precautions
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before cleaning the drive assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
. The drive assembly consists of precision parts.
Be careful not to damage and give excessive force to the parts.
Cleaning Procedure
Tools
. Cleaning cloth (or cotton swab)
. Cleaning fluid (alcohol)
Procedure
1.
Remove dust and dirt attached to the turntable of the spindle motor and the cartridge guide supports using the cleaning cloth (or cotton swabs) with the cleaning fluid soaked.
n
After the cleaning, ensure that fibers of the cleaning cloth
(or cotton swab) are not attached on the spindle motor.
Turntable
Spindle motor
Cartridge guide support
6-2-4. Cleaning Pickup Lens
Error codes “02-020” may be displayed due to smudged optical pickup lens. (Refer to Section 3-2-2.)
If “02-020” is displayed, be sure to clean the pickup lens referring to “LENS CLEANING Menu”.
(Refer to Section 4-10-17.) n
Before cleaning, be sure to unload the disc from the unit.
PDW-F800V1 (E)
6-3
6-3. Cares after Using under Special Environment
Checking the followings is recommended when returned from the news gathering at seaside, at the dusty locations, at hot spring, or if the unit is heavily splashed with water or water leaks in the unit in the rough weather or the like.
1.
Carefully clean off sand and dust that entered the unit with airbrush or the like.
2.
If salt contained in seawater or sulfur contained in hot spring attaches to the non-painted surface of outer cabinet, the cabinet may corrode in white.
If it attaches, wipe it off immediately with alcohol.
3.
If water leaks inside the unit, turn off the power and dry the unit with hair-dryer and so on. Check especially that water does not remain in the CCD block or the power supply block.
n
If the unit is not taken care of appropriately, corrosion may occur inside that may cause fire and electric shock.
4.
Clean out the contacting surface of connectors.
5.
Perform the general operational check and confirm that no abnormal sound is heard from inside the unit or the unit operates correctly without any abnormality.
6-4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
6-4. Digital Hours Meter
The hours meter has six types of display mode. The operation hours or operation count of the PDW-F800 can be accumulated for each mode and displayed on the viewfinder.
The hours meter can be reset as desired.
Use the hours meter as a reference for periodic inspection.
The display can also be checked on the HOURS METER page of the DIAGNOSIS menu (Cannot be reset in the DIAGNOSIS menu). Display and reset are carried out by using the HOURS METER 2 page in the
SERVICE menu.
Description of HOURS METER 2 page (SERVICE menu)
For the description of the HOURS METER 2 page of the SERVICE menu, refer to Section 4 “4-9. Service
Menu”.
6-4-1. Display Method and Reset Methods
Refer to “4-9. SERVICE Menu” for the display of the SERVICE menu.
Reset Methods
1.
Display the SERVICE menu. (Refer to “4-9. SERVICE Menu” .)
(TOP MENU is displayed on the viewfinder screen.)
2.
Select “SERVICE” from the TOP MENU and press the MENU knob.
3.
Rotate the MENU knob to scroll the screen up to HOURS METER 2, and press the knob.
4.
Rotate the MENU knob to move the cursor onto RESET METER , and press the knob. Move to the
RESET METER screen.
5.
Rotate the MENU knob to move the cursor to the desired hours meter.
6.
Press the MENU knob. The accumulated time of the selected hours meter is reset.
RESET METER ESC
RESET OPERATION HOURS
RESET SPINDLE RUN HOURS
RESET LASER PARAMETER
RESET LOADING COUNTER
RESET SEEK RUN HOURS
RESET ALL METERS
Resets the power-on hours.
Resets the spindle rotation time.
Resets the light output counter value for the optical head.
Resets the number of times the disc has been loaded.
Resets the seek operation time for the optical head.
Resets all the hour meters.
PDW-F800V1 (E)
6-5
6-5. Recommended Replacement Parts
This section describes the recommended replacement parts and recommended replacement time.
14
13
3
17
4
13
14
20
10
19
6
19
9
7
1
15
8
16
11
5
18
21
12
6-6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Recommended replacement parts
ID
4
5
1
3
Part name
Cover BNC (PH3)
Eye cup kit (RP)
Wind screen
Filter unit, optical
Sony part No.
3-870-160-01
A-8319-943-B
A-1096-362-A
1-788-765-11
Recommended replacement timing
Check for deformation and deterioration (abraded or damaged or lost) from time to time.
Replace it as necessary.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
8
9
6
7
10
11
12
Cover (handle), connector
Protector
3-870-237-01
3-870-158-01
Cover, headphone jack 3-870-140-01
Cover (XLR), drop protection 3-870-246-02
Cap ME
Foot, rubber
Pad assembly, shoulder
3-870-253-02
3-723-097-01
A-8279-878-G
GEL, MIC
Tape (A)
Light connector cover
Holder lens mount
Battery connector
Ring, mount
Collar, suspension
Cover bottom, handle
3-854-132-01
3-941-343-01
3-877-892-01
3-796-982-02
1-820-459-21
3-186-442-01
3-654-615-02
3-796-975-02
It can become nebulous (intransparent and whitened) with elapse of time.
Then it will not meet the required characteristics. Replace it as needed.
Check for deformation and deterioration (abraded or damaged or lost) from time to time.
Replace it as necessary.
Replace every 5 years.
Check for deformation and deterioration (abraded or damaged or lost) from time to time.
Replace it as necessary.
21 VTR start button 3-986-632-02 Replace every about 3 years, or check for deformation and deterioration
(abraded or damaged or lost) from time to time.
Replace it as necessary.
*
* : When the part is replaced, apply the instant adhesive (Loctite 408 or equivalent) to the whole area of the flange from the back side with care not to ooze out to cosmetic surface.
PDW-F800V1 (E)
6-7
6-6. Precautions for the Battery Connector
The battery connector in this unit is consumable parts. Replace ever about 5 years.
If the terminal of connector is deformed or bends due to vibrations or shock, or if the surface of the terminal corrodes due to long-term outside use or other similar use, the unit may malfunction.
Replace the battery connector immediately if the terminal is deformed or bends, or if the surface color changes. (Refer to Section 1-7-10.)
6-7. Precaution on Hanging Bracket of Handle
. If the Suspension Collar of the Hanging Bracket is deteriorated (abraded or damaged or lost);
→ Replace the Suspension Collar (3-654-615-02).
. If the Hanging Bracket itself is deformed or becomes loose;
→ Replace the Handle Sub Assembly (A-1541-491-A).
Suspension Collar State when the
Suspension Collar is lost
6-8
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Section 7
Replacement of Main Parts
This section explains the replacement procedures of periodic replacement parts, main mechanical parts, and circuit boards.
7-1. Optical Drive Assembly
7-1-1. Removing/Reinstalling Loader Assembly
m
. When a cartridge is already being inserted in the unit, be sure to take it out beforehand. If you cannot take out the cartridge with normal operation, refer to “1-6. How to Take Out a Cartridge Manually”.
. The loader assembly require periodic replacement, Refer to “6-1. Periodic Check/Replacement Parts
List” for details.
. The optical block assembly in the drive may be damaged by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes.
Therefore, be sure to establish a ground before starting an operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
. Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded. Flexible board is easily cut. Be very careful not to fold them.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-1
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
Cover sheet
Adhesive sheet
Corner block
5.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector (CN1) on the SW-1125G board.
6.
Fully loosen the two screws fixing the loader assembly and remove it in the direction of the arrow “A”.
n
These screws have a drop-safe so that the screws cannot be removed from the loader assembly.
7.
Remove the loader assembly in the direction of the arrow “B”, and disconnect the harness from the connector (CN709) on the SE-857 board.
m
. Be careful not to lose the two LD spacers.
. The spindle motor has an intense powerful magnet. Remove the loader assembly, being careful not to be attracted by the magnetic force or not to be caught by the edge of the spindle motor.
CN1/SW-1125G board
Flexible card wire
A
B
Loader assembly
Screws
(Drop-safe)
Harness
CN709
/SE-857 board
LD spacer
7-2
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Reinstallation
n
When installing, take care so that the torsion spring and CL spring do not come off.
1.
Rotate the gear (A) to move the cartridge holder in the direction of the arrow until it will stop.
Cartridge holder
Tension spring
CL spring
Cleaner assembly
Loader assembly
Gear(A)
2.
Connect the harness to the connector
(CN709) on the SE-857 board.
3.
Insert the upper part of the loader assembly underneath the portion “A” of the base plate assembly, and align the four positioning pins of the base plate assembly with the four holes of the loader assembly as shown in Fig.1.
4.
Reinstall the loader assembly in the base plate assembly, and fix it using the two screws with drop-safe stoppers.
n
Confirm that the LD spacer is correctly installed in the positioning pin-A (at two locations).
5.
Connect the flexible card wire to the connector (CN1) on the SW-1125G board.
6.
Reinstall the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
Base plate assembly
Loader assembly
Hole
Pin-B
Fig.1
Loader assembly
Hole
Base plate assembly
A
Pin-A
LD spacer
Loader assembly
CN1/SW-1125G board
Flexible card wire
Hole
Pin-B
Pin-A
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Harness
CN709/SE-857 board
7-3
7.
Reinstall the corner block.
n
When reinstall the corner block, replace an adhesive sheet with a new one.
(Adhesive sheet : 3-870-265-01)
8.
Reinstall the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
9.
Reinstall the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-2.)
Corner block
Adhesive sheet
7-4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-1-2. Removing/Reinstalling Drive Sub Assembly
m
. The optical block assembly in the drive may be damaged by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes.
Therefore, be sure to establish a ground before starting an operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
. Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded. Flexible board is easily cut. Be very careful not to fold them.
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Disconnect the flexible board (DR-SE857) from the connector (CN600) on the SE-857 board.
7.
Disconnect the flexible board (DR-SE858) from the connector (CN600) on the SE-858 board.
8.
Disconnect the flexible board (DR-OP) from the connector on the optical block assembly.
9.
Remove the four step screws, and draw out the drive sub assembly in the direction of the arrow “A” and then of the arrow “B”.
CN600/
SE-858 board
Connector/
Optical block
Flexible card wire
(DR-SE858)
Flexible card wire
(DR-OP)
CN600/
SE-857 board
Flexible card wire
(DR-SE857)
Drive sub assembly
Step screws
B
A
Step screws
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-5
Reinstallation
1.
Reinstall the drive sub assembly with the four step screws.
Tightening torque:
53 x 10
_2
±0.01 N.m (5.3 x 0.1 kgf.cm)
Drive sub assembly
Step screws
2.
Connect the flexible board (DR-OP) to the connector on the optical block assembly.
3.
Connect the flexible board (DR-SE858) to the connector (CN600) on the SE-858 board.
n
Place the flexible board (DR-SE858) in the way that it is routed in between the motor and the chassis.
4.
Connect the flexible board (DR-SE857) to the connector (CN600) on the SE-857 board.
5.
Reinstall the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Reinstall the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
7.
Reinstall the corner block.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
8.
Reinstall the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
9.
Reinstall the outside panel.
(Refer to Section 1-7-2.)
Step screws
CN600/
SE-858 board
Connector/
Optical block
Flexible board
(DR-SE858)
Motor
Flexible board
(DR-SE858)
Flexible board
(DR-OP)
Flexible board
(DR-SE857)
CN600/
SE-857 board
7-6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-1-3. Replacing Cleaner Assembly
m
. The Cleaner assembly requires periodic check. Refer to “6-1. Periodic Check/Replacement Parts List” for details.
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Remove the screw, and remove the cleaner assembly.
m
. Be careful not to deform the loader assembly.
. Take care so that the CL spring does not come off.
7.
While pressing portion A on the back of the loader assembly with fingers, remove the screw to remove the cleaner assembly.
m
. When installing, take care so that the CL spring does not come off.
. When tightening the screw, support the loader assembly with fingers not to deform it.
Special screw
2 x 2
Cleaner assembly
Loader assembly
A
Support this part from the back side with fingers.
CL spring
8.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-7
7-1-4. Replacing Loading Motor Assembly
m
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
Fixtures
. locking compound
1.
Remove the outside panel.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Remove the SE-709 board.
(Refer to Section 7-2-1.)
7.
Remove the two screws, and remove the motor bracket assembly and the loading motor assembly.
n
When reassembling, apply locking compound to the two screws.
Motor bracket assembly
Loader assembly
Precision
P2 x 2.5
Loading motor assembly
8.
Remove the two screws to detach the loading motor assembly.
n
Take care so that the worm stopper does not come off.
Loading motor assembly
Worm stopper
Label
Motor bracket assembly
9.
Install a new loading motor assembly by reversing steps 1 to 8.
7-8
Precision
P2 x 2.5
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-1-5. Replacing Optical Block Assembly
m
. The optical block assembly requires periodic replacement. Refer to “6-1. Periodic Check/Replacement
Parts List” for details.
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before cleaning the drive assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a metallic material such as a screwdriver, reflection block and so on hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
. Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded. Flexible board is easily cut. Be very careful not to fold them.
Fixtures
. Cleaning liquid
. Cleaning cloth
. Parallel pin (2 x 20) : 1
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector on the optical block assembly.
7.
Remove the three screws from the OP position sensor on the SE-858 board.
8.
Move the OP position sensor and press the die-casting part of the optical block assembly until entire OP rack assembly is visible.
9.
Insert the parallel pin into the hole of the OP rack assembly.
Optical block assembly
OP rack assembly
Flexible card wire
Parallel pin
Screw
(M1.7)
Optical block assembly
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
OP position sensor
Screw (M1.7) Tightening : 10 x 10 _2 ±
0.01 N
.
m {1.0
±0.1 kgf .
cm}
7-9
10. Remove the two flat-head screws from the main shaft.
n
Do not turn the two screws that secure the sub shaft.
11. Move the OP position sensor, and remove the optical block assembly and the main shaft.
Optical block assembly
K2.6 x 8
Main shaft
Sub shaft
Do not turn these screws.
OP position sensor
Cleaning
1.
Clean the spindle motor.
(Refer to Section 6-2-3.)
Replacement
1.
Detach the main shaft from the removed optical block assembly, and clean the main shaft using a cleaning cloth with cleaning fluid soaked.
2.
Clean the sub shaft using a cleaning cloth with cleaning fluid soaked.
3.
Remove the screw to remove the OP rack assembly and the OP stopper rubber.
4.
Install the OP stopper rubber and the OP rack assembly onto a new optical block assembly with a screw.
Tightening torque:
10
x 10 _2
±0.01 N.m (1.0 ±0.1 kgf.cm) m
. If the OP stopper rubber is deformed or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.
. Be careful so that the OP stopper rubber does not come out of the both ends (portion
A) of the OP rack assembly.
5.
Pass the main shaft through the new optical block assembly.
7-10
Optical block assembly
Main shaft
OP stopper rubber
A
OP rack assembly
Screw (M1.7)
A
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Reinstallation
1.
Align the upper and lower holes of the OP rack assembly while pressing the both ends of the OP rack assembly, and insert the parallel pin into the holes.
2.
Move the OP position sensor, insert the guide into the sub shaft, and install the optical block assembly and the main shaft.
m
. Install these parts so that the gear of the OP rack assembly is properly engaged with the gear of the No.3 gear assembly.
. The laser part of the optical block assembly is precisely positioned. Do not hit the laser part against the sub shaft or the chassis when installing the optical block assembly.
3.
Press the connector of the optical block assembly to move the optical block assembly to the spindle motor.
4.
Install the main shaft with the two flat-head screws.
Tightening torque:
20
x 10 _2
±0.01 N.m (2.0 ±0.1 kgf.cm) n
Do not turn the two screws that secure the sub shaft.
5.
Pull out the parallel pin.
6.
Press the die-casting part or the connector of the optical block assembly, and check the following:
. The optical block assembly moves smoothly.
. The OP rack assembly and the No.3 gear assembly are not disengaged.
7.
Install the OP position sensor with three screws in the order of the numbers in the figure.
Tightening torque:
10 x 10
_2
±0.01 N.m (1.0 ±0.1 kgf.cm)
8.
Connect the flexible card wire to the connector on the optical block assembly.
9.
Perform the optical drive adjustment.
(Refer to Section 8.)
10. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 of removal.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Parallel pin
Optical block assembly
Guide
K2.6 x 8
Laser part
Main shaft
Sub shaft
No.3
gear assembly
Do not turn these screws.
OP position sensor
OP position sensor
Screw
(M1.7)
2
3
1
7-11
7-1-6. Replacing No.2/No.3 Gear Assemblies
m
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
Fixtures
. Parallel pin (2 x 20) : 2
. Stopper washer : 2
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Remove the drive sub assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-2.)
7.
Reverse the drive sub assembly.
n
Do not to put the drive sub assembly reversed on anywhere. If it is put, this may cause damage to the spindle motor or the optical block assembly.
8.
Align the position of the upper and the lower holes of the No.3 gear, and insert the parallel pin.
9.
Move the optical block assembly to the position shown in the figure while pressing the die-casting part of the optical block assembly.
10. Align the upper and lower holes of the OP rack assembly while pressing the both ends of the OP rack assembly, and insert the parallel pin into the holes.
11. Remove the stopper washer, and remove the
No.3 gear assembly.
12. Remove the stopper washer, and remove the
No.2 gear.
7-12
Parallel pin
No.3 gear assembly
Stopper washer
Stopper washer
No.2 gear
Parallel pin
Optical block assembly
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Reinstallation
1.
Install the No.2 gear onto the base plate shaft.
2.
Align the upper and lower holes of the No.3
gear assembly while turning the No.3 gear assembly, and insert the parallel pin into the holes.
3.
Install the No.3 gear assembly onto the base plate.
n
Install the No.3 gear assembly so that the gear of the No.3 gear assembly is properly engaged with the gear of the OP rack assembly and with the No.2 gear.
4.
Attach two stopper washers to the two shafts of the base plate.
5.
Pull out the two parallel pins.
6.
Press the die-casting part or the connector of the optical block assembly, and check the following:
. The optical block assembly moves smoothly.
. The OP rack assembly and the No.3 gear assembly are not disengaged.
7.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal.
No.3 gear assembly
Stopper washer
Parallel pin
Stopper washer
No.2 gear
Parallel pin
Optical block assembly
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-13
7-1-7. Replacing Seek Motor Assembly
m
. The seek motor assembly requires periodic replacement. Refer to “6-1. Periodic Check/Replacement
Parts List” for details.
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Remove the drive sub assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-2.)
7.
Reverse the drive sub assembly.
n
Do not to put the drive sub assembly reversed on anywhere. If it is put, this may cause damage to the spindle motor or the optical block assembly.
8.
Remove the No.2 gear and the No.3 gear assembly. (Refer to Section 7-1-6.)
9.
Disconnect the harness from the connector
CN2.
10. Remove the two screws, and remove the seek motor assembly.
Seek motor assembly
CN2
Hooks
Screws (M1.7)
11. Secure a new seek motor assembly with two screws.
Tightening torque:
10 x 10
_2
±0.01 N.m (1.0 ±0.1 kgf.cm)
12. Clamp the harness to the two hooks, and connect it to the connector CN2.
13. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8.
7-14
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-1-8. Replacing Spindle Motor
m
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
. Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded. Flexible board is easily cut. Be very careful not to fold them.
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN3.
7.
Remove the three screws, and remove the spindle motor.
CN3
PSW2 x 6
Spindle motor
1
3
2
Attaching surface (
*)
Screw holes (
*)
8.
Clean the attaching surface ( *) and the three screw holes ( *) of a new spindle motor with a cleaning cloth with cleaning fluid soaked.
9.
Install the spindle motor with three screws in the order of the numbers shown in the figure.
10. Connect the flexible card wire to the connector CN3.
11. Perform the skew adjustment.
(Refer to Section 8.)
12. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-15
7-1-9. Removing/Reinstalling Lock Release Assembly
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Remove the drive sub assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-2.)
7.
Remove the two screws and remove the lock release assembly.
8.
Disconnect the harness from the connector
(CN2) on the SW-1385 board.
Lock release assembly
P2 x 3
Reinstallation
1.
Connect the harness to the connector (CN2) on the SW-1385 board.
2.
Install the lock release assembly with the two screws while hooking the slacked portion of the harness into the recess of the SW-1385 board.
3.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 6.
Lock release assembly
CN2/SW-1385 board
7-16
P2 x 3
SW-1385 board
Recess
Harness
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-1-10. Removing/Reinstalling LD Motor
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Remove the drive sub assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-2.)
7.
Remove the lock release assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-9.)
8.
Disconnect the connector (CN1) on the SW-
1385 board.
9.
Remove the screw A and disengage the SW-
1385 board from the claws of the release lock assembly base.
10. Remove the two screws B and remove the
LD motor sub assembly.
Claws
CN1
B2 x 4
B
B2 x 4
A
SW-1385 board
LD motor assembly
Release lock assembly
Screw (B2 x 4) Tightening torque :
15 x 10
_2
± 0.01 N .
m {1.5 ±0.1 kgf .
cm}
Reinstallation
1.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 10.
n
Align the protruded portion of the release gear with the claw on the release lock assembly base to install the LD motor sub assembly.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Release lock assembly base Release gear
Align
Claw
Protrude
B2 x 4
LD motor sub assembly
7-17
7-2. Removing/Reinstalling Mounted Circuit Board of the Optical Drive
7-2-1. SE-709 Board
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Disengage the two claws, and remove the harness cover.
7.
Turn the gear (A) in the arrow direction to move the SE-709 board fixing screw to under the hole of the loader assembly.
n
This step is not necessary when the cartridge has been ejected normally.
8.
Remove the two screws, and remove the SE-
709 board.
9.
Disconnect the harnesses from the connectors
CN1 and CN2.
Claws
Harness cover
SE-709 board
Special screw M2
Special screws M2
Loader assembly
CN2
CN1
Gear (A)
SE-709 board
Reinstallation
1.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 9 of removal.
7-18
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-2-2. SE-857 Board
m
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
. Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded. Flexible board is easily cut. Be very careful not to fold them.
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Disconnect the flexible card wires from the connectors CN3, CN600, and CN1125.
7.
Remove the ten screws, and remove the SE-
857 board and the shield plate.
8.
Disconnect the dew sensor harness from the connector CN4.
9.
Disconnect the fan motor from the connector
CN1.
Screws
(M1.7)
Shield plate
Screws
(M1.7)
Screws
(M1.7)
CN1
CN1125
CN4
CN3
Screw
(M1.7)
CN600
SE-857 board
Reinstallation
1.
When installing a new SE-857 board, fold it several times as shown in the figure to maintain the folded shape.
a b
SE-857 board a b b a a b
: Mountain fold (three)
: Valley fold (three)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-19
2.
Connect the fan motor harness to the connector CN1.
3.
Connect the dew sensor harness to the connector CN4.
4.
Install the SE-857 board and the shield plate with ten screws in the order of the numbers shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
10
x 10 _2
±0.01 N.m (1.0 ±0.1 kgf.cm)
5.
Connect the flexible card wires to the connectors CN3, CN600, and CN1125.
n
The flexible card wire connected to CN600 has a conductive area on both sides, and the tip on the reverse side is insulated. Insert the flexible card wire into the connector as far as it will go, and then lock it.
6.
To replace the SE-857 board, remove IC4 from the old SE-857 board and mount it on a new SE-857 board.
n
IC4 retains data including adjustment data and hours meter data.
7.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 of removal.
8.
Take service action after replacing or repairing the SE-857 board.
(Refer to Section 7-8-8.)
Obverse side
Conduction
Reverse side
Insulation
Conduction
Shield plate
Screws
(M1.7)
6
CN4
Screws
CN1
(M1.7)
1
CN1125
Screws
(M1.7)
CN3
0
9
8
3
2
5
4
Screw
(M1.7)
7
IC4
CN600
SE-857 board
7-20
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-2-3. SE-858 Board
m
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
. Life of flexible card wire and flexible board will be significantly shortened if they are folded. Flexible board is easily cut. Be very careful not to fold them.
Removal
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Disconnect the harness from the connector
CN2.
7.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector CN600.
8.
Remove the seven screws, and remove the
SE-858 board.
Reinstallation
1.
When installing a new SE-858 board, fold it several times as shown in the figure to maintain the folded shape.
a b
Screws
(M1.7)
CN2
Screws
(M1.7)
SE-858 board
CN600
Screw
(M1.7)
SE-858 board a b b a b a
: Mountain fold (three)
: Valley fold (three)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-21
2.
Install the SE-858 board with seven screws in the order of the numbers shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
10
x 10 _2
±0.01 N.m (1.0 ±0.1 kgf.cm)
3.
Connect the flexible card wire to the connector CN600.
n
The flexible card wire connected to CN600 has a conductive area on both sides, and the tip on the reverse side is insulated. Insert the flexible card wire into the connector as far as it will go, and then lock it.
4.
Connect the harness to the connector CN2.
5.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 of removal.
Obverse side
Conduction
Reverse side
Insulation
Screws
(M1.7)
4
Conduction
Screws (M1.7)
CN2
5
6
1
7
CN600
Screw
(M1.7)
3
SE-858 board
2
7-22
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-3. Replacing Fan Motor (Drive)
m
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have intense magnetic circuits. Keep magnetic substance away from these parts. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If the magnetic substance is moved close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the laser caution sheet.
(Refer to Section 1-6-2 step 2.)
3.
Remove the corner block with adhesive sheet and cover sheet.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1 step 3.)
4.
Remove the SW guard assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-6.)
5.
Remove the loader assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
6.
Remove the drive sub assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-1-2.)
7.
Remove the tape A and disconnect harness from the connector CN1.
8.
Remove the three step screws, and remove the fan plate (lower).
9.
Remove the screw, and remove the fan plate
(upper) while rotating it in the arrow direction.
10. Remove the fan motor.
Fan plate (lower)
Label side
Step screw
Screw (M1.7)
Fan plate (upper)
Fan motor
Step screws
CN1
11. Place a new fan motor with its label side up oriented as shown in the figure.
12. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 9 of removal.
n
Arrange the harness as shown in the figure.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Tape A
Screw (M1.7) Tightening torque : 10 x 10 _2 ±
0.02 N
.
m {1.0
±0.2 kgf .
cm}
7-23
7-4. Replacing Fan Motor (Rear)
1.
Remove the inside panel.
(Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the DCP-49A board assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-7-4.)
3.
Remove the DVP-45 board assembly.
(Refer to Section 7-7-6.)
4.
Disconnect the harness from the connector
(CN103) on the MB-1111 board.
5.
Remove the two screws, and disconnect the harness through the bottom hole of the fan fitting holder.
6.
Remove the fan assembly from the fan fitting holder.
7.
Tilt the four corners of the cushion outward to remove the fan motor.
n
The cushion (FAN) is made of rubber and soft enough to remove the fan motor easily.
Harness
Fan assembly
Fan harness
MB-1111 board
CN3
Fan motor
B2.6 x 5
Fan fitting holder
8.
Attach the fan cushion to the new fan motor.
n
The arrow ( 9) on the fan motor must be pointing in the same direction as that on the cushion (FAN).
9.
Insert the fan assembly into the fan fitting holder until it stops.
m
. Be sure that the arrow (9) on the cushion
(FAN) points toward the rear panel, and that the fan harness comes to the bottom.
. When reinstalling, be sure that the cushion
(FAN) is not flipped over or sagged.
10. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 of removal.
7-24
Arrow ( 9)
Fan motor
Cushion (FAN)
Fan harness
Place the fan harness
Fan fitting holder
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-5. Removing/Reinstalling CCD Unit
. Tool: L-wrench (across flat: 0.89 mm)
L-wrench (across flat: 1.5 mm)
L-wrench (across flat: 2.5 mm)
7-5-1. Removing CCD Unit
1.
Remove the outside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the front panel.
(Refer to Section 1-7-5.)
4.
Loosen the two set screws, and remove the
ND filter knob.
5.
Loosen the two set screws, and remove the
CC filter knob.
6.
Move the position of the lens mount holder.
7.
Turn the lens mount counterclockwise, and remove the mount cap.
n
Do not touch the filter while the mount cap is removed.
8.
Remove the screw (M2 x 4) and mount lever.
9.
Turn the lens mount counterclockwise to remove.
Mount cap
Lens mount holder
CC filter knob
ND filter knob
Set screws
WP2 x 3
M2 x 4
Mount lever
Lens mount
Front panel
10. Remove the four bolts (M3 x 8) and four spring washers, and remove the CCD unit from the front panel.
CCD block assembly
Front panel
M3 x 8
SW3
M3 x 8
SW3
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-25
7-5-2. Reinstalling CCD Unit
1.
Attach the new shield finger LM to the front panel.
m
. Do not directly touch shield finger LM.
Be careful not to get hurt with the edges when handling them.
. Confirm that shield finger LM is in position.
2.
Install the CCD unit to the front panel with four screws and four spring washers.
n
When installing the CCD block, be careful so that the optical axis does not tilt (misaligned) due to a play.
If a picture on the monitor screen tilts, loosen the screws of the CCD block and adjust the installation so that the picture becomes horizontal.
3.
Fully turn the lens mount clockwise to install.
4.
Turn the lens mount counterclockwise until the screw
(M2 x 4) hole comes in the range shown in the figure.
5.
Attach the mount lever and the screw (M2 x 4) .
Installation range
Lens mount
Shield finger LM
Front panel
6.
Attach the filter knob with the setscrew, while adjusting the knob using the following steps.
(1) Rotate the knob shaft (thick) until the filter of the thinnest color is visible from the front.
(2) Align the CC filter knob number “B” with the mark on the inside panel assembly and attach it with the use of the two set screws (A).
(3) Rotate the knob shaft (thin) until the filter of the thinnest color is visible from the front.
(4) Align the ND filter knob number “1” with the mark on the two set screws (B).
Standard tightening torque :
20 to 25 x 10 _2
N
.m (2 to 2.5 kgf.cm)
7.
Attach the front panel assembly.
(Refer to Section 1-7-5.)
8.
Attach the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
9.
Attach the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.) n
When a new CCD unit is installed, camera adjustment is required. (Refer to Section 7-6.)
7-26
Mount lever
M2 x 4
Front panel
Set screw (B)
WP2 x 3
CC filter knob
Knob shaft (thick)
Set screw (A)
WP2 x 3
ND filter knob
Set screw (B)
WP2 x 3
Set screw (A)
WP2 x 3
Mark
Knob shaft (thin)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-6. Service Action After Replacing the
CCD Unit
This section describes the required actions for replacing the CCD unit.
n
Save the settings of the menu contents in the Memory
Stick before performing the actions after replacement.
Saving menu settings
Save the menu settings in a Memory Stick
USER layer
Menu
USER layer
PRESET layer
SERVICE layer
FACTORY layer
USER
OPERA
TION
PAINT
MAINTE
NANCE
FILE
Memory stick
ALL FILE SAVE
1.
Insert a memory stick.
2.
Set the MENU ON/OFF switch to the ON position.
3.
Let the ALL FILE page of the FILE menu appear on the screen and press the MENU knob.
?F03
O ALL FILE TOP
ALL FILE LOAD : EXEC
ALL FILE SAVE : EXEC
F.ID :
ALL PRESET : EXEC
STORE ALL PRESET: EXEC
CLEAR ALL PRESET: EXEC
3 SEC CLR PRESET: OFF
NETWORK DATA : OFF
4.
Select F.ID and set the file ID.
5.
Select ALL FILE SAVE and execute it by pressing the
MENU knob.
6.
When the cursor is moved to the file selection display, select the destination file where the file is going to be saved and press the MENU knob. (When saving a new file, select NEW FILE.)
P00 ALL SAVE ESC
MEMORY STICK ACCESS
DISPLAY MODE : ALL
001. 00/00/00
002. 00/00/00
003. 00/00/00
004. 00/00/00
005.NEW FILE
7.
Confirm that the screen returns to the ALL FILE display and the message “COMPLETE!” appears indicating that the saving is complete.
Service Action after replacement
1.
Reset them using the SERVICE menu.
Refer to “4-9. SERVICE Menu” for the details on
SERVICE menus.
(1) Open the switch cover with the power of the main unit turned on, and turn on the MENU ON/OFF switch.
The menu appears on the viewfinder screen regardless of the ON/OFF state of the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder.
(2) Select “SERVICE” from the TOP menu, and press the
MENU knob.
2.
Perform the following adjustments.
. VCO CONT frequency adjustment
. VA gain adjustment
. Black shading adjustment
. White shading adjustment
. Black set adjustment
(After BLACK BALANCE is displayed, press and hold the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward BLACK until BLACK SET is displayed again.)
. Flare adjustment
. Perform RPN ALL PRESET.
. Perform AUTO CONCEAL.
. Perform AUTO CONCEAL2.
3.
Restore the DIP switch on the AT-177 board to exit the service mode. (Refer to section 4-9.)
4.
Turn on the power of the camera.
5.
Perform ALL FILE LOAD and load the saved ALL
FILE.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-27
7-7. Removing/Installing Boards
7-7-1. CN-2947 Board and TG-260 Board
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the screw (B2.6 x 5) , and remove the connector retainer.
3.
Disconnect the CN-2947 board from the connector
(CN3) on the TG-260 board and the connector (CN2) on the DCP-49A board.
4.
Disconnect the harness from the three connectors
(CN2, CN4, CN6) on the TG-260 board.
5.
Remove the four screws (B2.6 x 5) .
6.
Disconnect the TG-260 board from the connector
(CN1) on the DR-617 board.
CN6
CN3
Connector retainer
B2.6 x 5
CN4
CN-2947 board
CN2
(DCP-49A board)
CN1
(DR-617 board)
TG-260 board
PSW
2 x 5
CN2
B2.6 x 5
7-7-2. AT-177 Board and DCP-49A Board
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the CN-2947 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-1.)
3.
Disconnect the harness form the connector (CN602) on the AT-177 board.
4.
Disconnect the harness form the connector (CN3) on the DCP-49A board.
5.
Disconnect the coaxial cables form the five coaxial connectors (CN10, CN11, CN12, CN13, and CN14) on the DCP-49A board.
6.
Remove the two screws (B2.6 x 5) .
7.
Disconnect the DCP-49A board (The AT-177 board is included.) from the connector (CN101) on the MB-
1111 board.
Harness
CN2
CN101
(MB-1111 board)
CN3
Coaxial cable
Yellow : CN10
Green : CN11
Blue : CN12
White : CN13
Red : CN14
DCP-49A board
CN13
CN10
B2.6 x 5
CN11
CN12
CN14
AT-177 board
CN602
7.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 6 of removal.
8.
Remove the four screws (PSW2 x 5) and disconnect the AT-177 board from the connector (CN4) on the
DCP-49A board.
CN4
AT-177 board
7-28
PSW2 x 5
DCP-49A board
PSW2 x 5
9.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-7-3. DVP-45 Board and SY-355 Board
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the CN-2947 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-1.)
3.
Remove the DCP-49A board. (Refer to Section 7-7-2.)
4.
Disconnect the harnesses from the two connectors
(CN600, CN1500) on the SY-355 board.
5.
Disconnect the flexible card wire form the connector
(CN1300) on the SY-355 board.
6.
Disconnect the flexible card wire form the connector
(CN1700) on the DVP-45 board.
7.
Remove the four screws (B2.6 x 5) .
8.
Disconnect the DVP-45 board (The SY-355 board is included.) from the connector (CN101) on the MB-
1111 board.
Flexible card wire
Harness
CN1300
7-7-4. ENC-118 Board, HP-148 Board and
SW-1391 Board
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5) .
3.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) , and remove the SW-1391 board.
CN1
PSW2 x 5
SW-1391 board
B2.6 x 5
CN1500
CN1700
CN600
CN101
(MB-1111 board)
DVP-45 board
B2.6 x 5
SY-355 board
9.
Remove the four screws (PSW2 x 5) and disconnect the SY-355 board from the connector (CN2300) on the
DVP-45 board.
CN2300
DVP-45
board
PSW
2 x 5
4.
Remove the RE knob and sleeve.
5.
Disconnect the harness form the connector (CN113) , and remove the ENC-118 board.
6.
Open the jack cover and remove the fixing nut.
7.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN101) , and remove the HP-148 board.
HP-148 board
CN101
ENC-118 board
CN113
Harness
Jack cover
Washer
Nut
Inside panel
Sleeve
RE knob
SY-355
board
PSW2 x 5
10. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 9 of removal.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
8.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal.
7-29
7-7-5. FP-157 Board
Note on removing FP-157 board:
This unit is always energized to retain data, even while the
POWER switch is off. The data is also retained by the lithium battery on the FP-157 board. For this reason, if the board is repaired with power supplied, ICs on the board may be broken. Be sure to remove the lithium battery before removing the FP-157 board.
n
Removing the lithium battery with a screwdriver or a similar tool may cause short-circuiting. Remove the battery with a bamboo stick or a similar insulator.
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the knobs A (two pieces) .
3.
Open the switch door (R) , and remove the knobs B
(two pieces) .
4.
Remove the LCD harness holder.
5.
Disconnect the harnesses from the six connectors
(CN700, CN701, CN702, CN703, CN802, CN850) on the FP-157 board.
6.
Remove the nine screws (PSW2 x 5) , and remove the
FP-157 board.
n
After removing the FP-157 board, be careful not to drop the unfixed parts.
Harness
CN702
FP-157 board
Harnesses
Lithium battery
CN802
CN850
CN700 CN701
Harnesses
CN703
PSW2 x 5
Knobs (A)
Knobs (B)
SW door (R)
PSW
2 x 5
FP-157 board
Unfixed parts
LCD harness holder
Inside panel
7.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 6 of removal.
7-30
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-7-6. CN-2946 Board and CN-3026 Board
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the DCP-49A board. (Refer to Section 7-7-2.)
3.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN1300) on the SY-355 board.
4.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1500) on the SY-355 board.
Flexible card wire
Harness
CN1300
SY-355 board
Harness
CN1500
Tally cover
CN-2946
board
Protection rubber
B2 x 5
B3 x 8
B2 x 5
Connector cover
CN-2946/CN-3026 board block assembly
CN13
CN10
B2.6 x 5
CN11
CN12
CN14
CN2
CN3
CN101
(MB-1111 board)
CN-2947 board
DCP-49A board
AT-177 board
5.
Open the connector cover.
6.
Remove the three screws (B2 x 5) , and remove the tally cover.
7.
Remove the two screws (B3 x 8) , and remove the
CN-2946/CN-3026 board block assembly.
8.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN1) on the CN-3026 board.
9.
Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5) .
n
Be careful not to lose the drop protection on the CN-
2946 board, since it is not fixed.
10. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 9 of removal.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-31
7-7-7. KY-623 Board
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the DCP-49A board. (Refer to Section 7-7-2.)
3.
Remove the DVP-45 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-3.)
4.
Open the key switch door.
5.
Remove the two screws, key frame assembly and key switch cover.
Key switch door
B2 x 4
Key frame assembly
2
Key switch cover
1
KY-623 board
Harness
CN1
8.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal.
6.
Remove the harness holder rubber to release the harness.
7-7-8. CN-3025 Board and SW-1425 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the front panel. (Refer to Section 7-7-4.)
4.
Remove the two screws (B2.6 x 5) , remove the SW-
1425 board.
5.
Remove the two screws (B2.6 x 5) , remove the CN-
3025 board.
B2.6 x 5
SW-1425 board
S1
CN-3025 board
Harness
Harness hold rubber
7.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) , and remove the KY-623 board.
7-32
VTR start button
Front panel
B2.6 x 5
LW2.6
6.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 5 of removal.
n
Align the position of the switch (S1) on the SW-1425 board with the position of the VTR start button.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-7-9. CN-3001 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the two screws.
3.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN2) , and remove the CN-3001 board by turning it in the direction of the arrow.
7-7-11. CI-37 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Remove the connector panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-8.)
5.
Remove the rear panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-9.)
6.
Disconnect the two coaxial cables from connectors
(CN1, CN2) on the CI-37 board.
CN1
Rear panel
Coaxial cables
CN2
CI-37 board
Turn CN-3001 board
90 degrees
P2.6 x 6
P2.6 x 6
4.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 3 of removal.
7.
Loosen the screw, and remove the 50P cover assembly.
8.
Remove the two screws, and remove the CI-37 board.
B2.6 x 5
B2.6 x 5
7-7-10. IO-235 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Remove the two screws.
5.
Remove the coaxial cable from the coaxial connector and coaxial cable hold washer.
6.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) , and remove the IO-235 board.
Insulating sheet
CI-37 board
Screw (drop-safe)
50P cover assembly
Coaxial cable hold washer
Rear panel
9.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal.
B2.6 x 5
B2.6 x 5
Coaxial cable
IO-235 board
7.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 6 of removal.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-33
7-7-12. PS-731 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) on the PS-731 board.
3.
Remove the screw, and remove the bracket a .
4.
Remove the screw, and disconnect the harness from the connector (CN2) , then remove the PS-731 board.
Harness
CN2
PS-731 board
CN1
B2.6 x 5
7.
Remove the two screws (B2 x 5), and remove the CN-
2948 board.
8.
Remove the two screws (P2.6 x 6), and remove the
RM-216 board.
CN-2948 board
B2 x 5
RM-216 board
P2.6 x 6
B2 x 5
B2.6 x 5
Harness
Bracket a
9.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal.
5.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 4 of removal.
7-7-13. AXM-38 Board, CN-2948 Board, SW-
1352 Board and RM-216 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Remove the connector panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-8.)
5.
Remove the two screws (B2 x 5) and six screws (P2.6
x 6) .
6.
Remove the AXM-38 board and SW-1352 board in the direction of arrow.
SW-1352 board
7-7-14. MS-86 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the front panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-5.)
4.
Remove the DCP-49A board. (Refer to Section 7-7-2.)
5.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN1) on the MS-86 board.
6.
Remove the two screws (B2.6 x 5) , and remove the
MS-86 bracket.
7.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN2) on the MB-1111 board.
8.
Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5) , and remove the
MS-86 board.
CN2
(MB-1111 board)
CN1
PSW2 x 5
AXM-38
board
7-34
Connector panel
B2 x 5
P2.6 x 6
P2.6 x 6
Flexible card wire
Harness
MS-86 board
MS bracket
B2.6 x 5
B2.6 x 5
9.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-7-15. CNB-25 Board and PS-708 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Disconnect the harnesses from the four connectors
(CN2, CN3, CN4, CN5) on the CNB-25 board.
5.
Disconnect the flexible card wire from the connector
(CN7) on the CNB-25 board.
6.
Remove the three screws (B2.6 x 5) , and disconnect the CNB-25 board (The PS-708 board is included.)
7.
Remove the screw (B2.6 x 3) , and disconnect the PS-
708 board from the connector (CN6) on the CNB-25 board.
B2.6 x 3
CN7 B2.6 x 5
PS-708 board
B2.6 x 5
CN4
CN3
CN2
CN5
CN6
CNB-25 board
Harness
7-7-16. CN-3005 Board and SW-1426 Board
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the handle assembly. (Refer to Section 1-7-4.)
3.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN1) on the SW-1426 board.
4.
Remove the two screws (B2.6 x 5) , and remove the
SW-1426 board.
n
Be careful not to drop the drop protection rubber attached on the switch.
B2.6 x 5
SW-1426 board
CN1
Drop protection
Harnesses
Flexible cad wire
8.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 8 of removal.
5.
Disconnect the harness (DDOUTLGT) from the connector (CN4) on the CN-3005 board.
6.
Disconnect the harnesses from the three connectors
(CN3, CN5, CN6) on the CN-3005 board.
7.
Remove the two screws (PSW2 x 5) , and remove the
CN-3005 board.
CN4
PSW2 x 5
CN1
CN5
PSW
2 x 5
CN6
Harness
(DDOUTLGT)
CN-3005 board
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
8.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal.
7-35
7-7-17. DR-606 Board
1.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
2.
Remove the DCP-49A board. (Refer to Section 7-7-2.)
3.
Remove the DVP-45 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-3.)
4.
Remove the fan motor (rear) . (Refer to Section 7-4.)
5.
Remove the four screws (B2.6 x 5) , and remove the separator (center) .
9.
Remove the four screws (PSW2 x 4) , and remove the
DR-606 board.
n
When the DR-606 board is removed from the heat sink, if the radiation sheet is affixed to the IC, peel of the radiation sheet from the IC carefully so as not to damage the radiation sheet.
PSW2 x 4
DR-606 board
PSW2 x 4
B2.6 x 5
B2.6 x 5
Separator
(center)
B2.6 x 5
Radiation sheet
6.
Disconnect the harness from the connector (CN100) .
7.
Disconnect the flexible card wires from the four connectors (CN101, CN102, CN857, CN858) .
8.
Remove the six screws (B2 x 3) , and remove the DR-
606 board assembly.
Heat sink
10. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 9 of removal.
CN100
CN102
DR-606 board assembly
CN857
B2 x 3
CN101
CN858
B2 x 3
7-36
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-7-18. RE-246 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Remove the connector panel. (Refer to Section 7-7-8.)
5.
Remove the rear panel. (Refer to Section 7-7-9.)
6.
Remove the two screws (B2.6 x 5) , then remove the bracket a and bracket b .
7.
Disconnect the RE-246 board from the connector
(CN113) on the MB-1111 board.
Bracket a
B2.6 x 5
8.
Remove the screw and three claws, and remove the exhaust duct a .
n
Handle the film of the exhaust duct a with care since it may be damaged if strong force is applied or a sharp object touches it.
9.
Remove the two screws, and remove the exhaust duct b .
Claw
B2.6 x 5
Exhaust duct a
Bracket b
B2.6 x 5
Exhaust duct b
B2.6 x 5
Claws
B2.6 x 5
RE-246 board
8.
Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 7 of removal.
10. Remove the screw (B2.6 x 5) , and remove the WRR case in the direction of arrow.
11. Disconnect the flexible flat cable from the connector
(CN2) .
12. Remove the two screws (B2 x 5) , an remove the RX-
101 board.
7-7-19. RX-101 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
4.
Remove the connector panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-8.)
5.
Remove the rear panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-9.)
6.
Remove the PS-731 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-12.)
7.
Remove the RE-246 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-18.)
B2.6 x 5
WRR case
Cushion
RX-101 board
B2 x 5
CN2
B2 x 5
13. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 12 of removal.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-37
7-7-20. MB-1111 Board
1.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
2.
Remove the inside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-3.)
3.
Remove the front panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-5.)
4.
Remove the connector cover. (Refer to Section 1-7-7.)
5.
Remove the connector panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-8.)
6.
Remove the rear panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-9.)
7.
Remove the DCP-49A board. (Refer to Section 7-7-2.)
8.
Remove the DVP-45 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-3.)
9.
Remove the fan motor (rear) . (Refer to Section 7-4.)
10. Remove the MS-86 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-14.)
11. Remove the RE-246 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-18.)
12. Remove the RX-101 board. (Refer to Section 7-7-19.)
13. Remove the four screws, and remove the separator
(center) .
17. Disconnect the flexible card wires from the three connectors (CN109, CN111, CN113) .
18. Disconnect the harnesses from the five connectors
(CN110, CN112, CN114, CN117, CN123) .
Flexible flat cable
CN110
CN111
CN112
CN114
CN109
CN117
CN123
CN113
Flexible card wire
Flexible card wire
19. Remove the five screws, and remove the MB-1111 board in the direction of arrow.
B2.6 x 5
B2.6 x 3
B2.6 x 5
B2.6 x 5
Separator
(center)
B2.6 x 5
14. Remove the screw, and remove the MA bracket.
15. Disconnect the MA-162 board from the connector
(CN115) on the MB-1111 board.
16. Remove the two screws , and remove the separator
(front) .
CN1115
(MB-1111 board)
Separator
(front)
PSW
2 x 5
B2.6 x 3
MB-1111 board
20. Reinstall the removed parts by reversing steps 1 to 19 of removal.
7-38
PSW2 x 5
MA bracket
PSW2 x 5
MA-162 board
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-8. Service Action After Replacing or
Repairing the Board
7-8-1. Optical Block Assembly
Refer to “8-2-1. Adjustment After Replacing the Optical
Block Assembly”.
7-8-2. AT-177 Board
After replacing the AT-177 board, perform the procedure in the following order.
n
Save the setting of the menu contents in the Memory Stick before performing the actions after replacement. (ALL File and SERVICE File)
Refer to step 4 in “5-3-2. ALL FILE” and step 1 in “5-3-5.
SERVICE FILE” for details.
1.
Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Refer to “1-11-2. Firmware Update Using the USB
Memory” for details.
2.
Reset FRAMs (IC308) on the AT-177 board to the factory default settings.
Reset them using the SERVICE menu.
Refer to “4-1-1. Basic Operations of Setup Menus” for the details of operating menus.
Refer also to “4-1-2. How to Display the SERVICE
Menu” as required.
(1) Open the switch cover with the power of the main unit turned on, and turn on the MENU ON/OFF switch.
The menu appears on the viewfinder screen regardless of the ON/OFF state of the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder.
(2) Select “SERVICE” from the TOP menu, and press the MENU knob.
(3) Scroll the screen to MENU SET by rotating the
MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
(4) Point the cursor on FACTORY PRESET by rotating the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
(5) Press the MENU knob, and execute FACTORY
PRESET.
3.
Perform the following adjustments.
. Black set adjustment
(After BLACK BALANCE is displayed, press and hold the AUTO W/B BAL switch toward BLACK until BLACK SET is displayed again.)
. Perform AUTO CONCEAL.
. Perform AUTO CONCEAL2.
4.
Call back the contents of the previously saved menu settings from the memory stick. (ALL FILE, SER-
VICE FILE)
For details, refer to “5-3-2. ALL FILE - 5. Calling the
ALL FILE saved in memory stick (ALL FILE
LOAD)” and “5-3-5. SERVICE FILE - 2. Calling the
SERVICE FILE saved in memory stick (SERVICE
FILE LOAD)”.
7-8-3. CN-3005 Board
After replacing the CN-3005 board, or after replacing
EEPROM (IC2) on the CN-3005 board, perform the procedure in the following order.
Service Action after the board replacement
After replacing the CN-3005 board, mount the EEPROM
(IC2) from the old board to the new board.
Service Action after the EEPROM
If you have replaced this with a new IC due to its defect, data should be saved. Contact your local Sony Sales
Office/Service Center for details.
7-8-4. DCP-49A Board
Perform the following procedure when replacing the DCP-
49A board.
1.
Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. (Only when the board is replaced.)
Refer to “1-11-2. Firmware Update Using the USB
Memory” for details.
2.
Perform the following adjustment.
. VCO CONT frequency adjustment (Refer to Section
9-2-1.)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
7-39
7-8-5. SY-355 Board
After replacing the SY-355 board, upgrade the firmware.
Refer to “1-11-2. Firmware Update Using the USB
Memory” for details.
7-8-6. FP-157 Board
When replacing the FP-157 board, or when replacing
EEPROM (IC913) on the FP-157 board, perform the procedure in the following order.
1.
Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. (Only when the board is replaced.)
Refer to “1-11-2. Firmware Update Using the USB
Memory” for details.
2.
Perform the following adjustments.
. AUDIO A/D Error Correction (Refer to Section 4-11.)
. AUDIO D/A Error Correction (Refer to Section 4-12.)
. Adjusting Battery End Detection Voltage (Refer to
Section 4-14.)
After replacing the volume (RV1/RV2), perform the following adjustment.
. AUDIO LEVEL Volume Compensation (Refer to
Section 4-13.)
7-8-7. DR-606 Board
Refer to “8-2-2. Adjustment After Replacing the DR-606
Board”.
7-8-8. SE-857 Board
Refer to “8-2-3. Adjustment After Replacing the SE-857
Board”.
7-40
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Section 8
Optical Drive Alignment
8-1. Optical Drive Alignment Overview
8-1-1. Precautions
. Be sure to perform each adjustment in order unless any instructions are provided.
. To prevent the possibility of damage to the optical block assembly in the drive assembly by static electricity charged in a human body or clothes, be sure to establish a ground before starting the service operation. (Refer to
Section 1-12-1.)
. The spindle motor and the actuator around the objective lens have a powerful magnet. If the magnetic force makes a screwdriver hit the actuator, the objective lens will be damaged. If a magnetic substance comes close to these parts, their characteristics may be changed.
8-1-2. Fixtures
. Alignment disc (PFD23A-RS)
. Torque driver (for 3 kg)
. Bit for torque driver (M2)
. Flat-blade screwdriver
. Locking compound
. Weight (50 to 100 g)
8-1-3. Preparations Before Adjustment
1.
Turn off the power.
2.
Remove the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-1.)
3.
Remove the loader assembly. (Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
4.
Turn on the power.
5.
Display the service menu. (Refer to Section 4-9.)
6.
Select “VDR MAINTENANCE” by turning the
MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
7.
Select “DRIVE MAINTENANCE” by turning the
MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
8.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
9.
Select “ADJUST” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob. The ADJUST screen appears.
DRIVE MAINTENANCE
ADJUST
*SERVO_1
SKEW
SERVO_2
OTHER ADJUST
8-2. Procedures After Replacing the
Optical Block Assembly and the
Board
8-2-1. Adjustment After Replacing the
Optical Block Assembly
After replacing the optical block assembly, perform adjustment in the following order.
. Servo1 Automatic Adjustment (Refer to Section 8-3.)
. Skew Adjustment (Refer to Section 8-4.)
. Servo2 Automatic Adjustment (Refer to Section 8-5.)
. Clearing Media Log (Refer to Section 8-6.)
8-2-2. Adjustment After Replacing the DR-
606 Board
After replacing the DR-606 board, or after replacing any parts in repair, perform the procedure in the following order.
1.
Upgrade the firmware to the latest version. (Only when the board is replaced.)
Refer to “1-11-2. Firmware Update Using the USB
Memory” for details.
2.
Perform adjustment in the following order.
. Servo1 Automatic Adjustment (Refer to Section 8-3.)
. Skew Adjustment (Refer to Section 8-4.)
. Servo2 Automatic Adjustment (Refer to Section 8-5.)
. ACCELERATION OFFSET (Refer to Section 4-10-21.)
8-2-3. Adjustment After Replacing the SE-
857 Board
After replacing the SE-857 board, or after replacing any parts in repair, perform adjustment in the following order.
. UPLOAD TO EEPROM (Refer to Section 4-10-26.) n
After replacing the SE-857 board, mount the EEPROM
(IC4) from the old board to the new board.
If EEPROM (IC4) from the old board is not mounted to the new board, perform this menu only when IC4 is separately replaced.
. ACCELERATION OFFSET (Refer to Section 4-10-21.)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
8-1
8-3. Servo1 Automatic Adjustment
n
Make this adjustment with the loader assembly detached.
Fixtures
. Alignment disc (PFD23A-RS)
. Weight (50 to 100 g)
Adjustment Procedure
1.
Display the adjustment items referring to Section 8-1-3.
2.
Select “SERVO_1” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob. A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
SERVO_1
How to Close
Move the gear in the direction of the arrow until the shutter is closed and the claw snaps.
Cartridge
Shutter
Claw
Close
Open
Gear
6.
Set the cartridge with its shutter opened so that its guide holes are aligned with the two guide shafts of the unit.
7.
Put the weight on the cartridge.
Cartridge
Weight
ADJUST START?
*YES
NO
A confirmation screen appears.
SERVO_1
SET ALIGNMENT DISC
PFD23A-RS.
ADJUST START?
*YES
NO
4.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob.
5.
Open the shutter of the cartridge of the alignment disc using the following procedure.
Be sure to close it after the adjustment.
n
Opening the shutter of the cartridge by hand is limited to the optical drive alignment.
Do not open it for any other purpose or touch the disc in the cartridge.
8-2
How to Open
Open the shutter a little in the direction of the arrow while pressing the claw. Then move the gear by hand until the shutter is completely opened.
Guide holes
Guide shafts
8.
Press the MENU knob. The result appears.
SERVO_1
ADJUSTING...COMPLETED
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
8-4. Skew Adjustment
n
Make this adjustment with the loader assembly detached.
Fixtures
. Alignment disc (PFD23A-RS)
. Flat-blade screwdriver
. Locking compound
. Weight (50 to 100 g)
8-4-1. Tangential Skew Adjustment
1.
Display the adjustment item referring to Section 8-1-3.
2.
Select “SKEW” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob. A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
SKEW
ARE YOU SURE?
*YES
NO
A warm-up screen appears.
n
If five minutes has already passed since power ON, this screen appears only for a moment.
SKEW
WARMING UP...
REMAINED 0299 SEC
5.
Set the alignment disc by referring to steps 4 to 6 in
Section 8-3. Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob. The skew adjustment selection screen appears.
6.
Select “TAN ADJUST” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
DRIVE MAINTENANCE
ADJUST
SKEW
*TAN ADJUST
RAD ADJUST
A confirmation screen appears.
7.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
TAN ADJUST
ADJUST START?
*YES
NO
The result appears, and a confirmation screen appears.
TAN ADJUST
INITIALIZING...OK
4.
A confirmation screen appears when “0000 SEC” is displayed.
SKEW
SET ALIGNMENT DISC
PFD23A-RS.
ARE YOU SURE?
*YES
NO
In case of error:
The defect in the alignment disc is thought.
TAN ADJUST
CHECK DISK RAD ERROR
*YES
NO
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
8-3
8.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
The result on the tangential OUT side appears.
9.
If the adjustment failed in step 8, repeat steps (1) to (2) until satisfactory result is obtained.
(1) Turn the tangential OUT adjustment screw.
m
. The adjustment screw should be turned clockwise for this adjustment. If they are turned too much, turn them back sufficiently, and turn them clockwise again.
. If measured data is +, turn the adjustment screw clockwise.
. If measured data is _, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
(2) Press the [SET] button.
The result on the tangential OUT side appears.
12. If the adjustment failed in step 11, repeat steps (1) to
(2) until satisfactory result is obtained.
(1) Turn the tangential IN adjustment screw.
m
. The adjustment screw should be turned clockwise for this adjustment. If they are turned too much, turn them back sufficiently, and turn them clockwise again.
. If measured data is +, turn the adjustment screw counterclockwise.
. If measured data is _, turn the adjustment screw clockwise.
(2) Press the [SET] button.
The result on the tangential IN side appears.
TAN ADJUST
OUTSIDE ADJUST
MEASURE TAGET
+0.007 DEG: NG
ARE YOU NEXT
YES
*NO
Tangential OUT adjustment screw
TAN ADJUST
INSIDE ADJUST
MEASURE TAGET
-0.009 DEG: NG
ARE YOU NEXT
YES
*NO
Tangential IN adjustment screw
10. When the result is satisfactory, select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
(“YES” cannot be selected when the result is not satisfactory.)
TAN ADJUST
OUTSIDE ADJUST
MEASURE TAGET
+0.007 DEG: OK
ARE YOU NEXT?
*YES
NO
11. The result on the tangential IN side appears.
13. When the result is satisfactory, select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
14. The tangential skew adjustment result appears.
When “ERROR” appears, press the MENU knob to make adjustment from step 6.
TAN ADJUST
CHECKING...OK
8-4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
8-4-2. Radial Skew Adjustment
n
This adjustment is made automatically.
You need not adjust radial skew using the adjustment screw as shown in the previous adjustment item.
1.
Perform steps 1 to 5 in “8-4-1. Tangential Skew
Adjustment”.
2.
Select “RAD ADJUST” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
DRIVE MAINTENANCE
ADJUST
SKEW
TAN ADJUST
*RAD ADJUST
4.
When “OK” appears, press the MENU switch.
n
If failed, the optical block assembly may be defective.
5.
Press the MENU switch again. The ADJUST screen appears.
6.
Remove the cartridge and the weight.
7.
Apply locking compound to the screw shown in the figure.
n
Apply the locking compound to the screw as shown in the figure, being careful not to put it over the head of the screw.
A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
RAD ADJUST
ADJUST START?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
RAD ADJUST
ADJUSTING...COMPLETED
Tangential IN adjustment screw
Locking compound
In case of error:
The defect in the optical block assembly is thought.
RAD ADJUST
ADJUSTING...FAILED
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
8-5
8-5. Servo2 Automatic Adjustment
n
This adjustment is not available when the loader assembly is removed. Be sure to install the loader assembly before making this adjustment.
1.
Clean the loader assembly. (Refer to Section 6-2-2.)
2.
Install the loader assembly. (Refer to Section 7-1-1.)
3.
Display the adjustment item referring to Section 8-1-3.
4.
Select “SERVO_2” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob. A confirmation screen appears.
5.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
SERVO_2
8-6. Clearing Media Log
m
. This menu is used to clear acquired media log.
Once this menu is executed, the cleared log data can no longer be restored.
. The adjustment value is stored for each media.
If the optical drive is replaced, the adjustment value differs from the one that is stored, so the media log needs to be cleared.
1.
Select “OTHERS ADJUST” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob.
2.
Select “CLEAR MEDIA LOG” by turning the MENU knob, and press the MENU knob. A confirmation screen appears.
3.
Select “YES” by turning the MENU knob, press the
MENU knob.
CLEAR MEDIA LOG
ADJUST START?
*YES
NO
A confirmation screen appears.
SERVO_2
INSERT ALIGNMENT DISC
PFD23A-RS.
ARE YOU SURE?
*YES
NO
The result appears.
EXECUTING...COMPLETED
6.
Set the alignment disc. The result appears.
SERVO_2
ADJUSTING...COMPLETED
4.
Perform the procedure after adjustment.
(Refer to Section 8-7.)
In case of error:
The defect in the EEPROM (IC4/SE-857 board) is thought.
CLEAR MEDIA LOG
7.
Press the MENU switch. The alignment disc is ejected.
EXECUTING...FAILED
8-6
8-7. After Adjustment
1.
Turn off the power.
2.
Reinstalled the outside panel. (Refer to Section 1-7-2.)
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
Section 9
Electrical Alignment
9-1. Preparation
9-1-1. Fixtures and Equipment
[Fixtures]
. Pattern box PTB-500
Part No.: J-6029-140-B
. Grayscale chart
Commercially available on the market Reflective type (16:9)
. White window chart
[Equipment]
. Oscilloscope: Tektronix TDS3054 or equivalent (150 MHz or more)
. HD waveform monitor: LEADER ELECTRONICS CORP.LV5152DA or equivalent
. SD waveform monitor: Tektronix 1755A or equivalent
Advantest TR5821AK or equivalent . Frequency counter:
. Color monitor:
. Signal generator:
. AC adapter:
Sony HDM-20E1U/14E1U/14E5U or equivalent
Tektronix SG-5010/TG-2000 or equivalent
Sony AC-DN10
. Luminance meter:
. Luxmeter:
Konica Minolta LS-110 or equivalent
Konica Minolta T-10 or equivalent
9-1-2. Connection
PTB-500
2 to
3 m
PDW-F800
AC adapter
AC-DN10
HDSDI OUT
TEST OUT
DC IN
(HD-SDI)
HD waveform monitor
HD-SDI
Color monitor
(Composite)
SD waveform monitor
Composite
75
Z
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-1
9-1-3. Switch Setting before Adjustment
Before performing adjustment, set switches and menu as follows.
Inside panel:
GAIN switch
→ L (0 dB)
OUTPUT/DCC switch
→ CAM/OFF
WHITE BAL switch
→ PRST
Front panel:
SHUTTER switch
→ OFF
Filter knob
→ 1
Lens:
LENS
→ MANU
IRIS
→ C (CLOSE)
Menu:
MENU: OPERATION
PAGE: GAIN SW
ITEM: GAIN LOW
→ 0 dB
ITEM: GAIN MID
→ 6 dB
ITEM: GAIN HIGH
→ 12 dB
MENU: OPERATION
PAGE: OUTPUT 1
ITEM: SDI OUT 1 SELECT
→ HDSDI
MENU: PAINT
PAGE: SW STATUS
ITEM: GAMMA
→ ON
ITEM: KNEE
→ ON
ITEM: WHITE CLIP
→ ON
ITEM: DETAIL
→ ON
9-1-4. Notes on Adjustment
. Some adjustments of the Electrical Alignment require menu to be used.
Put the unit into the SERVICE mode to display the
SERVICE menu. (Refer to “4-9. SERVICE Menu”.)
. Be sure to turn off the power before extending the plugin board using the extension board.
. Before starting adjustment, set the main POWER switch of Camcorder to ON, then be sure to allow for about 10minute warm-up time.
9-2
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-1-5. Gray-Scale Chart and its Maintenance
Use of a reflective-type gray-scale chart (with reflectance of 89.9%) is recommended for the Gain adjustment. If a reflective-type gray-scale chart is not available, use a transparent-type gray-scale chart with a well-maintained pattern box.
Calibrate illuminance (or luminance) on the surface of the gray-scale chart to the specified value as follows. Also, calibrate the color temperature to exactly 3200K by adjusting the illumination.
Information on the reflective gray-scale chart (16:9)
Availability of reflective-type gray-scale chart
The reflective-type gray-scale chart (16:9) is commercially available.
Chart : Reflective-type gray-scale chart
(GS-HD of Murakami Color Research
Lab. Inc. or equivalent)
Available from : Murakami Color Research Lab. Inc.
Notes on handling
. Do not touch the chart surface with bare hands.
. Do not rub or stain the chart surface.
. Do not expose or use the chart under direct sunlight for a long time.
. Do not leave or store the chart in a place that is very humid or contains toxic gas.
. Do not place anything on top of the chart surface.
. When a chart is stored for a long time without using it, open the case and leave the chart to dry for 30 minutes or
1 hour once or twice every month.
Guideline of replacing the chart when used as the reference chart
The reflective characteristics of the reflective-type grayscale chart can easily deteriorate over time. As a guideline, the chart should be replaced every 2 years, but the replacement interval depends on the storage conditions of the chart.
Setting Illuminance (In case of using reflectivetype chart)
Measuring equipment :Luxmeter (Minolta T-10 or equivalent, pre-calibrated)
1.
Turn on the light source that illuminates the chart and allow it to warm-up for about 30 minutes.
2.
Fix a luxmeter in front of the reflective-type chart.
Obtain an illuminance of 2000 lx uniformly over the entire surface of the chart by adjusting the position and angle of the illuminations.
n
Place the light source at the same height and direction of the camera that shoots the chart surface.
Chart
Luxmeter
Light source
Setting Luminance (In case of using transparenttype chart)
Measuring equipment : Photometer (Minolta LS-110 or equivalent, pre-calibrated)
1.
Turn on the pattern box and allow it to warm-up for about 30 minutes.
2.
Place the pattern box such that direct light does not fall on the chart surface.
(Alternatively, place a cover the inside of which is painted with unglazed black, around the entire chart.)
3.
Fix a photometer 1 m in front of the chart in the pattern box.
4.
Obtain the luminance of 573
±6 cd/m
2
at the center of the chart by adjusting the BRIGHTNESS control of the pattern box.
n
Adjusting luminance of 573
±6 cd/m
2
creates the same illuminance of 2000 lx on the reflective-type grayscale chart with reflection of 89.9%.
Chart
Luminance meter
1 m
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-3
9-2. Adjustment
9-2-1. Confirming VCO CONT Frequency
m
. Perform this check only when the DCP-49A board is replaced.
. Before measurement, set main POWER switch of
Camcorder to ON, and be sure to allow for about 10minute warm up time.
. Images may deteriorate during adjustment.
Fixtures and Equipment
. Frequency counter
Preparation
. Connect as follows.
PDW-F800
TEST
OUT
IN
Frequency counter
. On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: VCO ADJUST
Adjustment Procedure
Adjust the following thee types of VCO:
. HDCK(N)
. HDCK(P)
. SDCK
1.
HDCK (N) adjustment
Set CLK OUT SEL to HDCK (N).
The signal of the following specification is output from the TEST OUT connector.
Specification: 37,087,912
±70 Hz
When the signal is outside the specification, perform the following adjustment:
Change the setting value of HDCK (NTSC AREA) so that the signal meets within the specification.
When the specification is met, press the MENU knob, and fix the value.
2.
HDCK (P) adjustment
Set CLK OUT SEL to HDCK (P).
The signal of the following specification is output from the TEST OUT connector.
Specification: 37,125,000
±70 Hz
When the signal is outside the specification, perform the following adjustment:
Change the setting value of HDCK (PAL AREA) so that the signal meets within the specification.
When the specification is met, press the MENU knob, and fix the value.
3.
SDCK adjustment
Set CLK OUT SEL to SDCK.
The signal of the following specification is output from the TEST OUT connector.
Specification: 27,000,000
±50 Hz
When the signal is outside the specification, perform the following adjustment:
Change the setting value of SDCK so that the signal meets within the specification.
When the specification is met, press the MENU knob, and fix the value.
4.
Completing adjustment
After adjusting 1 through 3, set CLK OUT SEL to
OFF.
9-2-2. Modulator Balance Adjustment
Preparation:
. Put the unit into the SERVICE mode.
(Refer to “4-1-2. How to Display the SERVICE Menu”.)
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. MENU → VF DISP display
Adjustment Procedure:
1.
AUTO W/B BAL switch (front panel)
→ BLK
Hold this switch in BLK state until the message
“BLACK SET” on the viewfinder is displayed twice.
2.
A few seconds later after releasing the switch, check that the message “ABB OK” is displayed on the viewfinder.
9-4
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-2-3. VA Gain Adjustment
m
. Use an 89.9%-reflective chart in this adjustment as possible. For details, refer to “9-1-5. Gray-Scale Chart and its Maintenance”.
. If the “16:9” chart is not available, shoot a “4:3” chart so that the chart width is aligned with the underscanned monitor frame.
Fixtures and Equipment:
. Oscilloscope, SD waveform monitor
. Grayscale chart (16:9)
Preparation:
. Connect an SD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector.
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. WHITE BAL switch (inside panel) → PRST
. Shoot a grayscale chart (16:9) in the full underscanned monitor frame.
Adjustment Procedure:
1.
AUTO W/B BAL switch (front panel)
→ BLK
(Perform the automatic black balance adjustment.)
2.
On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: MAINTENANCE
PAGE: WHITE SETTING
ITEM: COLOR TEMP. <P> : 3200
ITEM: C TEMP BAL <P> : 0
MENU: PAINT
PAGE: SW STATUS
ITEM: GAMMA
→ OFF
ITEM: DETAIL
→ OFF
3.
Select the center portion by using the waveform monitor.
4.
Set the waveform monitor to the CHROMA mode.
5.
Equipment: Waveform monitor
Test point: TEST OUT connector
Adj. point: MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: CCD ADJUST
ITEM:
ITEM:
R CCD GAIN
B CCD GAIN
Spec.: Minimize carrier leakage C by using the variable resistors alternately.
C
Setting after Adjustment:
. On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: PAINT
PAGE: SW STATUS
ITEM : GAMMA
→ ON
ITEM : DETAIL
→ ON
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-5
9-2-4. Black Shading Adjustment
Fixtures and Equipment:
HD waveform monitor
Preparation:
. Connect an HD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector.
. Lens IRIS → CLOSE
. Waveform monitor setting
LUM mode
VOLT FULL SCALE range
→ 0.5
Adjustment Procedure:
Perform either step 1 or step 2 for the black shading adjustment.
1.
Auto black shading adjustment
(1) On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: SHADING
ITEM: AUTO BLK SHADING
→ EXEC
(2) Push the MENU knob.
(3) When adjustment ends successfully, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
n
The auto adjustment takes about 30 seconds.
2.
Manual black shading adjustment
When performing fine adjustment after executing the black shading auto adjustment, or when performing manual adjustment without executing the auto adjustment, proceed as follows.
(1) On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK SHADING
ITEM: SHADING CH SEL
→ G
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ G n
The HD signal is output when TEST OUT
SELECT is set to a signal other than VBS.
(2) On the menu, perform the G-channel adjustment as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK SHADING
ITEM: G BLK H SAW
ITEM: G BLK V SAW
ITEM: G BLK H PARA
ITEM: G BLK V PARA
Spec.: Make the waveform of the G-channel flat.
(H SAW) (H PARA)
(V SAW) (V PARA)
(3) On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK SHADING
ITEM: SHADING CH SEL
→ R
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ R
(4) Adjust the shading for the R-channel in the same procedure as the G-channel adjustment.
(5) On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK SHADING
ITEM: SHADING CH SEL
→ B
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ B
(6) Adjust the shading for the B-channel in the same procedure as the G-channel adjustment.
Setting after Adjustment:
. On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK SHADING
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ VBS
9-6
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-2-5. White Shading Adjustment
n
This adjustment could not be correctly performed if the uneven white pattern is used, luminance is not correct, or lens iris and lens zoom are not in good conditions.
Fixtures and Equipment:
. HD waveform monitor
. Full white pattern (White window chart)
Preparation:
. Connect an HD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector.
. Lens IRIS → AUTO
. Waveform monitor setting
LUM mode
VOLT FULL SCALE range
→ 0.5
. Shoot a fully occupied full white pattern in the underscanned monitor frame.
Adjustment Procedure:
Perform either step 1 or step 2 for the white shading adjustment.
1.
Auto white shading adjustment
(1) On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: SHADING
ITEM: AUTO WHT SHADING
→ EXEC
(2) Push the MENU knob.
(3) When adjustment ends successfully, the message
“COMPLETE” appears.
n
The auto adjustment takes about 30 seconds.
2.
Manual white shading adjustment
When performing fine adjustment after executing the black shading auto adjustment, or when performing manual adjustment without executing the auto adjustment, proceed as follows.
(1) On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: WHITE SHADING
ITEM: WHT SHAD CH SEL
→ G
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ G n
The HD signal is output when TEST OUT
SELECT is set to a signal other than VBS.
(2) On the menu, perform the G-channel adjustment as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: WHITE SHADING
ITEM: G WHT H SAW
ITEM: G WHT V SAW
ITEM: G WHT H PARA
ITEM: G WHT V PARA
Spec.: Make the waveform of the G-channel flat.
(H SAW) (H PARA)
(V SAW) (V PARA)
(3) On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: WHITE SHADING
ITEM : WHT SHAD CH SEL
→ R
ITEM : TEST OUT SELECT
→ R
(4) Adjust the shading for the R-channel in the same procedure as the G-channel adjustment.
(5) On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: WHITE SHADING
ITEM: WHT SHAD CH SEL
→ B
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ B
(6) Adjust the shading for the B-channel in the same procedure as the G-channel adjustment.
Setting after Adjustment:
. On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: WHITE SHADING
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ VBS
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-7
9-2-6. Black Set Adjustment
Fixtures and Equipment:
HD waveform monitor
Preparation:
. Connect an HD waveform monitor of the HD-SDI to the
HDSDI OUT connector.
. Lens IRIS → CLOSE
. AUTO W/B BAL switch (front panel) → BLK
(Perform the automatic black balance adjustment.)
Adjustment Procedure:
1.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU: PAINT
PAGE: PAINT
ITEM: MASTER BLACK
Spec.: A = 3
±1 IRE (NTSC)
A = 20
±7 mV (PAL)
A
9-8
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-2-7. Flare Adjustment
Fixtures and Equipment:
. SD waveform monitor
. Grayscale chart (16:9)
Preparation:
. Connect an SD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector.
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK/FLARE
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ VBS
. Shoot a grayscale chart in the full underscanned monitor frame.
Adjustment Procedure:
1.
Lens IRIS: Open the lens iris by one step from the reference setting A.
Spec.: A = 100
±2 IRE (NTSC)
700
±14 mV (PAL)
A
4.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK/FLARE
ITEM: R FLARE
Spec.: Minimize the carrier leakage at portion C.
(R-ch)
C
5.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK/FLARE
ITEM: B FLARE
Spec.: Minimize the carrier leakage at portion C.
(B-ch)
6.
Repeat steps 4 and 5 several times and minimize the carrier leakage at portion C.
2.
On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: BLACK/FLARE
ITEM: G FLARE
→ 0
3.
Select center portion by using the waveform monitor.
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-9
9-2-8. Auto Iris Adjustment
Fixtures and Equipment:
. SD waveform monitor
. Black and white monitor
. Grayscale chart
Preparation:
. Connect an SD waveform monitor to the TEST OUT connector.
. Lens IRIS → AUTO
. OUTPUT/DCC switch (inside panel) → CAM/ON
. Shoot a grayscale chart in the full underscanned monitor frame.
Adjustment Procedure:
1.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU: MAINTENANCE
PAGE: AUTO IRIS 2
ITEM: IRIS APL RATIO
Spec.: Set AUTO iris operation depending on the application.
(Automatic iris operation mode setting can be set in the range of the average level operation to peak-to-peak level operation of the video signal.)
IRIS APL RATIO = MIN
→ peak-to-peak level only
IRIS APL RATIO = MAX
→ average level only
2.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU: MAINTENANCE
PAGE: AUTO IRIS 2
ITEM: IRIS LEVEL
Spec.: A = 100
±2 IRE (NTSC)
A = 700
±14 mV (PAL)
3.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU: MAINTENANCE
PAGE: AUTO IRIS 2
ITEM: IRIS SPEED
Spec.: Adjust to the desired operation speed of auto iris.
4.
On the menu, set as follows.
MENU: MAINTENANCE
PAGE: AUTO IRIS 2
ITEM: CLIP HIGH LIGHT
→ ON or OFF
Spec.: Set the level to the desired AUTO iris.
A
9-10
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-2-9. RPN Adjustment
m
. RPN (Residual Point Noise) of CCD is usually corrected automatically (APR) during automatic black balance adjustment (ABB). When there exists RPN that is not corrected by APR, perform this adjustment.
. This adjustment is performed on the MANUAL RPN screen or the MANUAL RPN (SLS) page in the
SERVICE menu.
Adjustment is performed using the MANUAL RPN page usually, but perform the RPN adjustment using the
MANUAL RPN (SLS) page for the RPN that appears only in slow shutter mode (when “SLS: 2 FRAME” or more is selected.). Procedure is the same as that when using the MANUAL RPN page.
Fixtures and Equipment:
Color monitor
Preparation:
. Connect an HD color monitor to the TEST OUT connector.
. This is the setting for the RPN adjustment that appears only in slow shutter mode.
SHUTTER switch (front panel)
→ SLS:2 FRAME or more
. On the menu, set as follows
MENU: SERVICE
PAGE: MANUAL RPN (Standard adjustment) or
PAGE: MANUAL RPN (SLS) (For the RPN adjustment that appears only in slow shutter mode.)
Adjustment Procedure:
n
. All the adjustments are to be performed using the
MANUAL RPN page or the MANUAL RPN (SLS) page on the SERVICE menu.
1.
AUTO W/B BAL switch (front panel)
→ BLK
(Perform the automatic black balance adjustment.)
2.
Choose the channel (R, G or B) to be corrected.
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ R, G, B
This sets TEST OUT to output R, G, or B in HD.
3.
Adjust the values of H and V. Then move the center of the cross cursor to RPN.
ITEM: RPN CURSOR
→ ON
ITEM: CURSOR H POS
ITEM: CURSOR V POS
4.
Push the MENU knob and save the RPN data
(corrected value).
ITEM: RECORD RPN
→ EXEC
5.
The message “EXEC OK?” appears.
After confirming the RPN is removed, push the
MENU knob. The message “COMPLETE!” appears and the correction is performed.
To cancel the RPN correction after the correction is completed, perform the Cancel without moving the position of the cross cursor.
ITEM: DELETE RPN
→ EXEC
6.
To correct another RPN, repeat steps 2 to 5.
Setting after Adjustment:
ITEM: RPN CURSOR
→ OFF
ITEM: TEST OUT SELECT
→ VBS
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-11
9-2-10. S/H DC Adjustment
n
If it is poorly adjusted, the RPN correction cannot be optimized, or vertical stripes will appear when MASTER
GAIN is increased.
In such case, perform this adjustment.
Fixtures and Equipment:
HD picture monitor
Preparation:
. Connect an TEST OUT connector to the (HD-Y) of HD picture monitor.
. Lens IRIS
. GAIN SW
→ CLOSE
→ 12 dB
. WHITE BAL SW → PRESET
. AUTO W/B BAL switch (Font panel) → BLK
(Perform the automatic black balance adjustment.)
Adjustment Procedure:
1.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU : SERVICE
PAGE : S23 S/H DC
ITEM : S/H DC ADJ MODE
→ ON
ITEM : TEST OUT SELECT
→ R
If this adjustment is poorly performed, the vertical stripes appear on the monitor screen.
4.
Perform the G-channel adjustment using the menu until the vertical stripes become least visible on the picture monitor.
MENU : SERVICE
PAGE : S23 S/H DC
ITEM : S/H DC B Gch (1)
5.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU : SERVICE
PAGE : S23 S/H DC
ITEM : TEST OUT SELECT
→ B
6.
Perform the B-channel adjustment using the menu until the vertical stripes become least visible on the picture monitor.
MENU : SERVICE
PAGE : S23 S/H DC
ITEM : S/H DC B Bch (1)
Setting after Adjustment:
. On the menu, set as follows.
MENU : SERVICE
PAGE : S23 S/H DC
ITEM : S/H DC ADJ MODE
→ OFF
ITEM : TEST OUT SELECT
→ VBS
Rch Gch Bch
2.
Perform the R-channel adjustment using the menu until the vertical stripes become least visible on the picture monitor.
MENU : SERVICE
PAGE : S23 S/H DC
ITEM : S/H DC B Rch (1)
3.
On the menu, adjust as follows.
MENU : SERVICE
PAGE : S23 S/H DC
ITEM : TEST OUT SELECT
→ G
9-12
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-2-11. RPN Correction Procedure
The RPN correction procedure is shown below.
RPN exists.
RPN exists in the Slow Shutter mode.
Execute M21: APR of the MAINTENANCE MENU.
Execute M21: APR (SLS) of the MAINTENANCE MENU.
NG under the adjacent conditions
Possibility of NG under 7 line restriction.
Delete registrations of peripheral small
RPNs and execute re-registration.
RPN is removed?
Yes
Correction
OK
No
Perform section 9-2-10. S/H DC
Adjustment.
RPN is corrected?
Yes
Correction
OK
No
If an RPN extends over 2 pixels or more, change the RPN WIDTH in the range of
2 to 4, and execute re-registration.
The S/H DC adjustment is executed normally?
No
Printed circuit board may be defective. Replace the printed circuit boards of DCP-49A and
TG-260, and CHB block one after another to locate the cause of the trouble.
Yes
Perform section 9-2-9. RPN
Adjustment.
RPN is corrected?
No
Correction is not possible.
Replace the CCD block.
Yes
Correction
OK
RPN is corrected?
Yes
Correction
OK
No
PDW-F800/V1 (E)
9-13
PDW-F800 (SY) E
9-968-643-01
Sony Corporation
Printed in Japan
2009. 6 16
©2009

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- HD/SD -SDI recording
- Professional Disc (P-Disc) compatibility
- MPEG HD422 compression
- Power HAD FX system
- Memory Stick compatibility
- Various professional recording features